Browse the manual
  1. 1. Introduction
  2. 2. App Overview & Navigation
  3. 3. Your Song Library
  4. 4. The iPad Song Editor
  5. 5. Go Live — Performance Mode
  6. 6. Song Editor
  7. 6a. Info — Song Details
  8. 6b. Regions Editor
  9. 6b-1. Versions
  10. 6c. Lyrics Editor
  11. 6d. Audio Editor Tools
  12. 7. External Lyrics Display
  13. 8. EQ (Equalizer)
  14. 9. Mixer
  15. 10. MIDI
  16. 10a. Vessa Keys — The Layered Instrument
  17. 11. Settings
  18. 11a. Sharing, Backup & Import
  19. 11b. iCloud Sync
  20. 11c. Using More Than One Device
  21. 12. Beat-Grid & Metronome
  22. 13. Keyboard & Accessibility
  23. 14. Appendix — File Formats & Glossary
  24. 15. How to Maintain This Manual

Vessa Rig — User Manual

Version: 4.79 (October 2026)
Status: Living document — update this file whenever a feature is added or changed.
Platform: macOS / iPad (Mac Catalyst)

Instrument names (October 2026). The instruments are Vessa Keys (Keys for short), and Vessa Pad (Pad for short). On screen, where the full name does not fit, they wear a mark: V·KEYS and V·PAD — on the Keys module's power key, the mixer's instrument strips and the pad key in the Keys workspace — and V·Keys and V·Pad in Layout Design's module list. The mark keeps the instrument's strip from reading like the mixer's Keys bus (your songs' keyboard stems); VoiceOver says "Vessa Keys" and "Vessa Pad". The Keys module's Pads style is now Grid. Copies of your patches kept before a conversion are in Files → Vessa Rig → Vessa Keys Backups (once legacy instrument backup folder — the app moves it for you). Only the names changed: your patches, layouts and settings are as they were.


1. Introduction

Vessa Rig is a live-performance audio workstation for musicians, bands, and performers. It lets you:

Vessa Rig is designed first for iPad on stage, but runs equally well on macOS.

A note on AI features: Vessa Rig includes on-device AI tools for tempo detection, key detection, section analysis, and cue-label recognition. These features are designed to speed up the process of adding songs to your library — not to replace your judgment. Results will occasionally be wrong, incomplete, or require manual correction. Always review AI suggestions before committing them. All processing happens entirely on your device; no audio is ever uploaded.

1.1 Multicore Audio

Vessa Rig takes advantage of multicore devices automatically. For supported live multitrack playback, it spreads music-bus processing — including tempo and pitch changes — across CPU cores. This can provide more audio headroom for demanding arrangements.

Multicore playback supports up to 16 music buses, with no core-count setting to configure. On compatible audio routes, microphone effects also share multicore processing with your tracks. Microphone effects continue to work when tracks are paused or no song is loaded; their controls and routing stay the same.

Vessa Keys' native built-in sound engine can now share audio workers with music and microphone effects. This first Vessa Keys implementation is enabled automatically on supported 44.1 kHz, 20-output routes, including the verified Fireface setup. It works with tracks playing, paused or unloaded. Other routes keep the existing sound engine path.

The benefit depends on your device, song and effects. Vessa Keys' layer effects, sampler fallback and third-party instruments are not moved onto these workers by this update. Video projection has its own processing demands.


2. App Overview & Navigation

Vessa Rig uses a unified workspace model built entirely around the Go Live cockpit. You stay in Go Live for everything and shape it to suit you: it's a modular cockpit where you arrange your own control panels (see §5.0a), and your library and setlists live in a floating Library window (§3.7). The old fixed sidebar and separate Assemble tab are gone — heavy song editing now opens in place over the cockpit (see §6).

The iPad's status bar — the clock, the date, Wi-Fi and the battery — is hidden everywhere in Vessa Rig: on the cockpit, in the Pro Mixer, the editor, Settings, the Keys workspace and every other full-screen view, every time it opens. (The orange microphone dot iPadOS draws at the screen's top edge while the microphone is in use still appears; it takes no touch.)

Stage Controls — the pucks

Instead of a fixed navigation bar, the cockpit's chrome is a set of small draggable pucks that float over the canvas. Drag a puck to move it — each remembers where you put it, separately for portrait and landscape — and tap it to act. The buttons you reach for live wherever you park them. The pucks are solid keys drawn in the page's look (Stage, Dusk or Daylight — see The ••• Menu), so they read clearly over any module.

Puck Icon Action
Editorsquare.and.pencilOpens the Song Editor — full-screen on iPhone, in place over the cockpit on iPad (audio keeps playing).
••• (Overflow)ellipsisOpens the menu of occasional and setup controls — the page's look and colour theme, Layout Design, Module looks, backups, Settings and more. See The ••• Menu below.
Librarybuilding.columnsOpens the floating Library window (§3.7). It appears as its own puck only while the Controls module is hidden — the Controls module's first key is the Library, so while that module is on your canvas the puck stays out of the way. Like every panel key, it wears a small pin badge while the Library is pinned.

The pucks step aside while Layout Design or Module looks is open. On iPhone they also hide while a floating card (Mixer, Mic or Projection) is open, so they never sit on top of the card's own controls.

Leaving the editor: on iPad the editor has its own ‹ Live button at the top-right of the editor header to return to the cockpit; on iPhone the full-screen editor closes with its ✓ at the top-right, which keeps your changes. Once the current tab has changes, a red ✕ at the top-left discards them and closes instead (Keep & Close / Discard).

Performance mode is active the whole time you're in Go Live — background processing (AI analysis, waveform pre-generation) is suspended, and stays suspended even while the editor is open, so there's no audio disruption opening or closing it.

The ••• Menu

Tap the ••• puck for everything you set up between songs rather than during them. From the top:

Item What it does
APPEARANCEHow the app looks, in three rows. LOOK — Stage, Dusk or Daylight, each shown as a small picture of the Live page in that look, with a lamp lit on the one in use. It sets the finish the Live modules are drawn in; a module that can't draw that look uses the nearest darker one, and a module can be given a finish of its own (see Module looks below). MATERIAL — Plain (today's flat faces), Character (each module drawn as its own piece of hardware) or Vintage (the same hardware, old and well played) — see Material. COLOUR THEME — Stage Teal, Rosewood, Golden Era or Titanium, the app's accent colours. A tap applies at once and the menu stays open, so you watch the page behind it change. The strip's heading names what is in use, e.g. Stage · Titanium.
LAYOUTSYour favourite layouts, one row each — tap a row to switch the whole page to it; the layout on screen is ticked. Shown once you have favourites (The Layouts module), and here even when the Layouts module is hidden, so you can always switch back. Not shown while the window is shrunk into the compact layout.
Layout DesignOpens the editor for the window's size. At full size, rearrange your modules and choose each one's look — see §5.0a. While the window is shrunk into the compact layout, it arranges the compact layout itself, and reads This window size under its name (§2.1).
Module looksChange one module's look in the middle of a set, without entering Layout Design (see below). Its caption, or hold two fingers on a module, names the shortcut.
Mixer · Microphones · ProjectionOpen those floating panels. Listed only when the Controls module is hidden — otherwise the Controls module's own keys do it, so the menu stays short. Microphones appears only once a live microphone channel is set up. A panel turned off in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS isn't listed (Microphones still is while a mic is talking).
iCloud SyncKeep your library on every device signed into your Apple Account — §11b.
Remote ControlGive this device a job beside the rig — §11c.
Import…One entry for every file you can bring in — songs, lyrics, a setlist or a whole library (§11a).
Backup & Restore…Opens a small menu: Full Backup · Database Backup · Restore Backup. See Full Backup & Restore.
Settings§11.

The colour theme is chosen only here. Settings no longer has a theme page. A device that was set to one of the retired themes (Nebula, Florida Sunset or Sunny Day) opens on Titanium.

Module looks

Every module can wear its own look — a finish, and on some modules a style or a trim. Layout Design sets these, but to change one mid-gig without entering it, use ••• → Module looks or a two-finger press-and-hold on the module — see Module looks — without Layout Design.

Editor Tips (Show Tips)

The Regions / waveform editor teaches its controls as you use them: the first few times you use a hinted control, a small frosted banner (with a yellow 💡 icon) slides in to explain it, then it goes quiet for good. To bring the hints back, open the editor's ••• menu and tap Show Tips — this re-arms every control's banners. There is no separate lightbulb button and no Settings toggle; tips live entirely behind ••• → Show Tips.

2.1 Stage Manager Window Resizing (iPad)

Vessa Rig is fully compatible with Stage Manager on iPad. When you drag the window handle to resize the app in any direction, the layout adapts without losing any controls:

Element Behavior when window is shrunk
Song Editor header barAlways fully visible — never compressed or clipped
Full-screen editor's bottom waveform bar — in a narrow window the Editor puck opens the full-screen editor (§5.4); the bar sits on its Info, Lyrics and Tracks tabsKeeps its full height — the tab's content above it gives up the space
Floating panels & pucksStay reachable — the Library window and pucks float over the canvas and can be dragged into view
Editor content areaCompresses first — scrollable content shrinks to fill whatever space remains

The app enforces a minimum window size of 320 × 200 pt. Below that floor, Stage Manager will not let the window shrink further.

The compact layout. Your full cockpit is too much to cram into a small window, so when the iPad window is shrunk well below full screen, Go Live switches to a compact layout — the same pocket arrangement an iPhone uses, in a portrait or landscape version to suit the window's shape. Your full-size layout is never touched: widen the window again and it comes straight back. While compact, ••• → Layout Design (it reads This window size while the window is shrunk) arranges the compact layout itself (portrait and landscape are kept separately); while you do, the preset button offers Reset this size, which puts it back to the built-in arrangement. Arranging your full-size layout, and Module looks, wait until the window is full-size again.

Practical tip: If you are performing on an iPad using Stage Manager alongside a setlist app or sheet music viewer, you can shrink Vessa Rig and still reach the full song controls — the cockpit drops to its compact layout and the panels and pucks stay within reach.

2.2 Software Keyboard Behavior (iPad)

When the on-screen keyboard appears for text editing (lyrics, song titles, region names, etc.), the app layout does not shift upward. The keyboard overlays the bottom portion of the screen while all other content remains pinned in place — the header, panels, and pucks stay exactly where they are.

Individual elements such as the waveform transport bar animate upward to sit flush against the top of the keyboard so they remain accessible while typing.


3. Your Song Library

3.1 Adding a Song

  1. Open the Library window (tap the Library key — icon building.columns — at the start of the Controls module, or the floating Library key, which appears only while the Controls module is hidden).
  2. Tap the + (add) button in the Library window's top row.
  3. Enter a Song Title (required). If the title is already taken, the field turns orange and tells you so — your typing is kept, so you only change the word you need to.
  4. Tap the Audio Files tile and select one or more audio files from your device storage. Each file becomes one track (stem) within the song. Tap the tile again to add more; each staged file appears below as a chip with an ✕ to drop it, and the ✕ on the tile itself clears them all.
    • Select the whole folder if you like. The picker takes pictures as well as audio, so you can select everything in a song's folder in one go — the audio becomes the song's tracks and a picture becomes its cover. If several pictures come in, the one whose name best matches the song (or is called something like cover, folder, artwork or front) is used, and the Cover tile says which. Anything swept up by mistake shows as a chip you can drop before saving.
  5. (Optional) Tap the Cover tile to choose artwork for the song, for when the picture is not sitting in the folder with the audio. The tile shows the picture once set, with an ✕ to clear it.
  6. (Optional) Tap the Lyrics tile to paste or open lyrics now — the song is created with its words already in place. A lyrics-only song is perfectly valid; audio can be added later.
  7. (Optional) Set Tempo & Key:
    • BPM — enter the beats per minute manually, or use Auto-fill with AI (see below).
    • Time Sig — numerator / denominator (defaults to 4/4).
    • Key — tap to open the Key Picker (root · accidental · quality).
    • Auto-fill with AI — analyses the first imported audio file to detect tempo, time signature, and key automatically. Requires at least one audio file to be selected.
  8. (Optional) Built-in Vamp — toggle on to create a synthesised groove when the song is imported. The built-in metronome handles timing (no click track needed); spoken cues are generated later in the Regions Editor once you have sections.
  9. (Optional) Cue language — the language the spoken cues on your guide track were recorded in, so Detect Sections can understand them (a guide that calls out "coro" needs Spanish here). Auto-detect listens to the audio and picks the best match. This is what the app listens for — the voice it speaks with is the separate Voice picker in §5.13.
  10. Tap Add to Library. The song appears in the library immediately.

Nothing is hidden. Every setting on this sheet is on screen — scroll to reach it, no drawers to open. Each section's heading also prints its own values on the right (116 · 4/4 · C♯m), so you can confirm your tempo and key while looking at something else.

What happens after you import. You don't have to tap anything for the app to make sense of a new song. It analyzes each import in the background — checking for tempo changes and leading silence — and, when it finds something worth acting on, surfaces a Song Setup banner with one-tap offers to match the tempo or align the start. See Automatic Analysis on Import.

Supported audio formats: Any format readable by AVFoundation — .m4a, .mp3, .wav, .aiff, .caf, .flac, and more.

Click and cues in one file — split for you. Many backing-track apps export the click and the spoken cues as a single stereo file: the metronome on one side, a voice calling "chorus", "bridge", "last time" on the other. Vessa Rig listens to what you import and, when it hears that, gives you two tracks instead of one — Click and Cues — each with its own fader, mute and level. Turn the voice down without touching the click; mute the cues for the second service and keep the beat. Both still go to your in-ears on the Click & Cues bus, exactly as the single file did. It works whatever the file is called, because the decision is made from the audio itself. If the two signals can't be told apart with certainty the file is left whole, so nothing is ever taken apart on a guess.

A stereo click that is really mono. Some libraries ship the click — and the guide — as a stereo file with the same thing on both sides. There is nothing to separate there, so Vessa Rig makes it a single mono track instead, under its own name, at import. Same audio, half the size, and every feature that works on a click can then see it. A stereo file that genuinely carries two different signals is never folded this way; it is either split into Click and Cues or left whole.

The two tracks replace the combined file rather than sitting alongside it — together they hold exactly the same audio, so nothing is lost, but there is no third "click and cues" track underneath and no one-tap way back to one. Your original file on your computer or in your other app is of course untouched.

Spoken-title file detection. The Spoken title switch is always on the sheet, dimmed until there is something to offer. If one of your imported files is short (under ~20 s) and named like a title cue (e.g. title, titulo, nombre, intro, voiceover), the section reads FOUND and names the file. Turn the switch on to use it as the song's Title Announcement — it is then not added as a playable track. Off by default; nothing changes unless you turn it on.

3.2 Organizing with Folders

Folders give each song one home. They live on the Library window's Library tab — tap Library again while you're on it to switch from the flat song list to your Folders. Folders nest two levels deep: top-level folders, and folders inside them. A song is in one folder at a time (Books and Topics are for songs that belong in several places — see §3.7); songs that are in no folder wait under Unfiled at the foot of the list.

Creating a Folder

On the Folders view, tap Folder (folder.badge.plus) above the list. The New Folder sheet asks for a name and a Location: ROOT puts the folder at the top level, or pick a top-level folder to create the new one inside it. Tap Create.

Accordion Navigation

Gesture Effect
Tap a top-level folderOpens it and closes the other top-level folders. Tap it again while it is the only one open to close it.
Double-tap a top-level folderOpens or closes just that folder and leaves the others as they are, so you can keep several open at once.
Tap a folder inside an open folderSteps into it. A breadcrumb (e.g. FOLDERS › WORSHIP › SLOW) runs across the top; tap any step of it, or the ‹ button, to step back out.
Long-press a folderA menu with Rename and Delete.

An open folder lists its sub-folders first, then its songs. Every folder shows how many songs it holds.

Folder Swipe Actions

Swipe left on a folder to reveal its actions:

Button Color Action
Rename (pencil)BlueRenames the folder (see below)
Move OutIndigoOnly on a folder inside another folder — moves it up to the top level
🗑 Delete (trash)RedAsks before deleting (see below)

Folder Delete Confirmation

Tapping Delete never removes anything immediately. An alert asks Delete "<folder name>"? and says what will happen: an empty folder is simply removed; a folder with songs is removed and its songs move to Unfiled — they stay in your library. Folders that were inside it move up to the top level. Tap Delete to confirm or Cancel to keep it.

Deleting a folder never deletes a song or an audio file. To delete songs, swipe the song itself (§3.6).

Renaming a Folder

Swipe left on the folder and tap Rename, or long-press it and choose Rename. Type the new name and tap Save; Cancel keeps the old one. A blank name is ignored.

Unfiled

Songs that are in no folder appear under Unfiled (a tray icon) below the folders, with their count beside it. Tap it to open or close the list; once every song has a folder it reads Every song is filed. Drag a song onto Unfiled to take it out of its folder.

Drag-and-Drop Songs into Folders

You can move a song into a folder by dragging it from the song list and dropping it onto a folder:

  1. Press and hold a song row until it lifts.
  2. Drag it over the folder — the folder lights up in the theme's accent colour to show it will take the song.
  3. Release to move the song into that folder.

Because a song lives in one folder, moving it takes it out of the folder it was in. You can also drop a song on a step of the breadcrumb to move it into that folder, or on the breadcrumb's FOLDERS step to take it out of every folder. To file a song without dragging, swipe it and use Add to → Move to Folder (§3.6).

3.3 Setlists

Setlists — and their folders — live in the Setlists tab of the Library window. See Section 3.8 for the full walkthrough, and the live Setlist module in Go Live (§5) for performing one.

3.4 Searching & Sorting

Sort Order

A sort button (↑↓ arrows icon) sits at the right edge of the search bar. Tap it to open a sort picker with four options:

Option Sort order
TitleAlphabetical by song title (A → Z)
ArtistAlphabetical by artist name (A → Z); songs with no artist set go to the bottom of the list, by title
BPMAscending tempo (slowest first)
Date AddedMost recently added first

The selected sort option is shown with a checkmark in the theme accent color. The sort button icon fills with the accent color to indicate a non-default order is active. The choice is saved between sessions using app storage.

Sort applies after search filtering — you can combine search and sort freely. Sorting also applies when viewing songs inside a folder — the same four sort options work within any folder's contents.

Sort and search. Title is the default, and while you're searching it means closest match first (§3.4) — alphabetical order is a poor answer to a question you just asked. Pick Artist, BPM or Date Added yourself and that choice wins: results stay in the order you asked for.


3.5 Song Row Display

Each song in the Library window's list is one row. From left to right:

Part What it shows
CoverThe song's artwork — the picture you chose, or the app's mark when it has none. In Group Edit a tick in its corner shows whether the song is picked.
TitleSemibold — bold on the loaded song. A long title shrinks slightly before it is cut off. A pulsing teal wand beside it means the song is waiting for setup (see Automatic Analysis on Import).
ArtistUnder the title, smaller and quieter — only when an artist is set.
Practice-mix chipUnder the artist, on a song that arrived as a practice mix (the band as one track instead of separate stems). It names what the copy leaves out — e.g. no Drums — or reads one mix when nothing is missing, so you know what you'll have to cover.
KeyA small tinted chip on the right (e.g. Eb, C♯m). Minor keys add a lowercase m (Am, F♯m); major keys show no suffix. Only when a key is set.
Length or words-only markBeside the key: the song's length (e.g. 4:55) — or, for a song with no audio, a small mark of three short lines, like a page of lyrics, standing exactly where a length would be. It is how you tell at a glance which songs are words only.
BPMUnder the key and length, e.g. 120 BPM (just the number when the window is narrow). Only when a tempo is set.

The loaded song says so on its row three ways: a bar in the theme's accent colour down its left edge, a tint across the whole row, and a bold title. A song that needs setup carries a teal outline around its row as well as the wand.

All metadata fields come straight from the song's Info tab. If a field is empty it is left off the row rather than shown as a placeholder.


3.5a Song Artwork

Every song has a cover. You can give it one, and until you do, the app puts its own mark in its place, so a library of songs looks like a library of songs rather than a list of empty squares.

Artwork appears on the library rows, on the Setlists tab, on the Live page's set list (§5.0b), in the Regions module's song header, and beside the song title at the top-left of the wide iPad editor. It appears as soon as a song is loaded; you do not need to open Library first.

Giving a song a cover

Pictures are trimmed to a square and stored with the song. Pictures you import yourself travel with the song when you share it. Covers downloaded by automatic matching stay on your device and are omitted from shared song packages; the artwork service does not grant redistribution rights.

Find Covers

The library's ⋯ menu has Find Covers…. In Group Edit, select songs and use the same menu for just that selection; otherwise it uses the whole library. It first looks for artwork already on your device — a picture sitting in the song's own folder, or artwork inside its audio — and shows you what it found. Everything is ticked; untick anything wrong and apply. It never changes a song that already has a cover, and nothing is written until you say so.

It also tells you how many it found, which is the only way to know how much of your library carries artwork already.

Find missing covers online automatically

In Find Covers…, tap Find online covers…, then Find online covers. You can open this while the local scan is still running. Vessa searches song titles and artists in MusicBrainz, downloads available front covers from Cover Art Archive, and groups the results:

Stop pauses the batch. Resume / retry continues unfinished work. Completed searches and images are cached, so reopening this workflow normally reuses them. The cache can expire or be cleared by the system. Offline and service-limit errors pause the search and retain progress; they are not counted as missing covers. Keep Vessa open while searching; downloads are not guaranteed to continue in the background.

Existing covers are never replaced, including a cover assigned while a search is running. Undo last additions removes the last batch's covers while keeping covers you changed afterward; it remains available after closing and reopening the sheet. Titles, artists, lyrics and audio files are not changed. Only titles and artists are sent for the search. Catalog coverage varies, and Live, Acoustic and Remix versions may need review.

Find a cover online yourself

In Find Covers…, tap Search the web myself…, then choose a song without artwork. Or tap a song's cover in the editor and choose Search Online / Replace from Web.

The browser searches using the song title and artist. You can edit the search words. Open the picture you want at its larger size, tap Select image, then tap that picture. Check the square preview and tap Use Cover (or Replace Cover). Choose another returns to the browser. Small pictures are flagged so you can find a sharper version.

Saving from the library returns you to the remaining songs, ready for the next search. Your existing covers are kept; replacement is an explicit action from the song editor or the Library song’s Replace Cover… menu. If a song or its artwork changes while the browser is open, Vessa asks you to reopen the search instead of overwriting that change. Close leaves the cover unchanged.

An Internet connection is required. The title and artist are sent to the search website when you open the browser. You choose each image yourself; this is not automatic batch matching. Use artwork you have permission to use.

Songs without a cover

A song with no cover of its own shows the Vessa Rig mark — the app's flame on a dark square. The flame never changes; the colour of the ground beneath it comes from the song's title, so it differs from song to song and is the same every time you open the app. In the library lists and the Regions header it is drawn quietly, so it never competes with the titles beside it; in the song editor it is drawn at full strength.

The Live page's set list follows its style (chosen in the module's look — see Module looks):

Set-list style A song without art shows
CardsIts initials — the first letters of the first and last words of its title (Build My Life → BL), or the first two letters of a one-word title — on a quiet coloured square. The square's colour belongs to the song, so it stays the same wherever the song sits in the set.
CoversIts initials too, drawn large on the cover tile in the same coloured square — the letters grow with the tile.
TitlesNo art at all — the title has the whole width.

Give the song a real cover whenever you like and it takes over everywhere.


3.6 Song Swipe Actions

Swipe left on any song row to reveal swipe actions. In the library list, swipe actions operate on the song itself — which ones appear depends on the tab you're on:

Button Color Action
Edit (pencil)BlueOpens the Edit Song sheet (see below)
ShareAccentOpens the song's Share sheet (Sharing a Song)
Add toIndigoAdds the song to books, topics or setlists — and, on the Library tab, offers Move to Folder
CopyTealBooks and Topics only — holds the song so you can paste it into another book or topic in a couple of taps
Duplicate (doc on doc)GrayLibrary tab only — creates a copy of the song with the name "<Title> copy"
RemoveOrangeInside a book or topic — takes the song out of that one only; it stays in your library
🗑 Delete (trash)RedLibrary tab only — opens a confirmation dialog (see below)

Edit Song Sheet

The Edit Song sheet is a compact form for fast metadata changes without leaving the Library window. Its Song Info section contains three fields (a History section below them shows when the song was last played and how many times):

Field Description
NameEdit the song title
ArtistEdit the artist name
KeyEnter the musical key as text (e.g. G♯ minor, Bb major, Am). The app parses this into root, accidental, and quality components automatically. Common abbreviations are recognized: Fm, F min, Fmin → F minor; G maj, Gmaj → G major. Sharps and flats can be entered as #, b, ♯, or ♭.

Tap Save to apply or Cancel to discard. Changes are immediately reflected in the library song row.

Tip: For full song details (tempo, time signature, MIDI, and more), open the Song Editor (Editor puck) — tap the song, then use its Info tab.

Delete confirmation dialog — tapping the red trash button never deletes immediately. A sheet appears asking how much to remove:

Option What is deleted
Remove from LibraryThe song record and all its settings are removed from Vessa Rig. Audio files on your device are kept.
Delete All (including audio files)The song record and the audio files stored on your device are permanently removed. This option only appears if the song actually has audio files attached.
CancelNothing happens.

This action is permanent. "Remove from Library" can be undone by re-importing the audio files. "Delete All" cannot be undone.

Setlist swipe actions (inside a setlist) are available in the Setlists tab — see Section 3.8.


Duplicate a prepared song

Swipe a song and choose Duplicate. Choose Duplicate again to keep its current audio, or Duplicate with New Audio… to name a copy and choose several replacement files together. Regions, lyrics, paragraph markers, timing, track settings and mixer snapshots are carried into the copy. Ordinary duplication shares the large audio files to save space; edits and subsequent replacements belong to each song independently.

The new-audio option opens a track review. Matching filenames are selected automatically; choose the destination for any unmatched file, Add as new track, or Skip this file. Create Copy saves the reviewed result. Tracks you leave alone keep their current audio. The original song remains unchanged.

3.7 The Library Window

Your whole library and all your setlists live in a floating Library window. Open it from the live cockpit — tap the Library key (the library building, building.columns), first in the Controls module, or the floating Library key while the Controls module is hidden; tap the same key again to close it. It's a movable, resizable panel (not a full-screen takeover), so you can browse and audition songs while the rest of your cockpit stays visible.

Open panels return after relaunch. Library, Mixer, Microphones and Projection remember whether you left them open or closed, along with their existing pin and position settings. Closing the app does not close these panels; closing a panel with its key or ✕ keeps it closed next time. This restores the controls, not audio playback.

Closing the Library and reopening it during the same app session keeps the tab, open setlist or folder, expanded books/topics, and search you were using. Switching briefly to another panel does too. Tap the active Setlists tab again when you want to return to its root browser. The editor's Library remembers its browsing separately from Live's.

Moving & sizing the window

Action How
MovePress and hold anywhere on the top row (even on a tab) for a moment, then drag — or drag one of the grab bars on the window's left and right edges. There is no grab handle along the top: near the top of the screen the system takes that drag for itself and shrinks the whole app.
ResizeDrag either diagonal-arrows handle, at the top-left or bottom-right corner.
📌 PinPinned keeps the window open whatever other panel you open — several pinned panels can be open together. Unpinned — how a new install starts, shown as a struck-through pin — it closes by its ✕, a Library key, or when you open another panel; a tap outside it doesn't close it. Choosing a song inside the window never closes it.
✕Closes the window.

The window never darkens the page or gets in its way: a tap outside it always reaches your modules. It reopens where you left it — remembered separately for portrait and landscape, and on iPad for each layout preset, so it can sit in a clear spot for every layout.

In the wide iPad Song Editor, the library building button opens Library beside the current workspace. Projection and Audio Tracks always put Library on the left, without a side-switch arrow. Info and Lyrics + Mixer start on the right and each remember their own arrow choice (§4.3). Choosing a song closes Library once it loads; pin keeps it open for more browsing. Changing editor panels or returning to Live closes Library even when pinned. The pin preference and your browsing place are remembered.

The tabs run across the top row — Library · Books · Topics · Setlists — alongside + (new song), the pin, and the close button.

Global search. Type in the search bar to find anything by name, artist, or key. Search reaches everywhere — a match appears even when it's filed inside a collapsed folder, book, or topic, so you never have to open a container to find something.

On Books, Topics and Folders, results keep the shape of the tab you're on. Every book (or topic, or folder) holding a match opens itself — ordered so the one holding the closest match comes first, not alphabetically — and one bucket at the foot, Not in any book, gathers the matches that are filed nowhere:

SUNDAY SET (2) DIOS DE PACTOS · DIOS ESTA AQUI NOT IN ANY BOOK (37) CUAN GRANDE ES… · DIOS DE LO IMPOSIBLE · …

So a search always tells you where each result lives, not just that it exists. Tap the bucket's header to fold it away. Because a song can be in several books, it appears under each one it's in — that's the answer to "which books is this in?". Folders are exclusive, so a folder match appears once; while searching, folders at every depth are listed, so a song inside a sub-folder still shows up. Clear the field and the tab returns exactly as you left it — nothing you collapsed is re-opened behind your back.

Creating & organizing. + adds a song. On Folders, Books and Topics, a Folder / Book / Topic button creates a new one; on Setlists, the Folder and Setlist buttons do. Drag a song onto a folder / book / topic to file it. Swipe a song row for Edit · Share · Add to · Duplicate · Delete; inside a book or topic, Copy and Remove (from that book or topic only — the song stays in your library) take the place of Duplicate and Delete.


3.8 Setlists

Open the Setlists tab in the Library window to build and run your shows.

Browsing. Setlists live in folders. Tap a folder to open it inline (up to two open at once — opening a third closes the oldest); tap a nested folder to drill in, with a breadcrumb across the top and a ‹ button to jump back to the top level. Re-tap the Setlists tab to pop all the way out to the root from anywhere. The search bar here is pull-to-reveal: it stays hidden until you pull the list down; scroll back up to tuck it away.

The setlist rows. Each row shows the setlist's name (in its own colour, if you gave it one) and how many songs it holds; tap it to open the set. The set that is loaded in the live Setlist module is the highlighted one — tinted, with a bar in the theme's accent colour down its left edge and a small speaker icon; the others are plain. A yellow ★ marks a favourite, and a green chain-link badge marks a set whose automatic transitions are armed — the same symbol as the transport's AUTO key, remembered per setlist (§5.3). Swipe a setlist row for Settings · Move · Duplicate · Delete.

Inside a setlist, the header gives you:

Editing the set. Swipe a song row for Edit · Version · Loop · Delete — Loop only on songs with audio, and Versions… in place of Version on a song that has none yet (§6b-1) — and long-press-drag to reorder. To change what happens after a song, use its transition chip (§5.2a).

Stage Flow (a per-setlist option) turns the list into a live performance view: played songs grey out and move aside under a running show clock, keeping the next song front-and-center. See Section 5.21.


3.9 Suggested Sets

Tap ✨ Suggest on any setlist and the list flips in place to an alternate set the app builds for you — companion songs that fit, ranked first by shared message (what the songs are actually about — drawn from their lyrics, titles, and the Topics you've tagged them with), then by shared Books, compatible key and tempo, and how recently / often you've played them. Because it weighs what a song means rather than just matching words, ✨ Suggest can pair songs that carry the same message even when they're worded completely differently — including across languages: an English-only song and a Spanish-only song about the same thing can be suggested for each other. Each pick carries a short reason chip ("Shared message", "Same book/topic", "Compatible key", "Played recently"…).

Suggest is also on the live Setlist module — its ✨ button swaps the tiles to the suggested set so you can glance at ideas mid-show, then tap again to return.

Play history. The recency and frequency the suggester leans on are tracked automatically as you perform. To see a song's history, swipe it → Edit — the History section shows Last played and Times played.


4. The iPad Song Editor

Note (read first): This section documents the iPad song editor. On iPad you open it from Go Live with the Editor puck (square.and.pencil); it opens in place over the cockpit (audio keeps playing) as a single Regions editor — the waveform at the top, the lyrics in a panel below it, and everything else reached from the controls around them (described below). Return to the cockpit with the editor's own ‹ Live button at the top-right of the header. On iPhone the Editor puck opens a full-screen editor with four tabs (Info / Lyrics / Tracks / Editor), closed with its ✓; an iPad window narrow enough to take the iPhone layout opens a full-screen editor too — see §6.

This is your song preparation surface. Import songs, adjust the mix, write and time-sync lyrics, draw regions, and verify how a song looks and feels before you perform it.


4.1 Layout

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ [art] Song title             clock (m:ss) · snap               ‹ Live │
├──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ [•••] [AI] [follow] [↩ ↪]   selected region   [+]   ⏮  ▶  metronome  │
│ ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │
│ │ section markers · cues track       (when the song has them)      │ │
│ │ WAVEFORM — ruler on top; draw · label · tune regions             │ │
│ └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ │
│                  [lock] [push]  (region selected)      [− zoom +]    │
│ BOTTOM PANEL                                                         │
│ [✎ ⤓ hand ▾]    TITLE · key · BPM     Library  Projection  Info      │
│                                       Audio Tracks  Mixer            │
│ lyrics                         │ compact mixer                       │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

There is no song-list sidebar in the editor — it spans the full width and edits the currently-loaded song. Pick a different song from the Setlist module (§5.0b) or the Library window (§3.7) — the editor has a Library window of its own (§4.3).


4.2 Header Bar

The header is a slim strip across the top of the editor:

Where What
LeftThe loaded song's artwork and title. A long title is shortened to fit, keeping the clock and other controls in place. This song header appears in the wide iPad editor.
CentreThe playhead clock as minutes:seconds (no fractional seconds — the waveform and ruler carry finer detail), with the snap control beside it (see Snap-to-Grid). The snap control shows the current snap size and turns orange while snapping is on. Tap it to turn snapping on or off; hold it for the snap size (Bar, ½ Bar, Beat — picking one also turns snapping on) and the ruler's units (Bars or Time).
Right‹ Live — saves, closes the editor and returns to the cockpit.

The bottom panel also offers the song's key and tempo (§4.4). In Info, the title stays in the top header and the editable song-details card instead of repeating in the panel's toolbar.


4.2a Inline Control Row

Below the header, a row of controls sits above the waveform:

Control Purpose
•••The waveform tools: Versions… (§6b-1), Beat Align, the tempo tools and Show Tips (brings back the one-line tips the buttons show during their first few uses). The tempo tools are Detect Variable Tempo and Re-check Tempo, plus Halve Grid Tempo (÷2) / Double Grid Tempo (×2) on a song with one steady tempo — or, once the song has a variable tempo, Tempo Changes, halving or doubling the tempo, moving bar 1 one beat earlier or later, re-snapping regions to the grid and Clear Variable Tempo. The button turns teal while Beat Align is on.
AIDetect Sections → Add Regions (with a Language choice — the language the song is sung in), Cues Track → Add Cues or Delete Cues (spoken cues, with their own Language; adding needs regions), and Built-in Vamp → Generate Built-in Vamp or Delete Built-in Vamp.
Follow playhead (location)Keeps the waveform scrolling with the playhead during playback; tap to turn it off or back on.
↩ / ↪Undo and redo waveform edits — regions and markers. Dimmed when there is nothing to undo or redo. (The full-screen lyrics editor has its own pair for the text — §4.5.)
Selected regionTap a region on the waveform and its colour, name and section tag appear in the middle of the row: tap the colour dot to recolour it, the name to rename it and the tag to change it. A key chip beside them sets a key change from that section on (Key Changes Inside a Song).
+Adds a region. Hold it for Region Length (how many bars a new region spans, or Fill Gap up to the next region) and Auto-Marker Settings.
TransportPinned at the right end of the row: ⏮ back to the beginning, ▶ / ⏸ play and pause, and the metronome. On a wide editor a language key follows (dimmed when the song has only one language).

The editor's play key only ever pauses — it never stops back to the top — so you can pause, adjust and carry on from exactly where you were; ⏮ takes you back to the beginning. It plays through the same transport as Go Live: the song starts the way the Live PLAY key would start it.

When the editor is less wide — a smaller iPad held upright, or Split View — it makes room for the selected region's name: the language key drops out of the transport, and the follow-playhead button steps aside while a region is selected.


4.3 Choosing songs (no editor sidebar)

The editor has no song list of its own — it always edits the currently-loaded song. Load a different song from the Setlist module (§5.0b) or the floating Library window (§3.7), and the editor follows. The editor has a Library window of its own, too: tap the Library button (building.columns) in the bottom panel's header — it turns teal while the window is open. Organizing your library — folders, search, add-song, batch Group Edit, and double-tap a song to play / crossfade — all live in the Library window and Setlist module (see §3 and §5).

Library's placement follows the page you are using:

Page Library placement
ProjectionAlways left; the preview stays right. No side-switch arrow.
Audio TracksAlways left; the track list fits on the right. No side-switch arrow.
Lyrics + MixerRight initially, covering the mixer so the lyrics remain visible. The arrow switches sides.
InfoRight initially. The arrow switches sides to uncover the other details.

Info and Lyrics + Mixer each remember your chosen side across closing Library, changing songs and restarting the app. Moving Library in one does not change the other. Changing pages closes Library; reopening it uses that page's placement. Pin only keeps it open after choosing a song.


4.4 Workspace Area — Always-Edit

The iPad editor is always in editor mode — there is no separate Preview / Edit toggle, and changes save continuously. The workspace is the Regions waveform editor: draw, label and tune region boundaries on the waveform, with the waveform tools in the ••• menu above it (§4.2a).

Below the waveform sits the bottom panel. It shows the song's lyrics — tap-to-mark timing, import and editing (§6c) — and, beside them, the compact Mixer (§4.9). Its header carries:

Where What
LeftThe lyrics tools: ✎ opens the full-screen lyrics editor (double-tapping the lyrics does the same); Import Lyrics (square.and.arrow.down); and the tap-to-place hand — what a tap on the lyrics does: a red R hand to Draw Regions (songs with audio), a blue L hand to Cue Lyrics (each tapped section gets a marker — at the playhead, on a song with audio). Its ▾ switches between the two and opens the Regions… and Cues… lists. On a less wide editor the ✎ steps aside — double-tap the lyrics instead.
CentreThe song's title (omitted in Info), its key (tap for transpose — see Key & Transpose) and its tempo — the tempo the song is actually playing at; tap it for the Tempo popover (The Tempo Popover).
RightLibrary (building.columns) · Projection (sparkles.tv) · Info (info.circle) · Audio Tracks (waveform) · Lyrics + Mixer (the split-pane key showing text and faders).

Info fills the panel with the song's details (§6a). Audio Tracks fills it with the song's track list, and while it is open the waveform shows its trim and fade handles (§6d). Projection and Mixer are covered in §4.6 and §4.9. Tap Lyrics + Mixer to return to lyrics beside the compact mixer.

Auto-save: changes are saved continuously, so there is nothing to save when you leave — close the editor with its ‹ Live button (top-right of the header). Closing the editor also clears its undo history.

iPhone is different. On iPhone the Editor puck opens a full-screen editor with four tabs — Info / Lyrics / Tracks / Editor — with a ✓ to keep your changes and close, and a red ✕, shown only when the current tab has changes, to discard them. The underlying editors are the same; the tab set and presentation differ by device (see §6).


4.5 Tab Switching & Auto-Save

In the wide iPad editor, Lyrics + Mixer always returns to lyrics on the left and the compact mixer on the right. Info, Audio Tracks and Projection are direct destinations too; you no longer need to tap the highlighted button again to find the lyrics. Switching never discards work:

Undo / Redo: the ↩ ↪ pair in the control row undoes waveform edits (§4.2a); that history is cleared when you close the editor or load another song. The full-screen lyrics editor has its own ↩ ↪ in its header for the text you type.

Song switching: When you load a different song (from the Setlist module or Library window), the editor reloads everything for the newly selected song. No manual refresh is needed.


4.6 Projection Settings

Projection settings (audience fonts, colors, transitions, stage monitor options, and per-song settings) live in the External Video Panel, which opens in the bottom panel.

Tap Projection (sparkles.tv) in the bottom panel's header. The wide iPad editor remembers whether you last showed settings or lyrics beside the preview. Tap Lyrics + Mixer to return to the editing workspace. On iPhone, Projection still toggles its single-column panel.

While it is open, the middle of the panel's header shows a two-segment pill — tap Projection or Editor to switch modes (Editor styles the lyrics editor itself, not the projection). In Projection mode, an output-target row heads the settings: a solid Audience chip carries its Song | Global child pills in a recessed track beside it, and a separate Stage chip sits on the far side. Selecting Stage switches the external output to the stage-monitor view; the Audience / Stage choice is remembered as you navigate.

View Contents
Audience — Song (default)Per-song audience projection settings: lyrics color, background color, background media, overlay effects, and auto-advance speed
Audience — GlobalApp-wide audience projection settings shared across all songs — layout, typography, text effects, lyrics cleanup, background fill, transitions, and auto-projection toggle
StageGlobal stage-monitor settings — lyrics color, background color, typography, chords, alignment, stack mode, and waveform overlay

The settings sit beside the live projection preview — settings on the left, preview on the right. The output-target row stays pinned at the top of the settings pane; only the content below it scrolls — so the live preview stays on screen at all times. On the wide iPad editor, the amber Images button opens Region Images. The cyan Lyrics button replaces settings or images with lyrics while keeping the preview beside them; it then reads Settings, which brings the settings back. These choices survive visiting another editor panel and switching between the Editor and Projection pills. With Library open, Projection keeps Library on the left and preview on the right. Browse songs and tap Aa at the preview’s top-right to choose a theme without hiding Library. This is the same theme button as the Live projection module; it is dimmed on Stage, which does not use themes. Tap Lyrics, Settings or Images to tuck Library away and show that pane beside the preview in one step. Editor also makes room for its typography controls. The Library button reopens browsing in the same place. Pin keeps it open after choosing a song; changing panels always closes it. Closing Library restores your remembered Projection pane. On narrower toolbars the text steps aside, leaving the same distinct icons and colors.

For full details see Section 6c — External Video Panel.

In Go Live the same projection styling is in the Projection panel, opened by the Projection key (sparkles.tv) in the Controls module — or ••• → Projection when the Controls module is hidden. It is a floating card with Projection and Device tabs (Device is the lyrics you see on this screen), and the rest of the cockpit stays fully usable while it is open. See §5.10.


4.7 The Waveform & Timeline

The waveform is the editor's timeline, and it spans the full width:

When a region is selected, two buttons appear in the middle just below the waveform:

Button Off On
🔒 LockDrag a region's handles to resize it.Dragging moves the whole region instead.
↔ PushA handle stops at the neighbouring region.A handle pushes the neighbouring region's boundary along with it.

4.7a The Editor's Transport

The editor carries its own transport at the right end of the control row (§4.2a): ⏮ back to the beginning, ▶ / ⏸ play and pause from where you are, the metronome, and on a wide editor the language key. Space on a hardware keyboard plays and pauses too (§4.10).

Playback is globally shared

The editor's transport, the Pro Mixer's transport, and the Go Live PLAY key all control the same audio engine. Start playback from any one of them and it plays everywhere at once — the playhead advances at the same position in every view.

Similarly, loading a song (from the Setlist module or Library window) immediately loads that song in all other views (Mixer, Go Live, and the Song Editor). The previously selected song in those views is automatically deselected.


4.8 Section Chips (Songs Without Audio)

A song with no audio has no waveform to edit, so in its place the editor shows the song's lyric sections as a row of chips. A slideshow shows chips too: when you add the first audio to a lyrics-only song that has lyrics, the app asks Play as a song or a slideshow?, and Slideshow keeps the chips, with the audio as background music.

A slideshow with background music also gets a ••• menu above the chips, holding Chip Advance — By Bars (metronome) or By Seconds (timed) — and the variable-tempo tools; once it has a variable tempo, Halve and Double buttons sit beside it.

Until the song has any section markers, the area reads No Audio — Lyrics Only and explains how to mark sections from the lyrics or import audio. Live's own region chips — with looping, queueing and preselect — are in the Go Live cockpit (§5.5, §5.6).


4.9 Reaching the Mixer

The iPad editor has two mixers, both reached from within the editor:

In the wide iPad editor, Lyrics + Mixer has no separate mixer-only page. Save Mix and the snapshot capsules stay in the bottom-panel header. Library can occupy either half: use its arrow to expose the lyrics or the mixer, or its building button to close it. On iPhone the Mixer button fills the panel, and the Save Mix + snapshot row sits at the top of the mixer itself.

For full Mixer documentation see Section 9 — Mixer.


4.10 Keyboard Shortcuts (iPad Editor)

With a hardware keyboard attached to an iPad:

Shortcut Action
SpacePlay / Pause
⌘1Show Song Info across the editor (its Done returns to the waveform)
⌘3Return to the waveform (Regions) editor
⌘ZUndo a waveform edit
⇧⌘ZRedo

5. Go Live — Performance Mode

The Go Live cockpit is the central workspace for everything — performing, editing songs, and managing your library. You no longer need to leave Go Live to edit lyrics, draw regions, or browse your library.

Performance optimized: Go Live maintains Performance Mode — the app suspends non-essential background work (song analysis, waveform pre-generation) for maximum audio reliability. This mode stays active even while the Song Editor is open inside Go Live.

Getting around Go Live

Go Live is a single surface — the modular cockpit (see §5.0a) — with everything reachable from the floating pucks (§2) and panels:

To… Do this
Open the Song EditorTap the Editor puck (square.and.pencil); return with the editor's ‹ Live button (iPad) or its ✓ (iPhone — the red ✕, shown once you've changed something, discards those changes instead)
Browse songs / setlistsOpen the Library window — the Library key (the library building) first in the Controls module, or the floating Library key while the Controls module is hidden. The Setlist module's selector opens its setlist picker.
Change the look of the whole page••• puck → APPEARANCE → LOOK: Stage, Dusk or Daylight (Looks)
Change the color theme••• puck → APPEARANCE → COLOUR THEME
Give the modules a hardware finish••• puck → APPEARANCE → MATERIAL → Character (Material)
Change one module's look mid-showA two-finger press-and-hold on the module, or ••• puck → Module looks (Module looks)
Rearrange your panels••• puck → Layout Design (Layout Design)
Open the Mixer, Mic or Projection panelThe keys in the Controls module — or, when Controls is hidden, the ••• puck's Mixer, Microphones (when you have live mic channels) and Projection rows. A panel turned off in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS has neither (Layout Design — Microphones still appears while a mic is talking)
Move or resize a floating panelDrag its header, or the grabber on either side, to move it — on the Library window, press and hold the top row for a moment before you drag, so a quick tap still picks a tab (§3.7); drag either corner handle to resize; ✕ closes it. Drag a Mic or Projection card short and its title bar — ✕ included — stands down; close it then with its key in the Controls module (or its ••• row when Controls is hidden).
Open Settings••• puck → Settings

5.0a The Modular Cockpit

Go Live is a modular cockpit — you arrange your performance controls into a layout that suits you, and choose how each one looks. Everything on screen is a module you can move, resize, hide, bring back, and dress in its own look.

In normal play mode the cockpit is just your modules plus the floating pucks — nothing extra in the way. Three things reshape it:

The modules

Module What it is
LyricsThe live words (§5.9).
Mixer TilesThe track and group tiles and the bus rail (§5.16).
SetlistYour live set (§5.0b).
V·PadVessa Pad, the drone pad instrument, with its keyboard (§5.19).
Pad ControlsVessa Pad's timing menu, key display and Play/Stop control. Tap the display to reach the full instrument (Integrated or compact controls).
TransportPLAY, the action keys (FADE, VAMP and the language key), the CLICK and AUTO status keys, and rewind (§5.3, §5.11).
RegionsThe song header — cover, title, key, tempo and timeline — and the region chips (§5.5).
ClipsThe clip pads (§5.18).
ControlsA strip of keys: Library, Projection, Mixer, and Microphones when you have live mic channels — plus the song's key when the Regions module is hidden, and an external-display status key while a display is connected (Controls Module Keys). A panel turned off under PANELS in the Modules list (Layout Design) has no key. It lays itself out across or down to suit its shape, and wraps onto more lines rather than shrink its keys.
Song VolThe loaded song's level — − / + keys either side of a dB readout, which reads MUTE while the song is muted. Long-press the readout for a fader with Mute (Song Vol).
Top LayersImages and videos you fire over the projection (On-Demand Top Layers).
V·KeysVessa Keys, the layered instrument, in one of two styles: Grid (six patch keys beside its screen — the default) or Display (the screen between previous and next keys) (§10a).
LayoutsUp to five favourite layouts, one tap away (The Layouts module).
MIDI / OSCCustom buttons, faders, knobs and XY controls. Use Add MIDI / OSC module at the top of the Modules menu to create one or add an existing surface (Control Surface modules).

Show or hide any module from the Modules puck in Layout Design. V·Keys and Layouts start hidden in every preset.

One Keys module. Keys used to be three modules — legacy module 1, legacy module 2 and legacy module 3, from when the instrument was called Vessa Keys. It is now one Keys module, and its two faces, Grid and Display, are styles you choose on its card. legacy module 1 is retired. Your saved layouts, and presets you import from an older version, are converted once and keep the Keys module that was showing in its place — see Layouts from earlier versions.

V·Pad is the drone-pad module (Vessa Pad), previously listed as Pad and earlier names, including Tonic. Tonic is still one of its sounds. The Keys module's patch-key style, once called Pads, is now Grid.

Looks — Stage, Dusk and Daylight

The whole page has a look — the finish that the page, every module and the floating keys are drawn in. Choose it in the APPEARANCE strip at the top of the ••• menu: under LOOK, tap Stage, Dusk or Daylight (each shown as a miniature of the page, with a lamp lit on the chosen one). The change applies at once and the menu stays open, so you watch the page change behind it. The strip's header shows what you have, e.g. Stage · Titanium.

Look What it's like
StageA neutral charcoal gray with no color cast; each surface above the page is a visible step lighter. The default.
DuskA deep, dark, modern indigo — the darkest of the three.
DaylightA satin silver with black text.

In every look the Lyrics sit on a dark screen set into the page (The Lyric Screen), and they never go light: on a Daylight page the Lyrics are drawn in Dusk.

Each module can wear its own finish. By default every module follows the page — Match page. Give a module a finish of its own on its card (The module card) and it keeps that finish when you change the page look, while the rest follow the page. On a module's card the finishes carry the looks' own names — Stage, Dusk, Daylight — and while Match page is chosen, the finish it is giving you right now lights up too (its swatch ringed, its name lit, an outline round it), so you always see which one the page is lending. A module that can't draw the page's look shows the darker finish it actually uses.

Controls and Song Vol float straight on the page. Give either one a finish other than the page's and it gets a panel of its own to sit on.

COLOUR THEME. Below LOOK and MATERIAL, four swatches — Stage Teal, Rosewood, Golden Era and Titanium — set the app's accent colors. A tap applies at once and the menu stays open. This strip is the only place a theme is chosen; Settings no longer has a theme section. (Nebula, Florida Sunset and Sunny Day were retired — a device that was using one of them opens on Titanium.)

Material — Plain, Character and Vintage

Below LOOK, the MATERIAL row chooses how much hardware the modules wear. A tap applies at once and the menu stays open.

Material What it's like
PlainToday's flat faces. The default.
CharacterEach module reads as its own well-made device, in the page's colour family — new gear, no wear.
VintageThe same devices as old, well-played rack gear: metal faceplates in the look's colours, nickel screws (one missing, one the wrong kind), scratches and worn edges where hands rest.

What Character does today:

Keys keep their positions and touch targets in every material (the Transport's keys in Character and Vintage also take a share of the gaps between them; none gets smaller), and every word keeps its contrast. The Keys module's walnut is the same in every material; the Pad module's is quarter-sawn in Character and unchanged in Plain and Vintage. While this iPad controls another rig, every module draws Plain.

What Vintage does today — Character, re-finished and worn; every key, pad and window stays exactly where it is, and no mark ever sits under a word, a screen or a state colour. The faceplates are metal in your look's colours: brushed black aluminium on Stage, indigo hammer-tone paint on Dusk, brushed silver on Daylight.

Where a module meets another module its corners are square, and so is the metal.

The wear is the same every time you open the app — it never moves or flickers. With Reduce Transparency or Increase Contrast on, the metal is plain and the scratches, rubs and polish go; the screws, the chipped corner and the keys' worn lips stay.

The page look, the material and the color theme are not part of a layout: switching presets never changes them.

The Mic card is a floating panel, not a module, so it has no module card. It has its own Look row instead — Stage · Dusk · Daylight · Match page — at the bottom of the full Mic card; with Match page chosen, the finish it gives lights up there too.

The floating panels follow the look

With MATERIAL → Character or Vintage, a panel takes the material too (Material); what the panel shows does not change.

The Microphones, Projection, Library and Mixer panels are drawn in the page's look — Stage charcoal, Dusk indigo or Daylight silver — as solid cards with a thin rim and a soft shadow. While this iPad controls another rig they are drawn in Stage, like the modules. The Microphones card keeps its own Look row.

The editor keeps Stage: its docked Library and mixer stay dark whatever look the Live page uses.

Layout Design

Tap the ••• puck → Layout Design. The performing pucks step aside, the modules' own controls stop responding, and the arranging controls appear — each one its own small puck you can drag out of the way if it covers a module:

Control What it does
Preset — named for the current layout (e.g. LAUNCHPAD)Opens the presets menu (below).
SnapTurns snapping on or off (on by default). While it's on, a module you drag or resize lines up with its neighbors' edges and centers and with the screen's, and a magenta guide line shows the seam it snapped to.
ModulesAdd MIDI / OSC module, at the top, opens templates and your saved control surfaces. Below it, Show / hide modules has a tick box for every module. The layers button beside a visible module offers Bring to Front and Send to Back, even when another module covers it. Showing a hidden module brings it to the front. It stays open so you can change several at once. A module you show gets a place of its own in the layout. Below the modules, PANELS · every layout lists the floating panels: Library (ticked and locked — always available), Mixer, Microphones (once live mic channels exist) and Projection. This is one choice for this device, on every layout — it isn't saved with a layout, and Discard doesn't touch it. Untick a panel and its key leaves the Controls module and the ••• menu, and the panel closes if it is open. With Microphones unticked, its key (and, while Controls is hidden, its ••• row) still appears whenever a mic is talking, wearing its talk lamp; a tap opens the MIC card, where you turn TALK off.
DiscardPuts the layout back as it was when you opened Layout Design, and closes: every module's position, size, front/back order and look — for POCKET AUTO, both orientations, including the one not on screen — and a Reset made in the session is taken back too. It doesn't undo showing or hiding a module: what you showed or hid stays as you left it. Every change is already saved as you make it; Discard takes back the whole session.
DoneCloses Layout Design, keeping your changes.

Each module wears a cyan frame and a cyan title bar with its name:

Rearranging is live and saved into the layout on screen the moment you make each change — there is nothing to save afterwards. Discard takes back the session; Reset NAME puts a built-in layout back to how it shipped.

Presets. Tap the preset puck:

Item What it does
LOW DECK · LAUNCHPAD · CONSOLE · TILES HYBRID · FULL DECK · POCKET · POCKET WIDE · POCKET AUTOThe built-in layouts; the current one is ticked. A fresh iPad starts on LAUNCHPAD and a fresh iPhone on POCKET AUTO, which keeps a separate arrangement for portrait and landscape.
My PresetsYour own layouts, by name.
★ beside every layoutFilled for a layout that is in the Layouts module. Tap it to add the layout to Layouts or take it out — without switching to it; the menu stays open. The line under the layouts counts them (★ In Layouts · 2 of 5); with five taken it reads Layouts is full · 5 of 5 and the empty stars can't be filled until you clear one.
Save as New Layout…Copies the layout on screen — arrangement, looks, and floating panels’ positions and sizes — under a new name. The copy becomes active without moving the panels. Remembered portrait and landscape panel positions are copied too; the original stays unchanged. Typing an existing layout name saves over it.
Copy Current LayoutCopies the current arrangement's measurements to the clipboard as text.
Export My Presets…Saves all your own presets, with their looks, to a file — for another device, a backup or a bandmate. Shown when you have some.
Import Presets…Brings presets in from such a file.
Delete "name" / Reset NAMEDeletes your own layout (and switches to LOW DECK), or puts a built-in layout back to how it shipped — its arrangement, every module's look and, for POCKET AUTO, both orientations. Changed your mind? Discard, before Done, puts the layout back.

A layout remembers each module's position and size, which modules are hidden, and each module's look — its finish, style and trim — and saves each of them the moment you change it.

Layouts save themselves. Every change to the layout on screen — moving, resizing, showing or hiding a module, a finish, style or trim — is saved into that layout at once. Switching, from the presets menu, the Layouts module or the ••• menu, shows a layout exactly as you last left it, after a relaunch too; choosing the layout already on screen does nothing. To keep a version and carry on changing, use Save as New Layout…; to undo a Layout Design session, Discard; to start a built-in over, Reset NAME.

The Layouts module

Double-tap the selected layout key to open Layout Design. A tap that switches to another layout does not count toward this shortcut. You can also press and hold the selected key and choose Layout Design.

In Character and Vintage, each key also shows its number (1–5), and every key has a lamp, lit on the layout on screen.

Layouts holds up to five favourite layouts as keys, so you can change the whole page mid-song with one tap. Each key shows the layout's name and a small picture of its arrangement; the layout on screen wears the selection ring and a lit lamp.

Action What it does
Tap a keySwitches the page to that layout at once — it comes up exactly as you last left it (every layout saves itself). Switching changes only the layout: the song and the audio carry on.
+ (empty module only)Opens ADD TO LAYOUTS: every layout that is not a favourite yet, built-in and yours, the one on screen first (marked ON SCREEN), each with a small picture of its arrangement. A tap adds it — the page does not switch. Shown only until you add your first favourite; it reads + ADD A LAYOUT, or just + where the module is narrow.
Press and hold a keyAdd Layout… opens the same picker while there is room for another favourite. Remove from Layouts (the layout itself is not deleted), and Move Left / Move Right (or Move Up / Move Down when the module stands tall) to reorder.

The favourites are also listed under LAYOUTS at the top of the ••• menu, so a layout without the module can always switch back. The module starts hidden — add it from the Modules puck in Layout Design. In Layout Design it sleeps like every other module; to add layouts while arranging, use the ★ in the presets menu. Its place on the page belongs to this device rather than to any one layout, so it stays where you put it as you switch between layouts. It is not offered while the window is shrunk into the compact layout, where layouts cannot be switched.

A shrunk iPad window. When you make the iPad window small, Go Live switches to a compact layout of its own. ••• → Layout Design then opens the compact layout (the row reads This window size): it arranges that compact layout only, never your full-size one, and its preset puck offers Copy Current Layout and Reset this size. Each change there is saved into that size's compact layout as you make it. The module cards and Module looks aren't offered while the window is shrunk — looks belong to the full-size layout.

The module card

Each module's choices live on one card. It opens beside the module — above it when there's room, otherwise below, otherwise just inside its top edge — when you tap the module in Layout Design or in Module looks. (In Layout Design it also comes up when you start dragging or resizing a module; it hides while you drag and returns when you let go.)

Row Choices On the card of
FinishStage · Dusk · Daylight, then Match page (the default — follow the page look). With Match page chosen it keeps its highlight and the finish it gives you lights up beside it (ringed swatch, outline); a finish you pick yourself is filled instead, and stays put when the page look changes. Only the finishes the module can draw are offered.Every module
StyleHow the module lays out its inside (see the table below).Regions, Setlist, Keys
TrimWalnut — wooden end-cheeks either side of the instrument's face (the default) — or None.Keys, Pad
CharacterTape deck (the default) · Studio rack — how the Transport is built — or None, today's Transport. Each build shows a tiny key of itself; None shows an empty swatch. The row is on the card only while MATERIAL is Character or Vintage; on a Plain page, and while this iPad controls another rig, it is hidden and the Transport looks as it always has. The choice is kept with the layout and comes back when you switch to Character or Vintage again.Transport
TimelineHow the Regions header's timeline shows the song's region colors: Off (the waveform alone — the default), Full (the colors behind the waveform) or Line (a thin line of the colors along its top edge). One setting for the whole app — the Keys song strip follows it too — and not saved with a layout.Regions

Every choice shows a small picture of itself — a sphere of each finish, a tiny chip or card for each style, a swatch of the wood, a tiny key for each Transport build, a mini timeline — and the chosen one is filled and ringed. When the screen is too narrow for the names (on a phone), the card shows the pictures alone.

To put the card away, tap its ✕, tap the selected module again, or tap empty space on the page. (In Module looks, the ✕ and a tap on empty space also close Module looks.)

What each module offers

Module Finishes Styles Trim
LyricsDark · Dusk——
SetlistStage · Dusk · DaylightCards (default) · Titles · Covers — see §5.1b—
RegionsStage · Dusk · DaylightStripe (the section's color along the top of each chip) · Tab (a color tab before the name) · Dot (a color dot — the default). The segue picker's chips follow the same style.—
V·KeysStage · Dusk · DaylightGrid (default) · DisplayWalnut (default) · None
V·PadStage · Dusk · Daylight—Walnut (default) · None
Mixer Tiles · Clips · Controls · Song Vol · Top LayersStage · Dusk · Daylight——
TransportStage · Dusk · Daylight—On a Character or Vintage page: Tape deck (default) · Studio rack · None

Every Finish row ends with Match page.

Small modules and narrow windows. The Keys module stops shrinking at the minimum its controls need. In a narrow sound-editor sheet, the header, tabs and action keys wrap onto additional rows; wide tone-control plates can be panned horizontally. The Live lyric viewport makes room for keys placed over its module, while the saved module positions stay unchanged.

Module looks — without Layout Design

Change a module or floating panel's look without opening Layout Design:

Tap Done on the card, or tap anywhere on the same module or panel, to close appearance editing completely. The next tap works normally. Tapping a different surface switches the card. There is no separate Done button at the top of the page. While the card is open, taps choose appearances; they do not play sounds, move panels or resize modules.

Changes save immediately. Module choices belong to the current layout. Floating panels keep their own look across layouts on this device; Match page follows the page. The microphone's existing Look row changes the same setting.

Module looks isn't offered while Layout Design is open (it has the card already) or while the iPad window is shrunk.


5.0b The Setlist Module

The Setlist module is your live set. In Layout Design or Module looks, choose Controls: Top · Left · Right. This is saved with the layout. Side controls leave the full height for songs and wrap into columns when the module is short.

At pocket height, songs use a compact title-and-number card so a whole row remains visible. Enlarge the module to return to its chosen Cards, Titles or Covers presentation.

On a narrow module, or with controls at the side, the selector shows the setlist symbol in a square key. Tap it to see the full name and choose a setlist. Wider top controls can show the name beside the symbol. The controls are:

Playing the set:

The songs are drawn as Cards (the default), Titles or Covers — choose on the module's card (§5.1b).

The Setlist module and the Library window's Setlists tab (§3.8) are the two ways to run and organize your shows.


5.1 Layout

Go Live is a single modular cockpit (§5.0a) — you choose which modules (Lyrics, Setlist, Mixer Tiles, Transport, Regions, Clips, Pad, Top Layers, Keys…) appear, where, and in which look. The jobs a fixed sidebar would do are spread across:


5.1a Setlist Module — Choosing a Setlist

Tap the Setlist module’s name or setlist-symbol key to open its picker. With a setlist loaded, the module shows that set. With none, it shows your whole library — without set numbers, transition chips or reordering, since the library has no running order.

The name key's picker

The compact green Current setlist card shows what is loaded and its song count. Tap its star to favorite or unfavorite it; the picker stays open so you can see the change. A filled gold star means favorite; an outlined neutral star means not favorited. The current set appears only in the top card, keeping its favorite status without a duplicate Favorites row. Favorites and Recent have compact rows with readable names and song counts. The downward load symbol means the set will load into the module. Tap a row to load that set while keeping the picker open to compare its songs with another set. Tap Done or outside the picker to close it. On iPad, the picker sits outside the module wherever screen space allows, keeping its songs visible. The solid dark surface stays readable in every Look, including Daylight.

Item What it does
Previous setlistMarked on the first Recent row. Reloads the setlist you had before; omitted when it is the loaded set or one of your Favorites.
FavoritesYour starred setlists, A–Z, excluding the set already shown in Current setlist.
RecentThe previous setlist, when available, plus up to five other recently loaded sets that aren't Favorites.
★ on the current cardStars or unstars the loaded setlist.
New SetlistAsks for a name, creates the setlist and loads it.
SettingsOpens settings for the current setlist. Closing settings returns to the picker.

There is no Delete here — too easy to hit mid-show. Delete a setlist in the Library window's Setlists tab, where it asks you to confirm.

Loading a set from the Library window. Open a setlist in the Library window's Setlists tab (§3.8) and tap its red LINK badge to send it to the Setlist module (the badge appears only when the Setlist module is on your page). The module’s small matching-set mark only reports whether the two sets agree (§5.0b).

Organizing setlists — folders, renaming, moving, duplicating, deleting, sharing, and each setlist's settings — happens in the Library window's Setlists tab (§3.8). Swipe a setlist there for Settings · Move · Duplicate · Delete; swipe a folder for Rename · Move · Delete.


5.1b Setlist Module — Cards, Titles and Covers

Choose the style on the Setlist module's card (The module card). Every style is drawn in the module's finish.

Style Each song is…
Cards (default)A card with the song's cover on the left — or its initials when it has no art — an info line, and the title in condensed capitals over two lines. As many columns as fit; the grid scrolls when the set is longer than the module.
TitlesThe same card without the cover, so the title has the whole width: one large line when it fits, otherwise two lines. Titles fits exactly as many songs as Cards in the same space.
CoversA large square cover tile — the art is the button — with a title plate joined under it, the two framed as one unit so each song stands apart from its neighbours. One row that scrolls sideways; the tiles grow with the module's height. The row moves by itself only when the loaded song changes, bringing it to the middle, so it never takes your scroll away mid-song.

Reading a card

Song states

State Cards and Titles Covers
NOW — the loaded songGreen lamp + NOW, a green edge around the card, a lit faceA NOW tag with a green lamp on the art, a green edge around the whole unit, and a lit title plate
NEXT — lined up by a segueBlinking amber lamp + NEXT, an amber edgeA NEXT tag with a blinking amber lamp on the art, and an amber edge around the whole unit
Played — Stage Flow only✓ on the info line, quieter wordsA ✓ tag on the art; both the art and title plate are dimmed

A state is always said with a word or a mark as well as a color. When a song is both loaded and lined up, NEXT wins.

Suggestions. With ✨ on, the module shows the suggested songs as cards — a sparkle where the cover would be, and why each was suggested. Tap one to load it, or, while a song is playing, to line it up next.

An empty set says Empty setlist — tap + to add songs.

5.1c Edit Setlist Settings

Open Setlist settings from the setlist module’s name menu, or from the Library window’s Setlists tab (§3.8): swipe left on the setlist and tap Settings, or open the setlist and tap the sliders button in its header. The Edit Setlist sheet holds the setlist's name, how it behaves on stage, and its name color.

The switches apply the moment you tap them. Cancel only discards a changed name or color; Save keeps those.

Mix Down (snowflake, beside the name) opens freeze and unfreeze options for this setlist. Freezing combines eligible buses using the saved mix and keeps the original tracks. The options window explains which controls remain available before you start.

Buses needed for language switching or song versions stay separate. Within a frozen bus, individual track levels and mutes are locked; the bus fader, mute, solo and output still work, and snapshots can adjust the whole bus. Unfreeze to edit its individual tracks, language assignments or song versions again.

Default transition

Default transition sets the usual join for this setlist: No Transition, Cue Next, Play Next, Overlap, or Crossfade. Choose it directly from any transition button between songs: the Use setlist default row shows Currently: [mode], with Change beside it. The same choice is in Setlist settings → Playback & order.

Only gaps set to Use setlist default follow it. Individually assigned transitions keep their choices. The transition window shows the actual default by name; No Transition always means finish this song and stay here. AUTO off still prevents every automatic transition.

Existing setlists retain their behavior: the former Advance on finish switch maps to Cue Next when on, or No Transition when off. You can now choose any of the five transitions.

Reverse order

When Reverse order is ON, the setlist's list in the Library window runs bottom-up: the first song at the bottom, closer to the transport, and new songs added to the top. Each song keeps its number in the set — song 1 is at the bottom. The order the set plays in does not change.

Stage flow

When Stage flow is ON, played songs are dimmed and upcoming songs stay front and center as the set plays. See §5.21 Stage Flow for full behavior.

While it is on, Mark as played controls when a song counts as played:

Choice When is the song marked played?
At startThe moment playback begins for that song
At finishAfter the song completes to the end

Defaults

Save as default… opens the native Save these defaults? dialog. Choose New setlists only to make these playback and display settings the starting point for new setlists, or New + existing setlists to copy them to existing setlists too. Saved as your default. confirms it. Each setlist can still be changed on its own.

Name colour

Pick a color for the setlist's name from the palette, choose no color (the default text color), or set a Custom color. A preview shows the name as it will read in the list.


5.2 Selecting and Loading a Song

Tap any song in the Setlist module to select and load it. The waveform and regions update immediately. (While a song is playing, a single tap on another song arms a SEGUE to it instead — see §5.20.)

Double-tapping a song in the Setlist module controls playback directly:

Situation Double-tap result
Nothing is playingLoads the song and starts it — exactly as tapping it and then PLAY would
A different song is playingCrossfades into the tapped song: it comes up as the playing song is ridden down, over the Crossfade length (5 s by default — long-press AUTO to change it, §5.3). A lyrics-only song has nothing to fade in, so it is simply loaded and started.
This song is already playingPauses in Play/Pause mode, or stops in Play/Stop mode — the same as the transport button.
This song is pausedResumes from the paused position.

When a double-tap is refused. With a SEGUE armed, double-tapping a different target says "Cancel the SEGUE first" — the two would be contradictory instructions, so the rig asks rather than guesses. While a vamp is holding the song it says "End the VAMP first". Double-tapping the current song acts like the transport button, including ending an active vamp or segue. Double-tapping the cued song starts it while its cue is still waiting; it does not interrupt a segue already under way.

Song buttons in Transport

Turn on Song buttons in Transport in Setlist Settings to replace Play with the selected song and the following song in that setlist. Loading a setlist does not select a song: tap one first. Selecting a different song updates both buttons; the final song stands alone. The option starts off and is included in Save as default…, with New setlists only or New + existing setlists, along with the other setlist settings.

Double-tap the current song to play, pause/resume or stop, matching the transport mode. Tap the next song to cue it; double-tap to start it. While playing, double-tapping the same song you have cued starts its crossfade. With the pad's controls in a compact Transport, only the current song appears, beside the pad controls. Taller layouts can show both songs above the pad's controls; wide layouts can fit all three alongside. The outlined song is the current one. A newly loaded song reads READY, even if the previous song was paused or had ended. PAUSED belongs to the song you actually paused; choosing that same song again keeps its paused position. When both songs are visible, tap the transition symbol between them to edit their transition.

Library Window Sync

Whenever you tap a song in the Setlist module, the Library window automatically mirrors that selection:

This means that if you want to quickly edit a song you've just been rehearsing, open the Library window and the right song is already there in front of you — no scrolling, no searching.

Note. A song filed in a nested folder is the one case the Library window won't travel to: it will highlight the song, but the Folders tab reveals a child folder only when you drill into it, so you still open the folder yourself. Books and Topics have no nesting and are handled fully.

5.2a Song Transitions — the chip between two songs

Every gap between two songs carries a small round transition chip, straddling the boundary between them — between two songs in the Setlist module (whichever style it is drawn in: Cards, Titles or Covers), between two rows in the Library window. Tap it to choose what happens when the first song ends.

There are five choices. Two decide whether the set moves; three decide how the next song starts.

              ALA ends here
                    │
 NO TRANSITION  ████│                   nothing advances. ALA stays loaded.
                    │
 CUE NEXT       ████│                   FUEGO loads, silent. You press PLAY.
                    │····
 PLAY NEXT      ████│████████           FUEGO starts as ALA ends. No gap.
                    │
 OVERLAP    ████████│███                ALA rings out at its own level…
                ████│████████           …under FUEGO, already playing.
                    │
 CROSSFADE  ███▓▓▒▒░│                   ALA is ridden DOWN…
                ░▒▒▓│▓███████           …as FUEGO comes UP. Curves cross.
                    │
                └───┴── the overlap window

Overlap and Crossfade differ in what happens to the song that is ending — and both now clear the low end first.

Two complete arrangements at full level is a lot of noise: songs either side of a gap are usually unrelated material, so you get two kick patterns and two basslines in different keys and tempos colliding. So the foundation — drums and bass — always moves first.

Neither cuts a song short, and a premixed song (one stem) gets a plain whole-song crossfade instead — there's nothing to separate.

In menu order — which escalates by how much the rig does at the seam, starting with the default:

Choice What the room hears
No TransitionSong ends and stops. Nothing advances. Use it wherever you might repeat a chorus, or talk. This is the default.
Cue NextSong ends and stops. The next song’s tracks stand by for PLAY; its pad follows its timing choice.
Play NextSong finishes, next one starts. No gap, no fade, nothing clever.
OverlapNext song starts before this one ends and arrives whole; this song sheds its drums and bass so the two foundations don't collide, and everything else rings out underneath.
CrossfadeSame window, but this song is faded down across it while the next comes up.

One row is always selected. Use setlist default has its own row and shows what the default currently does: No Transition, Cue Next, Play Next, Overlap, or Crossfade. Choose No Transition to make this gap always stay here, even if the setlist default changes later. Tapping an already selected choice keeps it selected; choose Use setlist default explicitly to follow the set again.

The transition panel separates Song transition from the next song’s pad timing. The selected transition is highlighted with a checkmark. Choices stay open until you tap Done or outside. If AUTO is off, the panel says AUTO off · transitions disabled. AUTO disables transitions globally; the saved choices remain and apply again when AUTO is armed.

The rig’s transition panel shows Song transition and the active mode at the top, then Next: [song] and Done. Use setlist default is a selectable button with the current default’s transition symbol, Currently: [mode], and a checkmark when selected. The separate Change button beside it edits the default for gaps that follow this setlist. Individually assigned transitions stay as they are. The same setting is also available as Default transition in Setlist settings (§5.1c).

How soon the next song starts

Choice Starts
Play NextAt the boundary — zero
OverlapOverlap seconds before the end — 3 s by default
CrossfadeCrossfade seconds before the end — 5 s by default

Both lengths are sliders, 1–8 s: long-press the AUTO key in the transport (§5.3). They are global — the chip picks which join, these say how much of it.

Crossfade is the longer default on purpose. A crossfade holds its level as it lengthens, so more time simply means smoother. An overlap leaves the outgoing song at full level, so more time means more of two full songs at once — more time is muddier, not smoother. Play Next has no length; it waits for the song to finish.

The number you set is a request, not a promise. It is shortened automatically when the two songs cannot fit it — never starting before now, and never taking more than half the incoming song's length, so a 3-second overlap into a 2-second tag is trimmed rather than having the new song end before the old one does.

Reading a chip at a glance

The icon shows the configured transition, including when AUTO is off. With AUTO on, the colour says whether this gap has its own choice:

Chip Meaning
Dark, dashed ringUse setlist default — the glyph shows that default
Accent, solid ringThis gap has its own saved choice
Bar across itAn existing Continue Pad setting on this gap; see pad timing below

A gap can inherit No Transition or have it explicitly assigned. Both show the broken link; the dashed or solid ring distinguishes following the default from a saved choice.

While AUTO is off, each chip keeps its saved glyph—Crossfade, Overlap, Play Next, Cue Next, or the broken link—but loses its accent colour. Transitions are inactive globally. This lets you distinguish a configured transition from a gap with no transition. The transition panel says AUTO off · transitions disabled.

Pad timing for the next song

On the rig, the transition panel’s lower card shows Next song: [title] and Pad set to: [timing]. The timing is what will apply in this setlist. Tap Change beside the pad timing to reveal Manual, With playback, and When selected. The panel scrolls to bring those choices into view; Done collapses them. The song’s default is marked (song default); selecting that mode follows the default, while either other mode overrides it for this incoming song in this setlist.

Use When selected when you want the incoming song's pad to carry the transition and remain under speaking after playback stops. Use With playback when the pad belongs under the song itself, after its count-in.

Existing Continue Pad settings are still read: the incoming song behaves as When selected in that set until you edit it. Editing the new choice replaces that old gap switch; there is no second local switch to keep in agreement.

What the joins need

They need audio. A lyrics-only next song has nothing to pre-roll, so the gap quietly falls back to loading it normally.

They land on the beat. If the incoming song runs at the same tempo and time signature as the outgoing one, the click keeps running straight through the seam and the new song's downbeat is placed exactly on it. If the tempo changes, the seam becomes the new song's bar 1 and the click re-phases there — once.

A vamp outranks them. While you are holding a song open with FADE or VAMP, nothing advances underneath you.

The song-transition controls appear in the Setlist module on the rig, the Library window's setlist list (on the trailing edge of each row), and the Stage screen on a connected remote (director tiers only). The rig’s two surfaces also offer the new pad timing menu. Remote Stage still shows the older Continue Pad control; use the rig to choose all three pad timing modes.


5.3 Playback Controls

The Transport module carries the song's playback keys. Like every module it draws in the page look — Stage, Dusk or Daylight, chosen under ••• → APPEARANCE → LOOK — unless you give it a finish of its own (Module looks — without Layout Design). You move through the song itself with the region chips (§5.5) and the scrubber in the Regions module's song header.

From top to bottom, on iPad:

Row What is there
NoticeOnly while this device is following another rig's audio: a line saying so, and how to take the transport back (turn off Play the rig's song too). While it shows, the action keys, the status keys and PLAY draw in their disabled legend and do nothing; the SOLO and MUTED lines can still be cleared.
SOLOOnly while anything is soloed: an amber lamp, SOLO, what is isolated and CLEAR. Tap it to clear every solo.
MUTEDOnly while a mute group is engaged: a red lamp, MUTED, which groups and how many tracks they silence, and CLEAR. Tap it to release them.
Action keysFADE (when the song has one), VAMP and the language key, in rows of three. VAMP and the language key always hold their places — a key the song cannot use stays put in its disabled legend (§5.11).
Status keysCLICK (the metronome), AUTO and rewind, on one row.
PLAYThe big key, at the bottom for your thumb.

On iPhone — and on iPad in a narrow window — CLICK, AUTO, rewind and PLAY share one row, and the status keys show their state-coloured icon without the word. Drag the Transport module taller and the keys grow into the room; make it shorter than the keys need and the whole deck scales down to fit.

Reading the keys

Keys keep neutral backgrounds. ARM/FADE, VAMP, CLICK and AUTO show their state on the icon, leaving the large words clear. Green means active; amber means waiting or entering. Pending ARM/VAMP icons pulse unless Reduce Motion is on. PLAYING keeps its green background.

You see It means
Amber ring inside the edge and a pulsing amber iconArmed — waiting for its moment (the next bar, the next section). The word is often ARMED — or SEGUE·FADE / SEGUE·VAMP when the key will land a segue.
Amber ring inside the edgeOffered — FADE and VAMP while a SEGUE is armed (they read → FADE OUT / → VAMP; a tap lands the segue that way). Or the first of two taps has landed on a guarded key — tap again.
A ring outside the edgeGuarded — Stage Safety wants two taps on this key (PLAY, rewind).
The key one step lighter, with a green iconSounding or holding — a vamp running, FADING OUT, BACK IN.
The lighter key with an amber iconENTERING — the way back into the song is committed.
A green keyPLAYING — the only green key in the transport.
A green icon / a neutral iconOn / off, on the status keys (CLICK, AUTO).
The danger-coloured icon and wordMuted — MUTED on CLICK.
Greyed word and iconNot available right now.

The transport keys

Key What it reads Tap Also
FADEStopped: ARM, TAP REGION once the click is running, or FADE IN with the cued region's name under it. Playing: FADE OUT. Through a vamp: FADING OUT → BACK IN → ENTERING, each with its region's name under it.Playing: fades the band to the click and holds. Stopped: arm, choose a region, enter. See §5.13.Press and hold → Vamp Settings…
VAMPVAMP (stopped: TAP REGION once the vamp is running), or through a vamp VAMPING → BACK IN → ENTERINGHolds the song on a vamp the room still hearsPress and hold → Vamp Settings…. A short flick up or down nudges the vamp's level by 2 dB, shown on the key.
LanguageThe language the song is in — SPANISH, ENGLISH (a long name is cut to four letters) — with a dot in that language's cue colour; EN→ES while a switch waits; Lang, greyed, on a song with one languageSwitches the vocals and the lyrics — see §5.13aPress and hold → Language Setup…
CLICKA green metronome while it clicks, neutral in standby or on Silent, and MUTED in the danger colour while it runs silentEngage or bypass (standby)Double-tap: mute. Swipe up / down: ±2 dB. Long-press: the metronome picker. See below.
AUTOA green chain link while transitions are armed; a neutral severed chain when they are notArms or disarms every automatic transition (two taps by default)Long-press: TRANSITION LENGTHS
RewindThe ⏮ icon aloneBack to the beginning of the songOnly in Play / Pause mode, and only while the song plays or the playhead is away from the top
PLAYPLAY, PLAYING, ARMED or STOPStart; then stop or pauseA two-finger hold opens the Transport's card (Module looks)

The PLAY key

PLAY is there for every song, including a lyrics-only one.

Two taps, when you want them. Settings → General → Stage Safety → Require double tap to Start and Require double tap to Stop guard PLAY. A guarded PLAY wears a ring outside its edge; after the first tap an amber ring shows inside it for a moment — tap again to confirm. On the green PLAYING key in Stage and Dusk, a dark inner edge keeps that amber ring clear. The rewind key follows the Stop setting and shows the same two rings. In Daylight that amber — and NEXT, ARMED and the other waiting states — is a deeper amber, so it shows on the silver keys and on the green PLAYING key.

Play / Pause mode (Settings → General → Stage Safety → Play / Pause mode): PLAY pauses instead of stopping, and the playhead stays where it is. While the song plays, or once the playhead is away from the top, the rewind key appears on the status row to take it back to the beginning. With the mode off, stopping rewinds to the start and there is no rewind key. The Song Editor's own play key always pauses rather than stops, whatever this setting says (§4.7a). While the editor is open on iPad, a connected remote's play key pauses too.

AUTO — the transition killswitch

The AUTO status key arms or disarms every automatic transition in the set at once. It is shown only while a setlist is loaded and at least one of its songs has audio.

State Appearance Behaviour
ArmedWhite lamp, chain-link iconEvery gap does what its chip says. The link is the whole idea: every choice on a chip is a way of linking two songs.
DisarmedThe lamp is only a ring; the chain is severedEvery song finishes and stays put — no crossfade, no overlap, no advance, whatever the chips say.

Disarming does not edit your set. Every chip keeps its setting and comes straight back when you re-arm — and while it is disarmed, all the chips show a hold, so the setlist never promises a transition the rig will not perform. Connected remotes show the same thing.

AUTO is guarded by Stage Safety, and it is guarded ON by default. The first tap puts an amber ring inside the key's edge; a second tap within a moment does it. Both directions are guarded, because neither is the safe one: turning it off silently stops your crossfades and overlaps from happening, and turning it on can start a song you meant to start by hand. A mis-tap on Start or Stop is obvious the instant it happens; a mis-tap on AUTO is silent until the next gap arrives, which is exactly why it defaults to guarded. Turn it off in Settings → General → Stage Safety → Require double tap for AUTO.

Long-press AUTO for TRANSITION LENGTHS: the Overlap (3 s) and Crossfade (5 s) lengths, 1–8 seconds each in half-second steps. These are the lengths used by the Overlap and Crossfade choices on any chip — see §5.2a for why the crossfade is the longer of the two. Play Next has no length; the next song starts as this one ends.

The armed / disarmed state is remembered per setlist — each setlist keeps its own.

Metronome & quantized transport

The metronome is the app's timing reference. When it's audible, its click defines the bar grid that PLAY, FADE and VAMP snap to.

CLICK — the metronome's key on the transport — doubles as the metronome's mixer control:

Visual Pulse — where you see the beat. Each song's Visual Pulse (long-press picker) decides whether and where the beat flashes. It is separate from Mode, which only decides when you hear the click — so you can, for example, hear the click while stopped to count yourself in and see a silent pulse while the band plays.

The first beat of the bar flashes green, drawn a little thicker; the other beats flash white. On the transport in the Daylight look the other beats flash a dark grey instead, because white disappears on that light panel. The colors are fixed. A device following your rig pulses where the rig's song says.

In 6/8, 9/8 and 12/8 the border flashes on the beat you feel — the dotted beat — not on every eighth. A 6/8 bar flashes twice, on 1 and 4, while the click still sounds all six. Six flashes a bar is a strobe; two is the pulse you are counting.

The beat in the editor. Inside the Song Editor the metronome button blinks with the click — a small beat dot in its top-left corner on iPad, a ring flashing around the button in the full-screen (iPhone) editor — red on the first beat of the bar, white on the others, and in 6/8, 9/8 and 12/8 only on the dotted beats. It is a simple "the metronome is running" cue that mirrors the audible click, independent of the Visual Pulse setting (that drives the separate border and chip flash). So it pulses while the song is playing, and also on Live-Style stopped clicks (Mode Always or When Stopped). It stays dark whenever the metronome makes no click — Editor Style while stopped, Mode Silent, or in standby.

Metronome modes (long-press picker) — when you hear the click (the pulse is the Visual Pulse's job):

Subdivision (long-press picker, saved per song). Adds softer ticks between the beats — for a slow song where you want to hear the eighths, or to put a specific feel under the band.

Which pills you get depends on the meter, because an option that can't be musical in a meter isn't offered in it.

In 4/4 and other simple meters — OFF · 2 · 3 · 4. These divide the beat you hear clicking:

What you hear on each beat
2one soft tick halfway between each beat
3two soft ticks between each beat — triplets
4three soft ticks between each beat

In 6/8, 9/8 and 12/8 — OFF · 2 · 2:3. The click is already on the eighths, so 3 and 4 would be hundreds of hits a minute; they're hidden rather than left as a trap.

click:   1     2     3     4     5     6
2:3:     ●        ○        ●        ○
         └ the metronome's own click ─┘ └─ the 2:3 tick ─┘

The two "ones" are the metronome's own clicks. The first note of each pair falls exactly where the click already is, so the click plays it — the 2:3 layer only fills the two gaps. It has a lower, drier sound of its own so you can hear it as a separate hand rather than a thicker click.

Tick level (under the picker) sets how loud those ticks sit beneath the beats. It is saved per song, and every song you haven't touched reads 50% — so a value that isn't 50% means you set it. Moving it changes only the song in front of you. The beats themselves never move: they keep their loudness and their accents whatever you do here.

Subdivisions are heard, not seen — the on-screen flash always stays on the beat.

Accents in compound meter. In 6/8, 9/8 and 12/8 the head of each group of three is marked as well as the bar's first beat, so 6/8 reads ONE two three four five six rather than six identical ticks. The bar's ONE is clearly the highest; the later group heads are only a whisker above the plain beats — a signpost inside the bar, not a rival to its top. Nothing changes in 4/4, 3/4 or any other meter.

"[Song] counts in threes." When a song is analysed, the app also listens to how its beat divides. If it divides in three — the feel behind 6/8 — the Song Setup banner offers Set 6/8, with Leave 4/4 beside it. It only asks about songs whose meter nobody has set, it only asks once, and it never changes the meter on its own: a beat dividing in three is either a compound meter or a 4/4 shuffle, and only your ear can say which. Accepting sets 6/8 and the click follows immediately.

Time signature (long-press picker, saved per song). Set the song's meter right here, while it plays — you find out a meter is wrong by listening, and this is the sheet you already have open when you notice.

It matters more than it looks. Songs imported from apps that carry no time signature arrive as 4/4, so a song you hear in 6/8 is telling the app it's in 4/4 — and everything the metronome does for compound meter, including the ONE two three FOUR five six accents, is switched off until the meter says otherwise.

What the tempo number means. BPM counts quarter notes, the way your chart, your DAW and every other musician means it — so a 6/8 song a chart calls ♩=74 is entered here as 6/8 at 74. The metronome works out the rest: the bottom number sets what it clicks, so that song clicks its eighths, 148 a minute, six to a bar. A 4/4 song clicks its quarters exactly as it always did.

The bottom number also sets the accents — 6, 9 and 12 group in threes, giving ONE two three FOUR five six.

Quantized PLAY, FADE and VAMP. When the metronome is audible, a start aligns to the next bar's first downbeat:

Quantized clip launches and stops. Clips set to launch on bar wait for the next bar before starting and before stopping — both during playback (using the song's grid) and while stopped with the metronome audible (using the metronome's grid). Launch immediately clips are unaffected.

Sample-accurate alignment. A start, a FADE or VAMP entry, and bar-quantized clips all land on the same audible downbeat as the click — they fire together as one musical event.

Quantized Playhead Jump (drag while playing)

When the song is playing and you drag the playhead — on the scrubber in the Regions module's song header, the song strip in the Keys workspace, or the Song Editor's timeline ruler and waveforms — the playhead stays where you drop it (snapped to the nearest bar) instead of springing back. The music keeps playing to the end of the current bar, then jumps to your target on the next downbeat, landing in time with the beat. There's no back-and-forth flicker of the playhead or the lyrics: your target holds still, and the audio catches up to it.

The jump rides the heartbeat's bar grid, so it doesn't need the click to be audible. (On variable-tempo songs it catches up right away rather than waiting for a bar.) Dragging while stopped simply seeks — the playhead follows your finger, and the section, lyrics, and waveform settle when you release. Tapping a region chip, arming a Segue or Vamp, or pressing Stop cancels a pending jump.

On the Live page's own scrubber (in the Regions module's song header) and the Keys song strip, a drag while playing needs Settings → General → Stage Safety → Scrub the timeline while playing. It is off by default, which locks the playhead while the song plays so a stray finger can't move it; dragging while stopped always works.

The Controls module and the floating keys

In Character and Vintage, each key in the Controls module sits in its own recessed ring with a gently dished face; the floating keys don't change.

The Controls module is a strip of keys for the panels — Library, Projection, Mixer, Microphones (once you have live mic channels), the song's key (only when no Regions module is on the page) and an external-display status key. A panel turned off in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS has no key here (Layout Design). It lays itself out across or down to suit the shape you give it, and draws in the page look unless you give it a finish of its own. When the module is too short for its keys in one line, they wrap into a second column (or row) — a third or more if they need it — and stay finger-sized; only a module too small for any arrangement shrinks them, and then every key stays in sight. Each key is described in Controls Module Keys. With the Controls module hidden, ••• offers Mixer, Microphones and Projection instead (each one still on in PANELS) and the floating Library key appears, so no panel you use is ever out of reach.

A panel's key wears a ring while its panel is open and a small pin badge on its corner while the panel is pinned. Opening a panel from a key closes any other panel that isn't pinned — one unpinned panel at a time, while pinned ones stay open.

The floating keys — Editor (square.and.pencil), ••• and Library (building.columns, only while the Controls module is hidden, whether or not the Setlist module is on the page) — are solid keys in the page look, with nothing see-through behind them. Drag one to move it; tap it to act (§2). The ••• and Library keys wear the same outside ring while their menu or window is open, and the Library key the pin badge while the Library is pinned.

Changing a module's look mid-set

A two-finger press-and-hold on a module, or ••• → Module looks, opens that module's card over the performing page without entering Layout Design — a two-finger hold on PLAY opens the Transport card without starting the song. See Module looks — without Layout Design.

5.4 Editor Puck — Open Song Editor

Tap the Editor puck (square.and.pencil) — the floating key described in §5.3 — to open the Song Editor. How it opens depends on your device and window size.

On iPad — in a full-screen or wide Split View window — it opens in place over the cockpit: the modules give way to it until you return. It is a single waveform (Regions) editor, with no Mixer / Regions / Audio mode pills. You are always on the waveform; everything else is reached from the controls around it:

To reach… Use…
Song Infothe Info button in the bottom-panel header
Lyricsthe bottom panel itself (the lyrics editor)
Audio tracks (list, trim, fade, beat-align, cuts)the Audio Tracks button in the bottom-panel header, and the ••• tools menu above the waveform
Compact mixerthe Mixer button in the bottom-panel header
Pro Mixer (Pro upgrade)PRO in the compact mixer

Return to the cockpit with the editor's ‹ Live button, at the right end of its header. Your open Library, Mixer, Microphones and Projection panels return with you, with their pins and positions unchanged. Entering Edit does not close them.

On iPhone — and on iPad in a narrow Split View window — it opens full-screen with four tabs along the bottom — Info (Song Information), Lyrics (Lyrics Editor), Tracks (Audio Tracks), and Editor (Waveform Editor) — with a ✓ at the top right to keep your changes and close, and, once you have changed something, a red ✕ at the top left to discard it. On an iPhone's Editor tab, the ✕, the ✓ and the other three tabs move to a rail down the right-hand side.

Audio continues playing while the editor is open — the metronome is not disrupted.

Opening the full editor vs. quick lyric edits

The full Song Editor is opened with the Editor puck (above); the Live page has no other editor button.

For a quick fix to the words, double-tap the lyrics in the Lyrics module while the song is stopped. That opens a quick editor for text, chords and linked section names, in the page’s Stage, Dusk or Daylight look. Timing and marker positions stay unchanged. Use it for fast typo fixes mid-rehearsal without entering the full editor. While the song is playing a double-tap does nothing, so a stray tap can never open it mid-song. A faint Double-tap to edit hint in the bottom-left corner of the lyrics teaches the gesture, and retires for good after you have used it four times (Quick Edit Lyrics).

Keep & Close / Discard

The full-screen editor saves as you work. Its ✓ (top-right) closes it and keeps your changes. The red ✕ (top-left) appears only when the current tab has changes since you opened it; tap it to put that tab back as it was and close (full details in §6). The inline editor auto-saves continuously; tap ‹ Live to close it.

Waveform & Transport Buttons in the Song Editor

On the full-screen editor's Info, Lyrics and Tracks tabs, a waveform bar sits at the bottom of the screen, just above the tabs:

No-audio songs in the full-screen editor

When the current song has no audio tracks imported at all, the bottom bar changes its content:

Full editor vs. quick lyric edits:

  • For deep edits (mix, regions, audio, lyric timing): open the full Song Editor with the Editor puck.
  • For quick word fixes between songs: double-tap the lyrics while the song is stopped — the quick editor corrects text, chords and linked section names without moving timing or markers.

5.5 Region Chips — Go Live

The Regions module shows the loaded song's header (§5.8) and, under it, a horizontally scrolling row of region chips — one per region in the song. The chips implement the full Region Loop Coordinator logic: what a tap does depends on whether audio is playing.

Each chip is labeled with the region's title — the name you gave it in the editor (e.g. "I Will Worship"). Rename a region in the editor and its live chip updates immediately, and the name you typed is kept exactly as you typed it.

Press and hold a chip to open its small edit panel. Choose Rename…, enter the name and tap Save, or choose Color and tap a swatch. The panel follows the module's look. These edits preserve the region's timing, section link and playback behavior.

A region you never named shows its section instead — Chorus 1, Bridge — written in the song's language, so a Spanish song reads Coro 1 and Puente. Regions the app never named — imports often arrive as a row of identical "Region" entries — show their section too, whenever the app worked one out.

Every chip also carries the section's colour and the region's playback-mode glyph after its name (Repeat Once, Loop, Skip or Pause — a loop or repeat already used up on this pass drops its glyph), and chips show a slice of the song's waveform for their region — every chip in the Dot style; in the others, the playing chip when it has no state word to show (§5.7). The colours are drawn as softened stage shades, so a warm section never turns muddy on a dark page; the colour you chose in the editor is never changed.

If the song has no regions and no section markers, the module shows a single line instead: No sections — add Regions in the editor.

Chip Styles — Dot, Stripe and Tab

The chips come in three styles. Choose one on the Regions module's card: ••• → Layout Design, tap the Regions module, then pick from the Style row. To change it mid-gig without entering Layout Design, use ••• → Module looks (then tap the Regions module) or a two-finger press-and-hold on the Regions module — the same card opens over the performing page (Module looks).

Style Where the section's colour sits Where the state word sits Waveform
Dot (default)A small dot at the top-leftTop-right — NOW, NEXT, LOOP, CUE, SKIPAlong the bottom of every chip
StripeA stripe along the chip's top edge (in the Dark finish the name takes a tint of it too)On a second line under the nameOn the playing chip, when it has no word to show (a LOOP, say)
TabA small colour tab before the nameOn a second line under the nameOn the playing chip, when it has no word to show

The style is stored with the layout, beside the module's finish: each layout keeps its own chip style, saved the moment you choose it; Save as New Layout…, Export My Presets… and Import Presets… carry it with the arrangement, and Discard puts back the style you had when you opened Layout Design. The same card's Finish row (Stage · Dusk · Daylight · Match page) and Timeline row (§5.8) apply to the Regions module as well. The segue picker (§5.20) draws its chips in whichever style you chose.

Song is stopped

Action What happens
Tap a chipThe chip is preselected — an amber ring beats on the song's tempo, with a blinking amber lamp and NEXT. The playhead snaps to that region's start. Press PLAY to begin playback from there.
Tap the same chip againDeselects it. Playback will start from wherever the playhead currently sits.
Tap a different chipThe previous chip deselects and the new chip is preselected. Only one chip can be preselected at a time.
Tap a chip while a stopped FADE or VAMP bed is runningEnters the song at that region, with its announcement and count-off — see §5.13.

Song is playing

Action What happens
Tap the currently playing chipTurns on a loop: the chip says LOOP and its ↻ blinks on the beat — this region will repeat when it ends. Tap it again to cancel the loop; the region plays to its end and the song carries on. On a region whose own playback mode is Loop or Repeat Once, the first tap does the opposite — it lets the region play through once, and its mode glyph goes out until the song moves on.
Tap a different chipThat chip is queued to play next — a steady amber ring (with a soft amber glow on Dot and Tab chips), a blinking amber lamp and NEXT. The playing chip keeps playing until the boundary; then the queued region becomes the playing chip.
Tap the queued chip againCancels the queue.
Tap a chip during a held vampMoves where the song comes back in — that chip shows CUE (§5.13).

While you choose a segue to the next song, the chip row becomes the segue picker — see §5.20.

Press and Hold a Chip

A press-and-hold opens a menu for quick edits, made in place without opening the editor:

Item What it does
Rename…Type a new name for the region.
ColorPick Blue, Yellow, Green, Orange, Purple, Pink, Teal or Red.

Neither edit disturbs a loop or a queue that is already running. A single tap still selects the chip as usual.

Visual states at a glance

Visual Meaning
Lit chip — a pale tint of the section's colour (Dot, Stripe), or a lit silver key with the colour kept in its tab (Tab; on Daylight it is the one dark key)The region playing now. While the song runs it says NOW (Dot) or shows ▶ before its name (Stripe, Tab).
Filled part + thin playhead lineHow far into the region the playhead has advanced — on the playing chip the full section colour fills in over the tint. Shown on whichever chip the playhead is in, stopped or playing.
Amber ring + blinking amber lamp + NEXTPreselected (stopped — the ring beats) or queued to play next (playing — the ring is steady, with a soft glow on Dot and Tab chips)
↻ LOOPThis region will repeat — the loop override is active
↩ CUE with a beating amber ringWhere a held vamp will come back in
SKIPThe region's playback mode is Skip
Mode glyph after the nameThe region's assigned playback behavior (Repeat Once, Loop, Skip, Pause)
Beat flash around the playing chipThe metronome's visual pulse, when the song's Visual Pulse is set to Current Region (§5.3)

5.6 Section Marker Chips — No Regions / No Audio

When a song has no regions defined (or no audio imported at all), the region chip row is replaced by a section marker chip bar — a horizontally scrolling row of chips with a dashed outline that represent the lyric section markers stamped in the Lyrics editor. They are drawn in the Regions module's look, like the region chips.

This bar only appears when both of the following are true:

Visual design

Each chip shows:

Part What you see
Color dotA small filled circle on the left, in the section's color
CUE text (when set)The cue reminder at the top of the chip (18 pt bold). It stays on one line — anything too long truncates with an ellipsis (…) rather than wrapping to a ragged second line
Section abbreviationBelow the CUE text when set; shown on its own when no CUE is present
Dashed outlineIn a quiet shade of the section's colour — tells these apart from region chips at a glance
Current markerIts outline turns solid in the section's colour and its name gets heavier
Dashed amber ringA tap waiting for the next downbeat (lyrics-only song running — see below)
Progress barWhile the song runs, the current chip fills a thin bar over its bar count at the song's tempo

Chips show no time number. For these markers — especially no-audio songs, where positions are just sequential slots — a number carried no useful meaning.

This visual treatment immediately tells you these are markers, not regions — same tap behavior, but no loop/queue logic.

Tap behavior

State Tap result
Has audioSeeks the playhead to the marker's sample position, highlights the section, and scrolls the lyrics
No audioHighlights the section and scrolls the lyrics only (no seek — there is no audio to move)
No audio, runningWith Chip Advance set to By Bars (metronome), the tap is quantized: the chip wears a dashed amber ring and its section takes over on the next downbeat. With By Seconds (timed), it switches at once and that chip's timer starts again.

When multiple markers share the same section label

A letter suffix distinguishes them so you know which paragraph you're jumping to — CHa, CHb, CHc for three stamped markers on "Chorus". Letters follow the standard song-section convention and read clearly at a glance.


5.7 Waveform Display

On the Go Live page the song's waveform appears in two places, and both are always drawn — there is no setting to hide them:

Both are drawn from a mix of the song's musical stems only — click, cue and vamp tracks are left out — so the shape you see is the music, not the metronome.

Zooming, panning, double-tap region zoom and Follow Playhead belong to the waveform in the Song Editor — see Zoom & Navigation in §6b.

5.8 Go Live Header — Song, Key, Tempo & Timeline

The top row of the Regions module is the song header — what is loaded, and where the song is. Left to right:

Part What it shows and does
CoverThe song's cover art — the one permanent picture of what is loaded, recognisable at a glance from behind a keyboard. A song without its own cover shows the app's own mark, quietly, on a ground coloured from its title (§3.5a).
TitleThe loaded song's title in large, heavy type (No song loaded when nothing is). The song's title and its keys take their room first; the scrubber gets what is left.
KeyThe song's key in short form (G, Gm, F♯), following any performance transpose, with a white lamp beside it while a transpose is applied. Tap it to open the Transpose popover (Key & Transpose). Shown when the song has a written key; if the Regions module is hidden, the same key moves to the Controls module.
TempoThe tempo the song is actually playing at — e.g. 146 BPM — so on a song whose tempo moves, it follows. A white lamp beside the number means you have changed the speed. Tap it to open the Tempo popover (below).
ScrubberThe whole song's waveform with the playhead on it (below).
Song timeWhere the song is and how long it is — e.g. 2:46 / 6:35 — updated once a second.

The header is drawn in the Regions module's look, like its chips.

The Tempo Popover

Control What it does
− / +Change the tempo in 1 BPM steps. The percentage beside them is the distance from the song's own tempo; double-tap it to go back.
MOVESChange speed — play the song faster or slower than it was recorded; the metronome follows (up to ±20%). Fix wrong tempo — the song was always this tempo and it was detected wrong; nothing plays faster.
ResetReturns to the song's own tempo.

A song with no tempo yet says No tempo yet — set or detect one first.

The Scrubber

Region colours on the timeline. The Regions module's card has a Timeline row: Off (default), Full (each region's colour behind the waveform) or Line (a thin colour strip along the top edge, leaving the waveform clear). Unlike the finish and the chip style, this is one setting for the whole app — it is not stored with a layout, and the song strip in the Keys workspace follows it too. It is chosen here only — there is no Settings row for it.

The NEXT Song

While the song plays and you are choosing or have armed a segue (§5.20), the next song joins the header: an amber lamp, NEXT, its title, its key and its tempo. The scrubber shortens to make room but stays on screen.

Phone and Small Windows

On a phone, and in a shrunk iPad window, the header goes compact so the title still has room: a smaller cover and title, the tempo without the word "BPM", and no song time.

The song's level is not in the header — it has a module of its own, Song Vol (Song Vol — the song level module).

5.9 Live Lyrics

Lyrics synchronized to the audio scroll automatically in the Lyrics module. The current line is highlighted. No action is needed — lyrics sync runs in the background as audio plays. The top and bottom edges of the lyrics fade smoothly into the screen behind them, so a line never clips hard at the frame.

When the active section changes, the lyrics list scrolls smoothly to center the new section using a spring animation, and the region chip row scrolls to keep the active chip visible — both with the same fluid, critically-damped motion (no bounce).

The Lyric Screen

The lyrics sit on the look's lyric screen — a darker panel set into the page with a fine edge, in every look: near-black on Stage, a deep blue-black on Dusk. The Lyrics module offers only the Dark and Dusk finishes — a light lyrics panel would glare on a dark stage — so on a Daylight page the lyrics take Dusk's screen.

The background behind the words is your choice, on the Projection panel's Device tab under Background → Lyrics Module Background (§5.10):

Option What you see
Theme Tint (default)A soft tint of your colour theme (chosen under APPEARANCE at the top of the ••• menu) over the screen
NoneThe look's own lyric screen and nothing else

While FADE or VAMP is holding the song on its vamp — from the moment the band has faded out, through the announcement and the re-entry — the background turns black in every look, whichever background you chose, so the hold reads at a glance; it returns the moment the song lands. A Simple Fade (§5.13) and a vamp segue into the next song leave the background as it is.

Section names. The current section's name sits on a neutral pill, with a short bar in the section's colour beside it — the colour marks the section rather than flooding it. Other sections show a quieter name beside a quieter bar. When the current section has several paragraphs, a counter such as 2/3 follows its name.

Markers Drive Section Detection

The active section (the one that is highlighted and scrolled to) is determined by lyric section markers first, then by regions as a fallback. Because markers are typically placed a few beats before the region boundary (via the CUE offset), the lyrics begin scrolling into the new section before the music's downbeat — giving the performer a natural visual lead-in.

Multi-Paragraph Spacing

Blank lines within a lyric section are preserved as visual paragraph spacing. If the Lyrics editor contains blank lines between groups of lyric lines (e.g. separating verse paragraphs), those gaps appear as a small spacer in the Live View, the Song Editor lyrics, and on the external projection screen — keeping the songwriter's intended structure intact.

Per-Paragraph Highlighting

When a section has multiple paragraphs (separated by blank lines), the Live View highlights one paragraph at a time instead of lighting up the entire section. As the playhead advances through the region, paragraphs switch automatically:

Only the active paragraph is highlighted; other paragraphs in the same section remain unlit. When your Active Section Highlight uses a background (BG Stripe, or the Background stripe switch), the highlight is a neutral wash behind the paragraph — the section's colour stays in the bar beside its name. The view auto-scrolls to the active paragraph.

With Fade others on, every other section dims, and its colour bar and chords turn a quiet neutral rather than a dimmed colour.

Auto-Generated Paragraph Markers

When you create regions via AI Detect Sections — and again whenever you open the Song Editor — the app automatically drops a paragraph-break marker inside any region whose lyrics section contains multiple paragraphs. Each one lands a couple of beats before the middle of its region — an early, musical default that brings the next paragraph up slightly before you reach it — and keeps its timing when you resize a boundary or re-detect tempo. Moving the whole region carries its paragraph markers by the same distance, keeping their spacing. Undo/redo restores the region and markers together.

To divide a section quickly, place the playhead inside it, press and hold the region, then tap Split at Playhead. The right-hand region is selected; no rename field opens automatically. Change its Tag/ID whenever you are ready to give it a different lyric section. That new section starts at its first paragraph and gets its own paragraph cues. Until you change the tag, the existing lyrics keep their timing across the cut instead of restarting.

Paragraph markers also auto-sync when you edit lyrics — if you add or remove a blank line that changes the paragraph count, the markers are regenerated automatically to match. Split parts preserve their existing timing; place any newly added paragraph cues where you want them.

Paragraph-break markers appear on the timeline as a labelled capsule (¶1, ¶2, …) with a grabbable stem, in the section's color — clearly visible and distinct from regular section markers, and draggable: grab the stem and slide the marker to the exact moment that paragraph is sung.

Tip: The auto-placed spot (a couple of beats before the region's middle) is only a starting point. For precise timing, drag the ¶ marker to where the paragraph is actually sung — it keeps that timing through boundary edits and travels with the region when you move the whole region. You can also delete it and place your own with Mark Mode. A marker you've dragged is never re-positioned by the auto-placement again.

Playhead-Drag Lyrics Sync

Dragging the playhead (scrubbing) in Go Live or the Regions Editor previews which lyrics are tied to any point in the song — but the on-screen lyrics follow the music, not your finger. While you drag, the displayed section and paragraph hold; they update when you release:

Because the lyrics track the audio rather than the finger, the audience projection stays calm — it never shows lyrics scrubbing back and forth while you find your spot.

Regions Without Lyrics

A region can name a part of the song that has no lyrics — an instrumental, an interlude, a worship-leader moment. This happens whenever a region's section tag doesn't match any section in your Lyrics (either on purpose, or because the names don't line up — e.g. a region tagged worship leader but no Worship Leader section). When the playhead moves into such a region, the app doesn't leave the previous section's lyrics stranded on screen:

Tap a Section to Select It

In the Live View lyrics scroll, tapping a section header label or any lyric line under a section selects that section — the same behavior as tapping its region chip in the chip row. If the section isn't fully on screen it scrolls to the top; tap it again and it scrolls back to the top.

Tapping a paragraph inside a section selects that paragraph, so on a long verse you can put the exact block you're singing at the top of the screen.

This works from the lyrics alone and needs nothing else set up — no regions, no markers, no cues. A song that is only labelled lyrics behaves the same as a fully produced one; the playhead and loop behaviour in the table below simply apply to songs that have regions.

Playback state What tapping a section does
StoppedThe section is preselected, as its chip would be. The playhead snaps to that section's start. Pressing PLAY begins playback from there. Tap the same section again to deselect.
Playing — tap the active sectionToggles loop mode for the current section (same as tapping the active chip). Tap again to cancel the loop.
Playing — tap a different sectionQueues that section as the next playback target (same as tapping a non-active chip). The current section plays to its end, then the queued section starts.

Mirror of chip behavior. The section header pill and the lyric lines block under it both respond identically to tap, and the whole line area — including the empty space beside the words — is tappable, not just the text. Use whichever is easier to reach on stage.

The same tap works in the editor. Tapping a section or paragraph in the Lyrics editor selects and scrolls it there too, and the choice carries through to the projection preview and the external screens — so what you pick while editing is what everyone else sees.

Quick Edit Lyrics

Double-tap the lyrics while the song is stopped to open the Quick Edit Lyrics sheet — an editor for text, chords and section names that follows the page’s Stage, Dusk or Daylight look; timing and marker positions stay unchanged (see §5.4). It never opens while the song is playing, so a stray double-tap on stage can't interrupt you.

Use Text for wording fixes. Chords appear above the lyrics, in a distinct color; tap the words to edit them. The [Dm] button beside Dual Lyrics shows the current display: Above or Inline. Tap it to choose Above lyrics or Inline; the highlighted row and checkmark show your choice. Choosing a display opens Text and affects Quick Edit only. Inline chord tokens stay colored while editing. Word edits keep chords attached to unchanged words after the edit. Measure rows such as || D | A | Em | G || keep their chords between the bar lines, on one line.

Use Chords to tap the chord you want to correct. The controls stay below the scrolling lyrics: left/right arrows move the chord one character; up/down arrows select the previous or next chord. You can also scroll and tap another chord directly, without closing an editor. Chords use the song’s written key, before performance transpose or section modulation. Changing only the chord name keeps its position. Changes stay in a draft until Save; Cancel lets you discard them.

Quick Edit follows the main editor’s Line Spacing setting: chords sit directly above their words, with a normal blank line between sections and at paragraph breaks. It adds no extra padding between lyric lines.

For bilingual lyrics, tap the outlined language button beside Text and Chords to open Editor Displays: and filter the list. All languages and each language are selectable rows; the current choice has a colored highlight and checkmark. Switching languages keeps your place in the matching section (for example, Chorus 2), clamping to its last line if the translation is shorter. Untagged lines remain visible. Switching keeps unsaved edits and never changes the language being performed. Language settings in that menu opens song language setup; it omits the full editor’s unrelated Show one language at a time preference.

Tap a section heading to rename it. The matching lyric sections, region tags and lyric-marker labels change together, including linked repeats and translations. Custom region-chip titles stay as written. A name that would merge separate sections is refused. Save while stopped; a failed save leaves the draft open.

Dual Lyrics in the sheet’s top-right corner switches between one and two columns on Live. It takes effect immediately and stays saved separately from text edits; cancelling text edits does not undo this layout preference. The Controls module no longer carries this button.

A faint Double-tap to edit hint sits at the bottom-left of the lyrics while the song is stopped and has lyrics. It grows fainter each time you use the gesture and retires for good after the fourth.

Controls Module Keys

The panel controls live in the Controls module — solid keys in the module's look, laid out in a row or a column to suit the module's shape. When the module is too short for its keys in one line, they wrap into a second column (or row) — a third or more if they need it — and stay finger-sized; only a module too small for any arrangement shrinks them, and then every key stays visible. Left to right (or top to bottom):

Key Icon Action
Librarybuilding.columnsOpens the floating Library window (§3.7). Always there.
Projectionsparkles.tvOpens the Projection panel — projected-screen styling plus this device's lyric display settings (see §5.10).
Mixerslider.horizontal.3Opens the floating Mixer panel (§5.17) — channel strips, buses, Save Mix, and snapshots.
MicrophonesmicOpens the MIC panel (§9.4c). Shown only once live mic channels exist — and, with Microphones turned off in PANELS, only while a mic is talking. While a mic is on TALK the key wears the talk lamp and a filled mic; when every mic is muted, a red lamp and a slashed mic.
Key—The song's key, as in the song header — shown here only when the Regions module is hidden from your layout.
External displayplay.tvA status key, not a button: it appears while an external display is connected — its lamp a ring while connected, green while projecting.

A key whose panel is open wears a selection ring outside its edge. Tap a panel key again to close its panel. A key whose panel is pinned wears a small pin badge on its top-left corner. Opening a panel closes every other panel that isn't pinned; pinned panels stay open.

If you hide the Controls module, its panels are still reachable: ••• → Mixer, ••• → Microphones (once mic channels exist) and ••• → Projection appear in the ••• menu while the module is hidden — except a panel turned off in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS (Layout Design), though Microphones still appears while a mic is talking — and the floating Library key stands in for the Library key.

Dual-Column Layout

Double-tap the Lyrics module while stopped, then tap Dual Lyrics at the top-right of Quick Edit Lyrics. It highlights when two-column mode is on; tap again for one column. Your selected section stays in view when the layout changes.

Mode How sections are arranged
Single column (default)Sections scroll vertically one after another
Dual columnConsecutive sections are paired left/right — section N on the left, section N+1 on the right

Sections are always displayed in chronological (song performance) order — determined by each section's region start time — regardless of the order they were typed or saved in the Lyrics editor.

Highlight in dual-column mode: The active-section highlight is a tight rounded rectangle drawn directly inside the section's own content block. It highlights the active column only; the adjacent column remains unlit.

Tip: The setting persists across app restarts.

Single-Column Centering

In single-column mode (default), lyric lines and chord symbols are center-aligned, giving lyrics the feel of a natural performance prompt rather than a left-aligned document. Switching to dual-column automatically reverts to left-aligned so each column reads as its own distinct block.

5.10 External Lyrics Projection

Lyrics are projected to a connected external display automatically — see Section 7 for the full projection system. To style what's projected without leaving the cockpit, tap the Projection key (sparkles.tv) in the Controls module — or ••• → Projection when the Controls module is hidden. It opens the Projection panel, and the key wears a selection ring while the panel is open. If you never style the projection from here, turn Projection off for this device in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS (Layout Design): its key and its ••• row go, on every layout.

The Projection Panel

The panel is the same floating card on iPhone as on iPad — place it anywhere over the cockpit. The card's chrome:

Control What it does
Slim headersparkles.tv icon + PROJECTION title, with the pin and ✕ on the right. Press-drag anywhere on the header to move the card.
Pin (pin)Orange = pinned — the panel stays open alongside other panels, whatever else you open. Unpinned (how it starts on a new install), it closes by its ✕ or the Projection key, or when another panel opens; a tap outside the card never closes it.
✕Closes the panel — the Projection key does too.
Side grabbersA handle on the left and right edges — drag either one to move the card.
Corner resizeDrag the arrow handle at the top-left or bottom-right corner to resize the card.

Use either side grabber or drag the header to move the card. The Mixer, MIC and Library panels work the same way.

The card's position and size are remembered across app launches — on iPad separately for each layout preset and orientation, on iPhone (and in a shrunk iPad window) for each orientation — and so is the pin. On iPhone, where the card covers most of the screen, the floating pucks step aside while it's open.

Editor hand-off: opening the Song Editor closes the panel automatically — the editor carries its own projection settings beside the lyrics (§6c External Video Panel).

Projection and Device Tabs

A pill at the top of the panel switches between two views:

The Projection tab leads with a live preview of the projected output, then the output-target row: an Audience chip carrying its Song | Global sub-views, with a separate Stage chip on the far side — the same target row as the editor's projection settings (Section 7).

Region media — the photo button (photo.on.rectangle.angled) beside the tab pill opens the Projection Images sheet right from Live: per-region backgrounds and top layers, plus on-demand top layers (see Per-Region Projection Images).

Shrinking the Card to Just the Preview

Once everything is set, the settings are in the way — what you want on screen is a small window showing what the audience is actually seeing. Drag the corner handle upwards and the card gives things up as it shortens, in this order:

As the card gets shorter What goes
FirstThe PROJECTION title bar, including pin and close
ThenThe Theme and settings list
ThenThe output-target row (Audience · Song · Global · Stage) and the caption under the preview
LastThe Projection / Device tabs and the images button

The preview's theme button stays available after the settings list hides. Projection, Device and the images button stay visible longest.

And the preview holds its size. It sits at its full 16:9 size for the card's width and stays there, right down until the card is smaller than the picture itself. It never grows as you shrink the card, and never falls below a readable size.

Below the last rung there is nothing left to absorb the spare height, so the preview centres — the leftover becomes margin above and below it rather than a gap underneath.

Pull the card back down and each piece returns in reverse order. Nothing is lost or reset — the tab and target you had selected are still selected when they come back.

Two keys stay on the picture at every size. At its top-left, the chevron that applies what the preview shows to the whole set list. At its top-right, a theme key — Aa drawn in the chosen look's own font and colours — that opens the same theme list as the THEME row, for the screen the card is showing, so a card shrunk to just the picture can still change the look. On the Stage target, whose picture shows no theme, the key stands dimmed in Stage's font and does nothing. Neither key covers the section arrows at the bottom corners.

The chevron opens Apply to Setlist in both Live and the editor preview. Choose Theme, Overlay and/or Bg Clip, then tap the setlist name to apply those choices to its songs. If the two setlist views show different sets, the menu offers both names so you can choose the destination.

The card still moves with its title bar gone. Drag either side grabber, or the thin strip left where the title bar stood (it carries no handle). And the Projection key in the Controls module still closes it, so a card shrunk to a preview is never stuck on screen.


5.11 Live Action Buttons

The Transport module holds the song's action keys — FADE, VAMP and the language key — in a stable order, in rows of three, above the CLICK · AUTO · rewind keys and PLAY (§5.3). The keys are worked out from the song each time it loads, so they follow your edits.

VAMP and the language key always hold their place. Rather than disappearing when the current song can't use them, they stay put — grayed (no vamp source / only one language) — so their position never shifts and your muscle memory holds. A press-and-hold on a grayed VAMP still opens Vamp Settings so you can set up a vamp source and bring it to life.

Mixer snapshots are not transport keys. In Go Live they are the snapshot keys at the head of the Mixer Tiles grid and the chips in the Mixer panel — see §5.12.

Button Types

Key Icon Purpose Press and hold
FADEA trend line — down while playing, up while stoppedFade the band to the click, hold, and come back in — the vamp/hold system (§5.13)Vamp Settings…
VAMPcircle.grid.3x3.fillHold the section on the song's vamp bed — the built-in vamp track, the song's own percussive bed, or a vamp-only stem (§5.13). A vertical flick on the key nudges the vamp level by 2 dB, and the level shows on the key.Vamp Settings…
Languagecharacter.bubbleSwap vocal stems and lyrics between the song's languages mid-song. It shows the current language's name (e.g. SPANISH) and wears a dot in that language's cue colour — the colour its banner flashes over the lyrics. See §5.13a Language Switch.Language Setup…

What the Keys Say

Line 1 is the verb — what a tap does right now. FADE and VAMP add a second line naming the region they will land on, when there is one.

Moment FADE VAMP
PlayingFADE OUTVAMP
Fading into the holdFADING OUTVAMPING
HoldingBACK IN + the region it will re-enterBACK IN + the region
Re-entry committedENTERING + the regionENTERING + the region
StoppedARMVAMP
Stopped, a region chosenFADE IN + the regionVAMP + the region
Stopped, the bed running, no region chosenTAP REGIONTAP REGION
Stopped, the bed running, a region chosenFADE IN + the regionENTER SONG + the region

Some moments override the verb: ARMED (the key's action waits for the next bar), SEGUE·FADE / SEGUE·VAMP (an armed segue will land with this key), and → FADE OUT / → VAMP (a segue is armed and this key can land it). The language key reads EN→ES while a switch is waiting.

Smart Defaults

Which keys come alive depends on the song:

Condition What you get
Song has audio tracks of its ownFADE — click and cue tracks are exempt from the fade
Song can vamp — a built-in vamp track, its own percussive bed, or a vamp-only stemVAMP, live (otherwise it is shown grayed)
Song has two languages — stems tagged by language, or bilingual lyricsThe language key, live (otherwise a grayed Lang). A lyrics-only bilingual song gets the language key too.
Song has 2+ audio tracksSmart default snapshots, saved to the song the first time (§5.12)

On a lyrics-only song VAMP — and FADE, where it shows — is grayed: there is nothing to fade or loop.

Visual States

Keys are neutral in every look. FADE and VAMP use a coloured icon, a ring and the state word; language and snapshot keys retain their small lamps.

Appearance Meaning
Neutral key, icon + wordReady
Amber ring + pulsing amber icon (a corner lamp on language keys)Armed — waiting for its moment: armed for the next bar, a segue landing with it, a language switch waiting for the next boundary, or a stopped FADE whose silent click is running
Amber ring onlyOffered — a segue is armed while playing, and this key can land it
Lit key + green iconOn — sounding or holding. The icon turns amber while the key is ENTERING.
Grayed legendNot available now — no vamp source, one language, a lyrics-only song, the last song's keys while nothing is loaded, or another rig has the transport
No-entry icon on VAMPOffered for a next song with no vamp the room can hear — a tap lands a silent FADE segue instead

5.12 Mixer Snapshots

A Mixer Snapshot saves every track's fader level and pan, and lets you recall it with a smooth, staggered ramp.

Snapshot Keys in Go Live

In Go Live, snapshots appear in two places:

Press and hold a snapshot key for Overwrite with Current Mix, Rename, and Delete.

Drag a snapshot onto another snapshot to move it to that position. The order is saved with the song and shared by Mixer Tiles, the compact mixer, and the Pro mixer. Reordering keeps the current mix playing. In a narrow Pro mixer, open More snapshots to reorder the snapshots listed there.

How It Works

  1. Tap a snapshot → all faders ramp smoothly from their current positions to the snapshot's saved values. Any solo is cleared; mutes are left as they are.
  2. The ramp uses staggered timing — instruments fade in/out at different speeds so the transition sounds natural, like a live band shifting dynamics.
  3. The active snapshot stays lit while its levels are applied.
  4. Moving any fader manually clears the active snapshot indicator.

Bidirectional Stagger

Snapshot transitions use bidirectional stagger — tracks fading up and tracks fading down are staggered independently and run at the same time. This eliminates silence gaps when switching between very different snapshots (e.g. a Drums-only snapshot → a Vocals-only snapshot).

Tracks ramping UP (fade-in order):

Priority Group Delay from start
1Drums / Percussion0 beats (immediate)
2Bass+4 beats
3Keys / Pads / Strings / Other+9 beats
4Guitar+13 beats
5Vocals+17 beats

Tracks ramping DOWN (fade-out order):

Priority Group Delay from start
1Vocals0 beats (drop first)
2Keys / Pads / Strings / Other+2 beats
3Guitar+5 beats
4Bass+8 beats
5Drums / Percussion+10 beats (last to go)

Both groups start at time 0 simultaneously. Each track's individual ramp uses smoothstep easing (~2 seconds). The beats are counted at the song's tempo — and when you have changed the song's speed they arrive sooner, so the stagger keeps pace with the music. The result is a natural crossfade — outgoing instruments peel away while incoming instruments build up, overlapping in the middle.

Locked Channels & Snapshots

Locked (hard-muted) channels are immune to snapshots. If you lock a channel — a long-press on its tile (§5.16), or a double-tap on its Mute in the mixer — Reset never moves that channel's fader, and neither does recalling a snapshot while you are performing: a setlist loaded in Go Live, or RAMP on in the Pro Mixer (§9.9). It stays at 0. This lets you unlock the channel later with a smooth ramp-up at the moment you choose.

Smart Default Snapshots

When a song has at least two real audio tracks of its own (click and cue tracks don't count), the app generates smart snapshot presets from your song's track names and saves them to the song the first time it is opened on the Live page:

Snapshot Behavior
Loop OnlyWhen the song has a loop track (a word in its name starts with "loop"): loop tracks keep their levels, everything else drops to 0
Drums & Bass / Drums OnlyWhen there is no loop track: drum tracks — plus bass tracks, when present — keep their levels, everything else drops to 0
AcousticAcoustic instruments audible, electric instruments silenced (detected by track name keywords). Offered only when the song has both acoustic and non-acoustic tracks

Track classification matches keywords at the start of a word in the track name (e.g. "Acoustic Guitar" → acoustic group, "Drum Kit" → drums group). Like any snapshot, the defaults can be overwritten, renamed or deleted.

Inline Snapshot Capsules

Snapshots are displayed as chips in a horizontal row wherever the mixer appears — the Go Live floating Mixer panel (§5.17), the editor's mixer, and the Pro Mixer's header. Every chip shows the snapshot's name. In the Go Live Mixer panel the chips are keys of the page's look, and the active one is held inside a ring; in the Pro Mixer the recalled one keeps its name, lit and ringed in blue, with ↺ (§9.0).

Gesture Action
Tap a chipRecall that snapshot — faders ramp smoothly to the saved values. The chip label changes to "Reset" while active.
Tap "Reset"Return all faders to their saved mix baseline (the last values saved with Save Mix)
Long-press a chipContext menu with Overwrite with Current Mix, Rename, and Delete

Fixed-width chips: In the Mixer panel a chip keeps its width when its label changes to "Reset", and a Pro Mixer snapshot key always keeps room for its ↺, so neither row shifts under your finger.

Capturing a Custom Snapshot

Tap the + button at the end of the snapshot row to capture the current fader positions as a new snapshot. It is named automatically ("Snap 1", "Snap 2", etc.) — long-press it to rename.

You can store up to 3 snapshots per song. When the cap is reached, the + button is hidden.

Save Mix

Tap MIX (the sliders button before the snapshots) in the compact mixer, editor or Pro Mixer. The save icon appears only beside Save Mix inside the menu. Choose an action; it runs immediately, without another confirmation.

Action Result
Save MixReplaces this song's saved channel levels, pans and mutes. Solo is always temporary, even when you save.
Recall Saved MixRestores the saved channel levels, pans and mutes, clears channel solos and releases temporary channel locks. Output buses, Song, Master and instrument controls keep their settings.
Set Faders to 0 dBSets the current song's channel faders to unity. Saved mix unchanged: pans and mute/solo choices stay as they are, as do output buses, Song, Master, instruments and click/cues. Choose Save Mix afterward only if you want to keep these levels as the new saved mix.

Channel mute and solo gestures never save themselves, whether or not a setlist is open. Switching away from a song and returning restores its saved channel mix; a mute remains only if you deliberately saved it. Solo never returns with a song. Opening another mixer or editor for the same song keeps your current working choices.

Recall Mix restores the whole saved channel mix. A snapshot's Reset still respects locked channels, so it can be used during performance without releasing those locks. Output-bus mutes stay in place across song changes—for example, when a live drummer replaces the drum bus for the service.

The Master rail remembers its level across app restarts, including 0 dB, a lowered level, or full silence. Recall Mix never resets it.


5.13 Fade Tracks — Vamp/Hold System

Fade Tracks — the transport's FADE key — is a live-performance "vamp" system. One tap fades all instrument tracks to silence (click stays), loops the current region, and holds there until you're ready to re-enter.

Two Modes

Mode When Behavior
Full VampThe playhead is inside a region that is at least one bar longStaggered fade → the region loops → announced re-entry
Simple FadeNo regions defined, the playhead between regions, or a region shorter than a barStaggered fade to click only, keep playing. Second tap fades back in.

Full Vamp Mode — Flow

Phase A — Fade Out:

  1. Tap FADE mid-song.
  2. The song keeps playing at full volume until the fade has to begin — it is timed to finish two bars before the end of the current region.
  3. Staggered fade-out (vocals first, drums last).
  4. The current region then loops: at its end the playhead goes back to its first bar. The loop is the whole region, snapped to bar lines, less any Trim End bars set in Vamp Settings.
  5. From the tap the key is lit, with a green icon, and says what is happening: FADING OUT (on VAMP, VAMPING), naming the region it is closing on — then BACK IN once the fade is done, naming the region it will re-enter.

Late fade-tap protection: If you tap FADE too close to the end of a region for the full fade to fit, the vamp loop is engaged at once (so the next region is never pre-scheduled) and the fade is compressed into the time that is left — all faders reach zero before the loop wraps, so the audience never hears the tail music being looped. Vocals, keys and guitar then start fading together; bass and drums keep their stagger (bass first), compressed to fit. A tap in the last split second before the boundary (under about 0.4 s) is ignored — tap again in the next region.

Phase B — Looping (Vamp):

Phase C — Re-Entry:

  1. (Optional) Tap a region chip to choose where to come back in (e.g. "Chorus 1"). The vamp moves there: when the pass that is playing ends, it jumps to that region and keeps looping it. Nothing is announced; the chip takes the CUE at once, and the key's second line names the region once the vamp has moved. (Tapped during the fade-out, the chip only sets where you will come back in.)
  2. Tap the FADE / VAMP key — it reads BACK IN — to come back into the song at the region named under it.
  3. The system plays a voice announcement of the target section name through the click/cues bus (in-ears only).
  4. In the last bar before re-entry, a count-off plays: "1, 2, 3, 4" (4/4) or "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" (6/8).
  5. At the loop boundary: playhead jumps to the target region and instruments fade back in with staggered timing (drums first, vocals last).

From the moment the re-entry is committed until the song is back, the key reads ENTERING with the target region under it, and its lamp turns a steady amber. A region tap from then on is ignored — the landing is already on its way.

Phase D — Changing your mind:

Staggered Fade Groups

Tracks are auto-classified into fade groups by matching words at the start of a word in the track name. The groups are tried in the order below, and the first match wins:

Group Detection keywords Examples
Drums/Percdrum, perc, kick, snare, tom, hi-hat / hihat, cymbal, shaker, tambourine, cowbell, bongo, conga, loop, click, metronome"Drum Kit", "Percussion Loop", "808 Kick"
Bassbass, sub, 808, bajo, baixo, basse"Electric Bass", "Synth Bass", "808"
Vocalsvocal, vox, voice, voz, voces, choir, coro, sing, harmony, bv, bgv, acapella, cantante, and the language words español / spanish / inglés / english (ESP and ENG only as whole words)"Lead Vocal", "BGV Stack", "VOX ESP"
Guitarguitar, guit, gtr, ac, elec, elc"Guitar 1", "Acoustic GTR", "Guitarra"
Keys/Pads/OtherEverything else — keys, piano, organ, synth, pads, strings, brass, and any name the lists above don't recognise"Keys", "Synth Pad", a stem named after the song

Tracks marked as percussive are always classified as Drums.

Fade-Out Order (melodic drops first, rhythm last)

Group Delay
Vocals0 beats (drop first)
Keys/Pads/Other+2 beats
Guitar+5 beats
Bass+8 beats
Drums/Perc+10 beats (last to go)

Fade-In Order (rhythm anchors first, melodic builds)

Group Delay
Drums/Perc0 beats (immediate)
Bass+4 beats
Keys/Pads/Other+9 beats
Guitar+13 beats
Vocals+17 beats

Voice Cues — Multi-Language Bundled Audio

The system includes pre-recorded section announcements in six voice packs:

Voice Pack ID Files Notes
English (Female)en-female55 filesDefault. Original set covering all common section types.
English (Male)en-male51 filesMale voice. Includes 6/8 count variants (ONE 6_8 … EIGHT 6_8).
English (Gospel)en-gospel38 filesGospel-style calls (Go To Church, Praise Break, Drive It, Chop It, Modulate, etc.).
Spanishes59 filesCoro, Verso, Puente, Interludio, etc. Includes 6/8 variants (UN 6_8 … OCHO 6_8).
Frenchfr25 filesFrench pronunciation of standard section names.
Germande25 filesGerman pronunciation of standard section names.

The voice pack is set per song via the Voice picker in the AI menu → Cues Track section. The selection is saved with the song and also used for live vamp announcements.

Section names are fuzzy-matched — "Chorus 1", "Ch1", "C1", "Cho", "Pre-Chorus", and similar abbreviations all resolve to the correct audio cue in any language. Hyphens and spaces are treated identically ("Pre-Chorus" and "Pre Chorus" both work). Labels like "Worship Leader" automatically use the Exhortation audio cue. Numbered variants like "Instrumental 1" fall back to the generic recording when no numbered file exists. When the selected language doesn't have a matching file for a section name, the system falls back to the English (Female) file, then to TTS as a last resort. See Voice Cue Section Labels — Full Reference in the Appendix for the complete list of recognized section names, abbreviations, and per-language translations.

Count-off audio provides beat-accurate spoken numbers ("1, 2, 3, 4" for 4/4; "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" for 6/8) scheduled sample-accurately to the beat grid.

Vamp Track Roles

Each track has a vamp role that controls how it behaves during a vamp. A track whose role is not Normal carries a small badge — in purple on its row in the Audio tab, and on its mix tile:

Role Badge Behavior
Normal—Default. Track fades out during vamp and fades back in on re-entry.
VampVOn VAMP, the track stays audible — it is exempt from the fade-out ramp. These tracks are the song's vamp bed: the percussion the audience keeps hearing. FADE is the silent hold, so it takes them down with everything else, and so does a Simple Fade, which has no loop to hold them.
Vamp OnlyV∞Track is silent during normal playback. On VAMP it automatically unmutes when the vamp activates and re-mutes on re-entry.

You choose the Vamp tracks in Vamp Settings → Vamp Bed (below). Vamp Only cannot be chosen anywhere in the app; a track that already carries it still behaves as described.

Exclusive vamp clips: Clips used only for the vamp load in the background when you request it, then start together on one bar. If their audio is still loading when the scheduled fade must begin, the app cancels that VAMP and shows “VAMP wasn’t ready in time. The song continues.” The song keeps playing; you can request the VAMP again. Stop, a song change, or cancelling the request prevents its waiting clips from starting later.

Vamp Settings

Press and hold FADE or VAMP in the transport and choose Vamp Settings… — both keys open the same sheet. It is per song:

Section What it holds
Vamp BedThe percussion that keeps playing while everything else fades out. Only percussive tracks are offered, each with the reason it was picked; untick what you don't want — just the loop, just the drums, or neither.
ClipsThis song's own clips that can loop under the VAMP. A clip has to match the song's tempo (or be tempo-free).
Built-in VampThe synthesised kick that follows the song's tempo: include it, choose Use Everywhere to layer it under every vamp, set its level and Bus, and Show in Mixer (this one applies to every song). Create Built-in Vamp or Delete Built-in Vamp from here.
Vamp LoopTrim End, 0–4 bars — trims bars off the end of the looped section, for a section that closes on a fill or a crash you don't want repeating.
BehaviorContinue VAMP When Song Starts — on, an active VAMP keeps looping as a layer when you start the song; off, it fades out at the next downbeat so the song begins clean.

Where to Set Vamp Roles

The Vamp Bed in Vamp Settings is the place: ticking a track there gives it the Vamp role, unticking puts it back to Normal. The V / V∞ badges — purple in the Audio tab, on a small plate on the mix tiles — only report the role.

FADE and VAMP while stopped — arm, choose, enter

Stopped, both keys work in steps — arm, choose a region, enter — and the key always says which step you are on. You can take the steps in either order:

Key reads What a tap on the key does
ARM (FADE) / VAMP — no region chosenFADE starts the bare click — an anchor to count from, unheard by the room. VAMP starts the vamp straight away.
TAP REGIONThe click or the vamp is running. Now tap a region chip: the song is entered there — announced, counted off, landing on its downbeat. On FADE the key wears the amber armed ring and its blinking lamp. Tapping the key itself again puts the click or the vamp away.
FADE IN / VAMP with a region under itYou chose the region first (tapped its chip while stopped). FADE enters the song there, the band fading back in. VAMP starts the vamp on that region's own percussion, and the key then reads BACK IN.

Moving and releasing a vamp

A region chip says where; the key says now:

Song Vol — the song level module

In Character and Vintage, the line under the value becomes a row of 21 small lights that light up to the level; on its own card, SONG sits in a small glass label window.

The Song Vol module is the song-level stepper — − <dB> + with a live dB readout — and it controls the SONG bus. Big keys you can hit without looking are easier on stage than a fader, and the precise fader is still one long-press away. Add it to your layout like any module (§5.0a); it carries a SONG tag on top, lies across in a wide slot and stands upright in a tall one (+ on top, louder upward).

Gesture Action
Tap −/+Nudge the level by 1 dB
Hold −/+Ramp continuously (holding − fades toward silence)
Long-press the dB valueOpen the Song Level fader popover — with Mute and a 0 dB reset

The value sits in a dark well: the signed level (0 dB, +2 dB, -3 dB), or OFF at silence, with a thin line under it showing where the level sits on the fader. Muted, the well turns red and reads MUTE. Range is −40 dB to +6 dB. Adjusting the level while muted automatically un-mutes (you are clearly using it).

One SONG fader at a time. While the Song Vol module is on the page, the Bus Rail beside the mix tiles drops its SONG key, so there are never two song faders that could disagree; hide the module and SONG returns to the rail. The rail keeps C&C, MAIN 2 and MASTER either way (§5.16).


5.13a Language Switch — Live Vocal & Lyric Swap

Sing the same song in two languages and switch between them mid-performance. When you switch, the app swaps the vocal stems for the chosen language and swaps the on-screen lyrics to match — the instruments (drums, bass, keys) keep playing untouched. The change lands cleanly at the next section boundary, so it never chops a line off mid-verse.

Setting a Song Up for Languages

Open the song's Quick Edit Lyrics sheet (double-tap the Live lyrics while the song is stopped — see Quick Edit Lyrics) and choose Language settings from its language menu. This opens the Languages panel, available for any song:

The compact window follows the Live page’s Stage, Dusk or Daylight look, with Done in the header. The song languages, track assignments and lyric check each have their own card; scroll for additional tracks.

Control What it does
Language code (es, en…)Type a short code and tap Add. A song can have at most two languages, shown by the 0/2–2/2 count. Remove one with its red minus to replace it.
Set defaultChooses which language the song loads in; the first language has a green Default badge. If you never set one, the song opens in the language its lyrics are written in — see Which language a song opens in below.
Track languagesEach of the song's tracks gets a picker — assign it a language, or leave it Neutral (all languages). Only tracks you assign to a language are swapped; Neutral tracks (drums, bass, instruments) always play.
Recheck languagesIn the Lyrics card: tags each lyric line with its language on-device. The card shows how many lines are matched. Matching also happens automatically as you type or import; rechecking needs two languages set.

You don't have to assign the vocal stems yourself: until you do, the panel opens with the assignments already filled in from language markers in your stem / file names (e.g. Lead Vox ES, PRAISE VOX ESP) — English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, German and Italian are recognised.

You can also adjust a track's language later from the Audio tab — each track row shows a Language chip once the song has two languages.

Exactly two: the live language key comes alive once a song has two languages, and two is also the maximum. With one language the key stays greyed; a third can't be added. Two keeps the live switch a single predictable tap — which is what you want on stage.

Switching Live

The language key (character.bubble) always sits among the transport's action keys (§5.3). On a multilingual song it reads the language the song is in now — SPANISH, ENGLISH (a long name is cut to its first four letters) — with a small dot in that language's cue colour, the same colour its banner flashes over the lyrics. On a song with only one language it reads Lang, greyed. This is the same control everywhere: the Go Live key, the Pro Mixer's language pill, and the language key in the editor transport cluster all arm/switch identically and stay in sync.

You do What happens
Tap while playing over a sectionArms the next language. The key reads EN→ES, with an amber ring inside its edge and a blinking amber lamp; the switch commits automatically at the next section boundary (loop or advance), so audio and lyrics change together on the downbeat.
Tap again before it commitsSwitches back to the language already playing, which cancels the arm.
Tap while stopped or between sectionsSwitches instantly.
Press and hold the language keyReopens the Languages setup panel (its menu item reads Language Setup…) at any time.

In the Mixers

The language state also shows in the Pro Mixer and the compact dock mixer — and the Pro Mixer can switch it — so a sound engineer can see and drive it too:

Per song, always resets to default. The language returns to the song's default whenever you load or SEGUE into it — it never carries the previous song's choice over.

Switching to a Language With No Lyrics

A song can have vocal stems for two languages but words for only one. Switch to the language you have no lyrics for and the app shows nothing — it will not fall back to the other language's words.

That is deliberate. Displaying English on the screens while the band sings Spanish is worse than an empty screen: the room reads the wrong thing and nobody on stage can tell. An empty screen you can simply speak to — "we'll take this one in Spanish."

So you are never left wondering whether something broke, both performer screens — the Go Live lyrics and the stage monitor — show a faint line naming the language, e.g. "No Spanish lyrics for this song." The audience screen shows only your background; the congregation is never shown app messages.

The song still opens in a language it has lyrics for (see below), so you only reach this state by choosing it.

Which Language a Song Opens In

A song loads in its default language — the one the language key shows before you touch anything, and the vocal stem you hear on the first downbeat.

The app picks it from your lyrics: whichever language you wrote first is the one the song opens in. That matters most when a song has vocal stems for two languages but lyrics for only one — for example an ESPAÑOL and an INGLES stem with a Spanish lyric sheet. Such a song opens in Spanish, with the Spanish vocal, because that is the language the words are in.

Use Make default in the Languages panel to override this whenever you want the other language to lead. Your choice is remembered per song and always wins.

Previewing Languages in the Editor

To preview each language while editing a multilingual song, use the language key on the editor transport (character.bubble, showing the language's name) — it broadcasts the choice, so the editor lyrics, Go Live, and the audience/stage screens all follow along. How the editor shows them is set by Show one language at a time on the Info tab's Language card. GLOBAL beside the switch identifies this as an editor preference for all songs:

This is a preview only — it doesn't change which language the song loads with (still the default set in the Languages panel).


5.13b Section Names in Your Language

Section names read in the language the song is written in. A song whose lyrics are headed Verso 1 and Coro 1 shows its regions as Verso 1 and Coro 1 — on the waveform, on the Live chips, in arrangement rows, and on a player's phone. An English song is unchanged.

Which language it picks. Your lyric section headers decide it. If you pasted a sheet headed Verso / Coro / Puente, that is the language, whatever else the song is set to — those headers are what you chose to keep. Only when the lyrics say nothing (no headers, or no lyrics at all) does the app fall back to the song's cue voice, then to the cue language, then to English. Section names in mixed languages are decided by majority, and the answer never changes between one launch and the next.

Names you type are yours. Rename a region and that name is shown exactly as you typed it, from then on — including a name that happens to match a section word. Name a region Intro on a Spanish song and it stays Intro. Only names the app wrote are translated, and only names the app wrote can be replaced by a section name. A mark of your own, such as "???", is never touched either.

Timeline marker labels are larger without increasing the strip height: section labels are 14 pt, with compact C1/C2 chorus labels and V1/V2 verse labels.

Section badges on the timeline do not change with the language: a chorus reads C1 whether it is labelled Chorus 1 or Coro 1. A badge is a position marker you read at a glance under lights, so it stays the same shape in every song.

Sections are matched across languages too — see Regions Without Lyrics in §5.9. The languages covered are English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, Italian, German and Dutch.

Chorus in French, German and Dutch. In those languages the everyday word for a chorus is Refrain / Refrein — but this app treats Refrain as its own kind of section, separate from a chorus. So a chorus is shown as Chorus in those three languages rather than as a word that would mean a different section. Verses, bridges, intros and outros translate normally.

5.14 Click & Cues Bus

The audio engine routes tracks to two separate buses:

Bus Tracks Purpose
Main (Fade) BusAll user-imported instrument/vocal tracksFront-of-house audio. Affected by song-level fade, crossfades, and vamp fade-out
Click & Cues BusClick track, cue track, section announcements, count-off audioIn-ear monitoring only. Not affected by song-level fades, crossfades, bus mutes or solo — the click answers to the C&C fader alone

Two moments are the exception, and in both the app is protecting you from hearing two different things at once:

Only one click at a time. If a song carries its own click track and the built-in metronome is also going to be heard, you would otherwise have two clicks in your ears at slightly different volumes. Vessa Rig turns the imported one down for you and lets the metronome own the beat. It is one-directional — the app never silences its own metronome to make room for yours — and it is not saved into the song: the stem's own fader and mute are untouched, so the moment the metronome stops being audible your click comes straight back.

It leaves your click alone whenever taking it away would leave you with less to follow than you had:

Situation What you hear
Metronome audible (mode Always or When Playing)The metronome. Your click stands down.
Metronome SilentYour click, with the metronome's visual pulse still flashing — the pairing many players want.
Metronome in standby, or muted at the deskYour click. Nothing is taken from you. In standby while the song plays, the visual pulse keeps flashing over your click.
The song has no tempo the app knowsYour click — it is sample-locked to the recording and the app will not replace it with a guess.
You muted or faded the stem yourselfLeft exactly as you set it.
Your click and cues are welded into one mono fileYour click — silencing it would take your spoken cues with it.
This device is following a rigYour click. A follower's own metronome is already off; taking the stem too would leave it with nothing.

A song whose tempo changes counts as having a tempo, and so does one whose tempo lives only in its beat map: on those the metronome follows the map, which makes it the more accurate reference of the two.

The Click & Cues bus has its own independent C&C fader in the mixer — and a C&C key on the Bus Rail beside the mix tiles — so performers can adjust their in-ear click level without affecting the house mix.

Click and cues are separate channels on it. A click file that arrives with the beat on one side and spoken cues on the other is split into a Click track and a Cues track when you import it (see Adding a Song), so each gets its own strip, fader and mute inside the bus — ride the click up in a loud song and leave the voice where it is, or mute the cues and keep the beat. The C&C fader still controls both together, and both are protected from song fades and vamp fade-outs in the same way.

A MONO pill beneath the C&C fader collapses stereo click/cues files to mono — useful when routing to a single in-ear. The MONO button is always visible regardless of channel count.

Key benefit: When you use Fade Tracks or crossfade between songs, the click track and voice cues remain at full volume in your in-ears while the audience hears the instruments fade to silence.


5.15 AUX & C&C Output Routing

On the console (§9.0), Tracks to audience is the TRACKS TO AUDIENCE key in SETUP's column (double-tap it), and SONG's status row says AUDIENCE OFF while the tracks are private.

MAIN 2 is your monitor feed: tracks, Vessa Keys and Vessa Pad remain audible there when you lower or mute MASTER. C&C has its own fader for click and spoken cues.

Audience and ears

The mixer places Tracks to audience beside the SONG / MASTER controls, in both the compact and Pro mixers. Double-tap to turn it off or on; a single tap never changes the audience feed.

What you want Control Audience hears MAIN 2 hears
Normal performanceTracks to audience on, MASTER unmutedTracks, Vessa Keys and Vessa PadTracks, Vessa Keys and Vessa Pad
Rehearse tracks privately while playing for the roomTracks to audience offVessa Keys and Vessa PadTracks, Vessa Keys and Vessa Pad
Keep all three privateMASTER muteNone of those sourcesTracks, Vessa Keys and Vessa Pad

When the tracks are private, the button turns amber and reads Tracks: ears only. Tap it again to send tracks to the audience. This choice survives song changes and app restarts; it does not alter saved mixes. A backup rig mirrors the host's choice when both run a version supporting it.

MASTER controls the audience level. MAIN 2 controls your ears. Ordinary SONG, track and instrument faders/mutes still affect both feeds. C&C keeps its separate routing and mute. Output EQ, compression and limiting retain their existing shared processing; these controls separate the feeds' levels and mutes.

Use separate physical outputs for the audience and your ears, or Split as described below. In ordinary stereo Main mode there is no separate monitor feed; the button instead says Tracks: audience off.

Signal Flow

Tracks → track/SONG level ─┬─► audience switch → MASTER → PA
                          └─► MAIN 2 → ears
V·KEYS / V·PAD → own level ─┬─► MASTER → PA
                          └─► MAIN 2 → ears
C&C → own level / route ────────────────────► click & cues output

Every music track is split (fan-out) so a copy goes to the AUX bus. MAIN 2 controls the music level in the monitors; C&C controls the click/cues level independently. Both channels connect directly to the main mixer but are panned/routed according to the output mode.

On screen, AUX is MAIN 2. The mixers and the Bus Rail label this output MAIN 2, and so does the rest of this section — AUX survives only in its title. Where the desk locks its fader (see Main mode below), the Bus Rail draws its name greyed and, where the key is tall enough, a lock and LOCKED — its mute still works.

Output Modes

The mixer adapts its controls based on the connected audio interface's channel count:

Stereo output (≤ 2 channels)

A SPLIT button toggles the global Cue Split mode. It sits on MAIN 2 — its card in the compact mixer, its strip on the console:

Mode Pill label Behaviour
MainSPLITDefault. C&C plays in the main mix alongside music. The MAIN 2 fader is locked (greyed out), since it would only double the front of house. Suitable for rehearsal / practice.
Cue SplitcontextualAudience tracks, Vessa Keys and Vessa Pad go right; C&C + MAIN 2 go left. Route right to the PA and left to your monitor feed. MASTER and Tracks to audience affect only the right side.

When Cue Split is active, the strips show the routing direction:

Strip Active label Meaning
C&C◀ after its name (compact mixer); ← SPLIT (console)Click & cues routed to the left channel
MAIN 2SPLIT ◀The music copy routed to the left channel
SONG, MASTER▶ after the name (compact mixer); → SPLIT on SONG (console)Main mix (FOH) routed to the right channel
Multi-channel output (> 2 channels)

When a multi-channel audio interface is connected (e.g. RME Fireface UCX II), the SPLIT buttons are replaced by per-bus output routing:

Per-Interface Memory

When you connect different audio interfaces (e.g. a 2-channel interface at rehearsal vs. an 8-channel interface at the gig), the app remembers the selected output pair for each interface by its unique hardware UID. Switching interfaces automatically recalls your preferred output pair and adapts the mixer strip controls.

Global Settings

The C&C level, MAIN 2 level, C&C mono, MAIN 2 mono, output mode, and Tracks to audience are global preferences (not per-song). They persist across songs and app restarts so your monitor mix stays consistent throughout a set. Tracks to audience starts on until you change it.


5.16 Performance Grid

The Performance Grid is what the Mixer Tiles module shows on the Go Live page: a touch-optimized tile grid in place of a channel-strip mixer, where everything the audience hears is visible at once, every target is large enough to hit without looking, and the primary workflow is snapshots + mute toggles — not fader manipulation.

Philosophy: The mix was done at soundcheck. Snapshots hold your presets. On stage you just need to know: what's playing, what's muted, and how to switch scenes fast.

Layout

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────────────┐
│ ┌─────────┐ ┌─────────┐ ┌─────────┐ ┌─────────┐      │ ┌──────────┐ │
│ │    ≡    │ │VOCALS   │ │Drums    │ │Bass     │      │ │    ›     │ │
│ │Acoustic │ │GROUP  3 │ │● MUTED  │ │● SOLO   │      │ └──────────┘ │
│ │         │ │──────  ▮│ │──────  ▮│ │──────  ▮│      │ ┌──────────┐ │
│ └─────────┘ └─────────┘ └─────────┘ └─────────┘      │ │C&C      ▮│ │
│ ┌─────────┐ ┌────┬────┐ ┌─────────┐                  │ ├──────────┤ │
│ │Keys     │ │ ♫  │ ♪  │ │Loops    │                  │ │SONG     ▮│ │
│ │         │ │    │    │ │         │                  │ ├──────────┤ │
│ │──────  ▮│ │   ▮│   ▮│ │──────  ▮│                  │ │MAIN 2   ▮│ │
│ └─────────┘ └────┴────┘ └─────────┘                  │ ├──────────┤ │
│                                                      │ │MASTER   ▮│ │
│                     TRACK GRID                       │ └──────────┘ │
│    (snapshot keys first, then one tile per bus)      │   BUS RAIL   │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┴──────────────┘

The grid sizes its tiles to fill the module: tiles stay close to square, between 56 and 90 pt wide, and the rows always reach the bottom of the module. Make the module very short and the tiles shrink rather than being cut off. When there are more than 20 tiles, the grid pages: ‹ and › buttons and a row of page dots sit under it. (They are buttons rather than a swipe, because a sideways swipe on a tile is its half-size gesture.)

Click, cues and the metronome have no tiles. They belong to the C&C key on the bus rail (and to the mixer), so the grid's space goes to what the audience hears.

Looks

The grid, its tiles and the bus rail are drawn in the Mixer Tiles module's finish — Stage, Dusk or Daylight, or Match page, which follows the page look. Choose it on the module's look card — in Layout Design, from ••• → Module looks, or with a two-finger hold on the module (see §5.0a). Every finish says the same things the same way: a tile is a neutral key, and a state is always a lamp and a word, never a coloured or faded tile.

Tile Anatomy

Each track tile is a rounded key showing:

Element Description
Track nameTop-left, 17 pt. A long name steps down to 15 pt, then — on a tile tall enough — splits onto two lines between words, then truncates. It never goes below 15 pt.
BadgesBefore the name, when they apply: a grid icon on the built-in vamp track, a small V or V∞ plate on a vamp participant or vamp-exclusive track, and the language badge on every Language Switch track (§5.13a).
State lineUnder the name: a lamp and a word — MUTED with a red lamp, SOLO with an amber lamp. A locked mute adds a padlock. Where the word doesn't fit, the lamp keeps a glyph beside it instead.
dB readoutAppears in the state line's place while you swipe the tile's level, and hands the row back about 1.4 s after your swipe ends. It shows +2.0 dB, +2.0 or +2 as the tile's width allows. A level that moves for another reason (a snapshot recall, a ramp, a solo) moves the level line without showing the number.
Level lineA thin neutral line along the tile's foot: where the fader sits (−60 dB at the left, +6 dB at the right).
MeterA thin vertical bar down the tile's right edge showing the track's live level. At the limiter's threshold its peak tick changes to the key's text colour.
Category glyphA quiet watermark in the bottom-right corner — the glyph of the track's bus — so Drums, Loops and Bass read differently at a glance.

On a very short module the tiles get less room: below 56 pt the state shows as just its lamp and glyph, and the dB takes the name's place while you swipe; below 48 pt the meter and level line are hidden.

Tile States

State How it reads
Active (playing)The plain key: name, level line and meter.
MutedRed lamp and MUTED. The meter reads nothing.
Locked (Muted)Red lamp, padlock and MUTED. The meter and the watermark are hidden.
SoloedAn amber ring inside the tile's edge, an amber lamp and SOLO.
Language not singingOn a Language Switch track whose language is not the one singing, the name is greyed. The Language Switch owns that stem, so taps and level swipes on it do nothing. The language that is singing wears a thin ring in the key's own ink.

Locked = Muted: A locked tile is a hard-muted channel. The fader is at −∞, the channel is marked as muted in all mixer views, and the tile shows MUTED with a padlock. A channel you muted in the mixer shows the same way. Locked channels are immune to snapshot recalls — they stay muted until you unlock them.

Tile Gestures

Gesture Action Haptic
TapIf soloed → clear that tile’s Solo (the last one restores the working mix with the usual staggered fade-in). If locked → unlock. If active → soft-mute (fades down). If muted → unmute (fades back up).Medium impact
Double-tapToggle Solo. Muted and hard-muted channel tiles cannot enter Solo, including while a mute is fading down. Unmute first.Rigid impact
Long-press (0.5 s)Toggle hard-lock (mute and lock at −∞, immune to snapshots)Warning notification
Swipe up+2 dB. The tile shows its pressed face for a moment and the dB appears.Light impact
Swipe down−2 dBLight impact
Swipe leftMake this bus's tile half size (see Half-Size Tiles)Light impact
Swipe right (on a half tile)Back to full sizeLight impact

Single-tap unlock: In live performance, you need to bring a channel back fast. A single tap on a locked tile unlocks it and raises the fader — no need to long-press. Long-press is only used for locking (silencing).

Individual channel tiles show the same red MUTED / green ON notice as grouped tiles. A language-gated tile does not announce a change when its tap does nothing. The persistent SOLO / CLEAR notice remains at the transport; while it is visible, the transport keeps its full width.

Tile Colors

Colour on the grid is kept for state: red for a mute, amber for a solo. The tiles themselves are neutral keys in the module's finish.

With the Vivid tile style, each tile also carries its track's colour as a thin edge along the top. The colour comes from the track's color group — Rhythm, Instruments, Vocals, Utility or Other — as set in the Theme window (§6d), so changing a group's colour there changes every matching tile. On the Live page each colour is drawn as a softened stage hue, so a track never wears the red or amber that the page keeps for a mute and a solo. A group tile wears its bus's colour the same way.

Tile Style

Tile style is in Settings → General → Tiles. It is independent of the Compact Mixer style setting beside it.

Style Look
Vivid (default)The neutral key with the track's colour as an edge along the top. An open group's bracket and its members' dots are in the bus's colour.
MinimalThe neutral key alone — no colour edge. An open group's bracket and dots are in the key's own ink.

The states read the same in both: MUTED in red, SOLO in amber, the padlock on a locked tile.

Independent from the Compact Mixer style: You can use any combination — Vivid mixer + Minimal tiles, Minimal mixer + Vivid tiles, or both Minimal.

Snapshot Tiles

Your mixer snapshots lead the grid as keys: a mixer icon over the snapshot's name. Tap one to recall it. The snapshot you last recalled is lit, with a white lamp, and reads Reset Mix — tap it to return to your saved mix. Long-press a snapshot key for Overwrite with Current Mix, Rename and Delete. See §5.12 Mixer Snapshots.

Tile Groups

A group tile is a bus. Every bus that has two or more of the song's tracks on it shows as one group tile, named after the bus in capitals — ELECTRIC GUITARS, VOCALS. A bus with a single track shows that track's own tile.

Gesture on a group tile Action
TapMute or unmute every member at once. A note at the bottom of the grid confirms it — MUTED in red, ON in green.
Swipe up / downRide the whole group ±2 dB: every member's own fader moves together, keeping their balance. (The mixer has no group fader. There, the bus fader sets the group's level after its members — see §9.4a.)
Swipe left / rightHalf size / back to full size
Long-pressThe group's menu: Expand / Collapse, the bus picker (Bus N · Name — route every member to another bus, or No Bus), the bus's freeze options, Hide Group, and Ungroup

Group Tile Anatomy

The group tile follows the same layout as a track tile:

Element Position Description
NameTop rowThe bus name in capitals.
GROUP + countAbove the level lineGROUP and the number of member tracks; on a narrow tile, the group icon and the count. A muted group shows a red lamp and MUTED here instead, and while the group's level moves, its dB takes this place.
Level lineFootThe group's level, as a thin neutral line.
MeterRight edgeThe loudest member's live level.
Colour edgeTop edgeVivid only: the bus's colour.
BracketLeft edgeOnly while the group is expanded: a stripe that ties the header to the member tiles after it.

Group Membership Banner

When a group is expanded, its members appear as their own tiles right after the group tile, each tied back to its group:

Half-Size Tiles

Swipe left on a tile to make it half size; swipe right on a half tile to restore it. Two half tiles next to each other share one grid cell, doubling density for buses that need less visual weight.

Hidden Tiles

A bus can be taken off the grid without silencing it — the channels keep playing.

Tile Order

Tiles follow the same left-to-right order as the mixers: the global Order preset (see §6d Order). A stem therefore sits in the same place on the grid, in the Standard Dock Mixer and in the Pro Mixer — and in every song.

There is no edit mode on the grid. Grouping comes from the buses, half size and hiding are bus settings, and order comes from the Order preset — so there is nothing left to arrange tile by tile.

Bus Rail

The Bus Rail is a slim vertical column on the right edge of the grid. From the top: a chevron key that folds or unfolds the rail, then the bus keys C&C → SONG → MAIN 2 → MASTER.

SONG appears only when the Song Vol module is not on the page. With the Song Vol module showing, the rail drops its SONG key and the other three take the room, so there are never two live controls for one level.

Each bus is a neutral key, the same as a tile:

Element Position Description
NameLeftThe bus's full name — C&C, SONG, MAIN 2, MASTER
Level lineFootWhere the bus's level is set, as a thin neutral line. Empty while muted.
MeterRight edgeThe bus's live level as it plays.
dB readoutUnder the name (or in its place on a short key)Appears only while the level moves, then hides — e.g. +2, -6, 0, -∞.
MUTEDName row and under itA red lamp beside the name, the name in red, and MUTED under it where the key is tall enough.
Bus Description
C&CClick & Cues bus
SONGSong fader (main mix level)
MAIN 2A second mix of the music on its own fader, usually for the band's monitors (§5.15)
MASTERMaster output

MAIN 2 can be locked. On a two-output interface in Main mode, MAIN 2 would double the front of house, so its level is locked: its name is greyed and, where the key is tall enough, it says LOCKED with a padlock. Its mute still works.

Note: MONO, SPLIT, and output routing controls are available in the Pro Mixer (§4.9) and the Standard Dock Mixer (§9.12), not in the Bus Rail. The Bus Rail is intentionally simplified for live performance — just level and mute.

Bus gestures:

Gesture Action
Double-tapMute or unmute the bus, including MASTER. The first tap rings the key in amber; the second confirms within 0.4 seconds. A single tap never changes the sound.
Flick right / left+2 dB / −2 dB
Flick up / down+1 dB / −1 dB — a fine adjustment
Long-pressA menu with Reset to 0 dB

Open vs. folded:

The rail remembers whether it was open or folded.


5.17 Floating Mixer Panel

The Mixer panel is an on-demand floating card that puts the full Standard Mixer over the cockpit — channel-strip pillars, the 2×2 bus band, and the Save Mix + snapshot row — without leaving your performance layout.

Opening the Mixer

From How
Controls moduleTap the Mixer key (the sliders icon) in the Controls module. The key wears a selection ring while the panel is open; tap it again to close.
••• puckTap ••• → Mixer — the backup entry, listed only while the Controls module is hidden from your layout and Mixer is on in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS.

Opening the Mixer closes any other panel that isn't pinned. Turn Mixer off in PANELS (Layout Design) and both ways in go, on every layout of this device.

What the Card Contains

Top to bottom:

  1. Header — the CHANNELS / OUTPUTS switch, the pin button, and the ✕ close button.
  2. MIX + snapshots row — PRO (opens the Pro Mixer), DYN (lit inside a ring while the master dynamics are showing; they then take the bus band's place, on a dark screen set into the card), MIX (tap for Save Mix, Recall Saved Mix, or Set Faders to 0 dB; see Save Mix), your snapshots (the one you recalled is held inside a ring and reads Reset), and + to capture a new one (see §5.12 Mixer Snapshots). Every key is a key of the page's look.
  3. 2×2 bus band — C&C · MAIN 2 on the top row, SONG · MASTER below; hold and drag across a bus’s dark well to set its level, or flick right/left or up/down for a single ±1 dB step. Double-tap the well to reset to 0 dB (see §9.12).
  4. Strips — whichever half the switch is showing: a pillar for every track, or all sixteen outputs.

CHANNELS and OUTPUTS

The mixer shows one half of the desk at a time, and the switch is the panel's title, at the left of its header.

Half What you get
CHANNELSA strip for every track in the loaded song
OUTPUTSAll sixteen outputs — the buses your tracks are routed to

The 2×2 band (C&C · MAIN 2 · SONG · MASTER) and the mute groups stay put in both halves. They belong to the desk rather than to either side of it, so they never move under your finger.

Your choice is remembered, and it is shared with the Pro Mixer — set it in one and the other opens the same way.

Outputs You Are Not Using

All sixteen outputs are always present, whether the loaded song uses them or not. An output no track is routed to collapses to a narrow spine showing its number and name, so you can see it exists without it taking a strip's worth of room.

A collapsed output keeps only its number, its name and its mute dot. It has no fader, meter, SOLO or long-press menu, because there is nothing on it to ride or to isolate.

Muting an empty output is deliberate and useful: mute Drums before the song with drum stems comes up, and it is already right when it arrives.

A muted output stays muted. An output's mute survives changing songs and restarting the app, alongside its level, name and routing. That is the point: if a live drummer is playing tonight you mute the drum output once, and it is still muted when the set resumes — including after a relaunch. A SOLO is the opposite: it clears itself the moment no loaded track is on that output, so a solo you forgot cannot silence the next song.

Output 16 is the Sync / Failover output. It always shows as a locked SYNC spine — no fader and no mute — and it cannot be chosen as a destination for a track. What it carries (Off, Failover tone or SMPTE timecode) and which physical output it goes to are set in Settings → Hardware → Sync Signal (§11).

Moving, Resizing, Pinning

Gesture Action
Drag the headerMove the card anywhere over the cockpit
Drag a left/right edge grabberAlso moves the card — the short bars at the middle of the card's left and right edges
Drag a corner handle (top-left or bottom-right)Resize the card
Tap the pinPinned — a filled pin inside a lit ring — keeps the panel open alongside other panels, whatever else you open. Unpinned — how the panel starts — it closes when another panel opens, or by its ✕ or the Mixer key; a tap outside the card never closes it.
Tap ✕Close the panel (the Mixer key and ••• → Mixer also close it)

The strips scroll far enough for the last one to clear the resize grip in the corner.

No grab handle along the top. Near the top of the screen, iOS takes a drag that starts there and shrinks the whole app — so the card has no top grabber. Move it by its header or by the side grabbers.

Docking a Panel

Every floating panel — Mixer, Microphones, Projection and the Library — docks. While you drag or resize one, an edge that comes within a short distance of a module's edge (a module on its own card, or the Lyrics' screen) or of the screen's edge snaps to it, at the same small gap modules keep from each other, and edges line up with a neighbour's matching edge. The same pink guide line as Layout Design shows where it will snap. Keep dragging past the snap and it lets go — you can still place a panel anywhere.

A docked panel takes the shape of the arrangement: the corners that sit against a module go square, the ones against the screen's edge take a module's corner, and the free ones stay round. The shadow is dropped along the docked stretch only. Docking is remembered with the panel's position, so it is still docked after a relaunch.

A panel goes back to where you put it when the window grows again. In a smaller window (Stage Manager, Split View, or a second window of the app) a panel is pushed inside the window rather than squeezed, and only your own drag or resize changes where it lives, so widening the window returns it exactly. Each window keeps its own panels where you put them.

Shrinking the Card for Longer Faders

Drag the card shorter and it gives up furniture — and every point it gives up becomes fader throw. The order is what a performer misses least:

As the card gets shorter What goes Why it can go
FirstSave Mix + snapshotsYou don't author a mix mid-set
ThenC&C · MAIN 2Routing furniture — MONO/SPLIT and output pairs are setup, not show
LastSONG · MASTERThe two you actually ride, so they stay longest and return first

At its smallest the card is its top bar and a row of strips, and every point the bands gave up has gone into fader throw. Pull it back down and each band returns in reverse order; nothing is lost or reset.

The top bar never goes. CHANNELS/OUTPUTS, the pin and ✕ all stay at every size. Removing them would free almost nothing — the bar is a fixed height — while costing you the only way to switch halves and the pin that keeps a parked card from closing when another panel opens.

Saving a mix needs the card taller. Save and the + capture button are the only way to write a mix or create a snapshot from the Live screen, so when they've shed, pull the card down to reach them. Recalling a saved snapshot is unaffected.

Short strips hide a mic's setup chips. When the strips are short, a microphone strip hides its input (FROM) and output chips, so its fader keeps its travel and its MUTED word has room; V·PAD and V·KEYS hide their output chip only on the shortest strips. To choose a mic's input, make the card taller or use the Pro Mixer (§9.4b); its output is also in the strip's long-press menu on a multi-channel interface.

The card remembers its position, size, and pin state, and reopens exactly where you left it. Position and size are kept separately for each orientation — and, on a full-size iPad, for each layout preset — so a card parked for one layout doesn't land on top of another.

iPhone: the same floating card, with the same header, side grabbers, corner resize, and pin — it just opens sized to the smaller screen, and the floating pucks are hidden while it's open, so they never sit over the card's controls.

Editor hand-off: opening the Song Editor closes the panel automatically — the editor has its own mixer beside the lyrics (§4.9).


5.18 Clip Launcher

The Clip Launcher is the Clips module on the Go Live page: a grid of pads you can fire instantly without touching the song timeline. Clips are short one-shots or loops — FX hits, stingers, pad beds, backing vocals, atmospheres.

Each clip is a standalone audio file. Clips do not move the playhead, do not affect regions, and do not interrupt the song. They run on their own player and mix into the Clips mixer channel so you can ride their level just like any other track.

The pads are drawn in the module's finish — Stage, Dusk, Daylight or Match page — chosen on its look card (§5.0a). A pad is lit in its clip's own colour in every finish.

The Module Header

Key What it does
■ STOPStops every clip at once. This compact key replaces CLIPS at the left of the header while a clip is playing or waiting to start. Crimson in Stage and Dusk; pale rose with red lettering in Daylight.
+Adds clips. Shown once the module has at least one clip.

An empty module shows No clips yet with a big + key in the middle.

Adding a Clip

Tap +. Pick one or more audio files — each becomes its own pad, as a one-shot that starts on the next bar. New pads take the palette's colours in turn, carrying on from the last coloured pad the module already shows (global clips included): red, orange, yellow, green, teal, blue, indigo, purple, pink, brown. Pads you already have keep their colours. The file is copied into the song's own folder so it travels with the song.

Clips are stored with a song: with no song open, the module tells you to open a song first.

Reading a Pad

Pad What it means
At restA neutral key with the clip's colour as a tab along its top, the clip's name, a row of glyphs, and a thin volume line along the foot.
WaitingAn amber ring inside the edge, a blinking amber lamp and NEXT — the clip starts on the next bar. Tap again to cancel.
PlayingThe pad lights up in the clip's colour (a lighter shade of it, so the name stays readable), the name turns heavy, and a ■ stop square appears at the right end of the glyph row — a tap stops it.

The glyph row says how the clip behaves, in every state:

Glyph Meaning
⟲Loop — repeats until you stop it
▶One-shot — plays once
⚡Starts immediately, without waiting for the bar
DrumVAMP exclusive — plays only with a vamp (see Clip Edit Sheet)

Names are 17 pt, on two lines when the pad is tall enough, and are never shrunk to fit. A name has the pad's full width in every state and breaks only between words; a name too long for the pad is set in a narrower face, and only then ends in …. On a narrow pad, ⚡ and the drum give way first, then the mode glyph; NEXT stays.

Playing a Clip

Clips that need loading prepare their audio in the background. Tap the pad again while it is preparing to cancel that launch. Launch timing is applied once the audio is ready; already-loaded clips keep their usual timing. Bar quantization follows the song’s current playback speed. A tap too close to the bar line waits for the next legal bar, so the clip can be scheduled in time.

Gesture What it does
TapLaunch (or stop) the clip. Loop clips keep running until you tap again; one-shot clips play through once.
Drag sideways along the pad's footSet the clip's volume. The volume line follows your finger from where it was, you hear each step as you drag, and the level is saved when you lift.
Long-pressOpen the clip's menu (see below).

Clip Context Menu

Option What it does
Switch to One-Shot / Switch to LoopOne-tap mode flip without opening the edit sheet.
Launch Immediately / Launch on BarOne-tap launch-timing flip.
Edit Clip…Opens the full Edit Clip sheet.
Delete ClipRemoves the clip and its audio file. For a global clip this removes it from every song at once.

Global Clips

A global clip is a clip that automatically appears in every song. Turn on Persist across songs in the clip's Edit Clip sheet when you have staples that belong everywhere — a count-in, a reverse cymbal, a pad wash, an "amen" hit.

Key behaviours:

Clip Edit Sheet

Opened with Edit Clip… from the clip's menu. The sheet is titled Edit Clip; Done saves your changes and Cancel closes it. Fields:

Field Purpose
NameThe name on the pad.
VolumePer-clip level, shown as a percentage, on top of the shared Clips channel fader. You hear it as you move the slider.
Playback modeLoop (repeats until you stop it) or One-Shot (plays once).
Clip tempoTempo-free (on for a new clip) or a BPM. Tempo-free clips — pads, washes, one-shots — can vamp under any song. A clip with a BPM only appears in a song's Vamp Settings when the tempo matches: exactly, or at half or double time.
Launch timingBar — starts on the next bar downbeat, synced to the transport — or Immediate.
Tile colourThe pad's colour, from a palette of ten.
BehaviourVAMP exclusive — the clip auto-plays only during a vamp and stays silent otherwise; use it for fills, percussion loops, or ad-lib beds you want ready while holding a section. Persist across songs — makes the clip global (see above).
RemoveDelete Clip — same as the menu's Delete.

5.19 Vessa Pad

Vessa Pad is the drone/pad instrument — the Pad module on the Go Live page. Tap a key and it holds that pad for as long as you need — under spoken word, between songs, or to give the room a key to land in before a song starts.

The pad belongs to the app, not a module or layout. Hiding the Pad module does not stop it. Song selection and transport follow the timing choice below.

The same pad is reachable from inside Vessa Keys with the V·PAD button (§10a), which shows this same instrument drawn on the Vessa Keys faceplate as one row, and appears in the mixer as the V·PAD strip. All three are one pad.

The instrument face

The module is drawn as an instrument: a faceplate with three plates on it — the power key, display and FOLLOW; the two tone knobs; and the keyboard. It follows the module's finish (Stage, Dusk, Daylight or Match page) and wears Walnut cheeks at each end unless you choose None on the module's Trim row. Both are on the module's look card (§5.0a).

The face rearranges itself to fit the module:

A module made smaller than the face can fit is cut off rather than shrunk, so nothing ever drops below a readable size.

Power, display and FOLLOW

Control Purpose
PowerTurns the pad on and off; its lens is lit while the pad is on. Turning it off fades out rather than cutting; turning it on plays the ringed key, so you can arm a key and bring it in on a downbeat with one press.
DisplayShows the key, the sound and the level. See below.
FOLLOWFollows the harmony and playing of your selected keyboard. Its lamp shows when Follow is armed. Press and hold to choose listening inputs.

The display, left to right:

Part What it shows
KeyIn large dot-matrix letters: the active pad key, lit; otherwise the key the pad is pointed at, as a faint ghost; — when there is none. Check the quick status while a sound is preparing or waiting to start.
◀ sound ▶The current sound — Tonic, Major or Minor. Tap ◀ or ▶ to step through them (they wrap round). Tap the name to open the Pad Sound sheet.
LevelFour segments under the sound's name while the pad is on; OFF in their place while it is off.

Drag sideways across the display to set the pad's level — the level follows your finger across the glass. The drag only starts once your finger has moved sideways a little, so a tap on the name or an arrow never nudges your level.

Choosing a sound while a key is sounding re-voices that key at once; choosing one while the pad is silent remembers it for the next key.

The keyboard

Twelve keys in two tiers, like a piano laid flat: the seven naturals along the front, and the five flats — D♭ E♭ G♭ A♭ B♭ — on a tier of their own behind them, each over the gap between its two neighbours, so no key hides another.

Tap a key to start that pad; tap the lit key again to stop it — the pad stays on, ready. Tapping a different key changes key without stopping — the two crossfade. If the pad is off, tapping a key turns it on in that key.

A key shows one of two states, and they mean different things:

What it means
Lit — its face lit, a bar of light along its front edge and a glow on the plate around itThe active pad key. Its sound may still be preparing or waiting for the song to start; the quick status tells you which.
Ringed — a ring inside its edgeThis key is armed but silent — where the pad is pointed.

Loading a song points the pad at that song's key. Manual and With playback stage it silently; When selected brings it in. Tap a key or turn Power on for a manual start. If Power is already on but the pad is stopped, tap the ringed key or use Play Pad.

Stopping a pad leaves its key ringed, so one more tap brings it straight back.

Choosing when the pad plays

Starting defaults: a new song uses Manual, and every song in a new setlist follows its song default. Nothing starts automatically until you choose otherwise. Your later choices are saved; copying or importing a song or setlist preserves its saved pad settings.

One menu controls the song's pad timing:

Choice Starts At song Stop / pause / end
ManualTap a key, turn Power on, or use Play PadA manually started pad keeps playing
With playbackWhen the song starts, after any count-inThe automatic pad fades out
When selectedWhen you deliberately choose the songKeeps playing

A cold launch, browsing without choosing a song, or preloading a standby song never starts the pad. Opening the app restores the choice, silently. An automatic start powers the pad as needed; there is no second power switch you must remember to arm.

The window is headed Pad for [song], with two cards:

There is no separate “Use song default” choice. Older saved choices that match the default are treated as matching, and redundant overrides are cleared when you edit timing. Without a current setlist, only the song-default card appears. Highlighted rows and checkmarks show the selected timing. Choices save immediately and the window stays open; tap Done or outside to close it. Its dark, high-contrast surface stays readable in Daylight too. Changing timing does not play a note immediately.

Play Pad / Stop Pad acts now, without rewriting the saved timing. A pad started manually remains independent of song Stop. The next automatic playback start can take over under With playback. The status reads Preparing…, Waiting for Play, Starting…, Playing · key, Stopped, or Pad unavailable, separately from the saved mode. A cold sound may need time to load before it fades in. With playback never brings it in before the song.

Selecting a different song releases the outgoing pad unless the incoming song uses When selected, which brings in its key. Old Start with this song choices keep their selection-time meaning as When selected.

Integrated or compact controls

By default the quick timing menu and status sit inside the Pad module; its existing Power/key controls play and stop the pad. To put the controls beside Transport or elsewhere, show Pad Controls in Layout Design's module list. It contains the same timing menu and status plus Play Pad / Stop Pad, and can be moved and resized like other modules.

For controls built into the transport, open Layout Design → Modules → Pad controls in Transport. On iPad they share the bottom row with the song’s Play key; on a phone they get a row below it. This choice saves with the current layout (and separately in each compact-window orientation). Existing layouts leave it off.

The top row separates Manual / With Play / On select ▾ (pad timing) from a small key display using the pad's LCD lettering. It shows the sounding key brightly, or the selected key more softly when silent; — means no key is selected. Tap the display to open the full Vessa Pad keyboard, sound, level, Follow, brightness and shimmer controls when the Pad module is hidden. Pin beside × keeps this floating panel open while you change songs or use other controls. Drag its title to move it; × always closes it. Unpinned, tapping outside or changing songs closes it. Pinning holds only the window: the pad still follows its usual song and playback settings. If the Pad module is already visible, the display briefly outlines that module instead. The separate Pad Controls module has the same shortcut.

Only one quick control surface is shown: Transport takes priority, then the separate Pad Controls module, then the Pad module's integrated row. Turning Transport placement off restores the separate module at its saved position if it was visible before; otherwise the row returns to the Pad module. Showing Pad Controls in the module list also turns Transport placement off. If Transport is hidden, the other controls remain available.

A narrow Pad Controls module stacks three full-width controls: timing at the top, the LCD key display in the middle, and Play Pad / Stop Pad at the bottom. The timing name no longer squeezes beside the display. Larger modules also show the status. The small module adapts to its shape: a wide, short module puts the pad Play/Stop key beside the timing and status; a tall module stacks them. The compact labels With Play, On select, and Ready mean With playback, When selected, and Waiting for Play. No layout or placement change starts, stops or reconnects audio, or changes the saved timing.

Tone — BRT and SHM

Two knobs beside the display (or under it, on a narrower module):

Knob What it does
BRT (Brightness)Closes a filter over the whole pad, shimmer included. Turned all the way up, the filter is fully open.
SHM (Shimmer)Blends in the shimmer layer — an airy octave-up wash sitting above the pad.

Drag up or down on a knob to turn it: up raises, down lowers, starting from wherever the knob is — it never jumps to where your finger lands. The knobs turn only while the pad is on; while it is off their arcs are grey but still show where they are set.

Pad Sound sheet

Tap the sound's name on the pad's display. The sheet opens with everything visible — no scrolling — and Close at the top.

Preset What it plays
TonicThe single note on its own. No third, so it sits under major, minor and suspended chords alike — the safe choice when a song's harmony moves around.
MajorA major triad.
MinorA minor triad.

Under the presets, Level is the pad's own level, with its readout in dB — the same level a sideways drag across the display sets.

The same sheet holds two time controls, and they are deliberately separate — starting a pad and swapping one key for another are different musical moves.

Control Range What it times
Fade0.1–8 sA pad easing in and out, including Follow’s companion note.
Key Change Crossfade0.5–12 sTwo keys handing over during a manual key change or a Follow move.

A long Key Change Crossfade — the full 12 seconds — is what you want for drifting between slow songs. Fade stays free for a quick start when you need one.

The shimmer deliberately trails the pad — it blooms in a little slower and takes noticeably longer to decay, so it behaves like a reverb tail rather than a second pad switching on and off with the first.

The sheet carries the same Manual / With playback / When selected menu as the quick controls, with song-default and setlist-only choices. The help text explains each choice.

Marking songs in the setlist

Songs using With playback or When selected show a small filled dot in the Setlist module — on the cover's corner in Cards, at the head of the info line in Titles, in the art's top corner in Covers — and on the song's row in the Library window's Setlists tab. One glance down a set tells you which ones bring a pad in by themselves. The dot reports the effective timing choice for that set, not whether the pad is currently sounding; it does not edit anything.

Songs without a dot behave normally: they arm their key and wait. Only the exception is marked, which is why the dot means something.

The dot is an indicator, not a button — a single tap on a song loads it, so nothing small enough to sit on a tile is safe to make tappable.

Changing key

Two keys crossfade over the Key Change Crossfade time, and how they overlap inside it depends on the interval between them. A move by a fourth or fifth is allowed to bloom, because two consonant keys briefly together sound like a chord change. A clashing move — a semitone, or a tritone such as A to E♭ — gets the old key out of the way quickly and brings the new one in more gradually, so it arrives gently instead of colliding.

What each song remembers

Manual sound, level, brightness and shimmer adjustments save to the loaded song. Follow’s temporary choices do not overwrite those settings. Load the song again and those settings come back, easing in rather than jumping.

Pad timing saves separately, as the Song default or an override for the current setlist. A different setlist choice takes priority; select the mode marked (song default) to follow the song again.

The key is not one of them — it always comes from the song itself. Tapping a key plays it now; it does not redefine what that song is in. So a song in G always brings up G, however much you played around during the last one.

A song with no pad settings of its own falls back to its key: a song in C minor stages the Minor preset in C, a song in E major stages Major in E. If the song's key is unknown, it falls back to Tonic, which cannot clash with anything.

The pad follows the key you are playing in, so transposing a song moves the pad with it.

FOLLOW

Tap FOLLOW beside the display to accompany a keyboard. The first time, choose the MIDI input and channel to listen to, or the on-screen keyboard. Press and hold Follow to change those choices later. Double-tapping the small LCD in Pad Controls or Transport also toggles Follow; one tap still opens Vessa Pad.

Start the pad normally. Follow does not start a stopped pad or the song. The selected key supplies the baseline without waiting for a complete chord; its sound prepares and fades in normally. Song key, section modulation and timed chart chords add context; the live keyboard takes priority. Open fifths such as G–D–G are useful input too. It works before Play, with only a click, or while freely playing without tracks. The listening-input choices are shared with Arranger.

Vessa Pad holds the music together. It keeps a compatible note across chord changes and through keyboard silence, rather than following every new root. A needed change waits for settled harmony; expressive movement waits longer and responds to sustained playing strength. For example, in G, a D drone can connect G, D, E minor and B minor. The recordings’ actual pitch height matters too: Vessa Pad’s G is lower than its D, so stronger sustained playing can earn that higher D without adding a new note on every chord.

A Major or Minor recording contains a whole triad. Follow checks that whole sound; when no compatible triad fits, it can temporarily use a Tonic recording to keep the drone sounding. This does not overwrite your saved preset. Turning Follow off restores the manual selection.

The optional second note needs no separate switch. Arming Follow makes it available automatically; it is not guaranteed on every chord. Sustained, confident playing with at least two distinct pitches can add a quieter companion. That companion always uses the single-note Tonic sound, whether the main sound is Tonic, Major or Minor. “Tonic” here names the recording type: the companion may be a useful played chord tone, not necessarily the song’s root. Softer, sparse or busy playing lets the companion fade away. Both sounding roots appear in the LCD. Vessa Pad never exceeds two roots, including release tails; the companion releases before another main root enters.

Follow uses your Fade and Key Change Crossfade settings, including long changes such as a 3-second fade and 4.5-second crossfade. Shimmer keeps its longer bloom and tail. A new target can wait for an existing tail to finish instead of cutting it short. Lifting your hands or playing uncertain harmony does not stop the main drone. Stop Pad, power off, loss of its listening connection and the pad’s song/playback timing still govern when it stops.

Brightness and shimmer develop gently around your settings. Turning either knob takes control of that parameter until you rearm Follow. Tapping one of the pad's keys exits Follow and honors your key immediately. Pad volume remains yours. Play Pad / Stop Pad keeps its ordinary immediate action.

Vessa Pad’s former Lock has been removed. Manual edits keep the normal song-saving behavior; automatic Follow changes are temporary.


5.20 SEGUE — Live Song Transition

SEGUE is the live song-to-song transition system. It lets you arm a jump into a different song while the current song is still playing, so the switch feels immediate and deliberate on stage.

How it works

  1. Arm — Tap any song in the Setlist module while a song is playing. That song shows NEXT with a blinking amber lamp — this is Song B — and the Regions module's header shows it too: an amber lamp, NEXT, and Song B's title, key and tempo. A tap on a song in the Library window's Setlists tab arms it the same way; there the row turns orange with a ⇄ in its number badge.
  2. Pick where to land — The SEGUE picker takes the place of the Regions module's chip row (see below). Tap a section of Song B to choose where the transition lands.
  3. Trigger — The SEGUE fires at the configured transition point, jumping into Song B at the chosen section.
  4. Cancel — Tap the armed song again to disarm and cancel the SEGUE.
  5. Retarget — Tap a different song while one is already armed to switch Song B without cancelling.

The SEGUE picker — one inline row

The picker is a single row in the Regions module, the same height as the chip row it replaces, so opening it never moves anything. It reads left-to-right, the way the transition itself flows:

The chips are drawn in the Regions module's chip style — Dot, Stripe or Tab — exactly like the chip row.

Only reachable sections appear — a section is reachable if it sits far enough into Song B to leave room for the pre-roll run-up. If a song's sections all start too early to transition into, the picker says so in place of the chips; if no song in the setlist has regions, it tells you that instead.

Each Song B chip is labeled with the region's title — the name you gave it in the editor (e.g. "I Will Worship"), or, for a region you never named, its section in the song's language (Coro 1). Rename a region and its chip updates to match.

Choosing the feel — Relaxed vs Brave

How you tap a Song B chip chooses the feel of the switch:

The armed-target badge — NEXT · VAMP · CLICK

Once a target is armed, that chip shows it the way a queued region does: an amber ring, an amber lamp, and a word telling you how it will transition:

Badge How it transitions Armed by
NEXTNormal segue — the audience hears Song B arrive as it lands.Tapping a Song B chip (Relaxed or Brave).
VAMPLands in an audible groove vamp loop at Song B's tempo — the crowd hears the loop while you hold the moment.The VAMP action key.
CLICKSilent, click-only vamp — the band hears the metronome at Song B's tempo, the audience hears nothing.The FADE action key (it reads FADE OUT while a song plays).

While a SEGUE is armed, the FADE and VAMP keys on the transport wear an amber ring and read → FADE OUT and → VAMP — either can land it. The one you choose reads SEGUE·FADE or SEGUE·VAMP with a blinking amber lamp until the transition happens.

The Vamp landing — entering and canceling

When you VAMP (or FADE) into Song B, the transport holds a vamp at Song B's tempo. The app auto-cues the first section the crowd would actually sing — skipping any title, count-in, or instrumental intro — and that region chip wears the CUE marker so you can see where you'll land.

From the held vamp you have three moves:

When VAMP isn't available

A VAMP landing needs something for the crowd to hear. If Song B has no vamp source ticked in its Vamp Settings — neither the Built-in Vamp nor a clip under Clips — the VAMP key is drawn disabled with a no-entry sign, because a VAMP would be silent for the audience. Song B's Vamp Bed on its own does not count here. Use the FADE key instead (a musicians-only click at Song B's tempo), or tick the Built-in Vamp or a clip in Song B's Vamp Settings. If you tap the disabled VAMP anyway, the app performs a silent FADE and tells you why.

One interaction model

There is no separate SEGUE button or banner. A tap on a song while one is playing — in the Setlist module or in the Library window's song list — is the single entry point: arm, retarget, and cancel all flow through the same gesture.


5.21 Stage Flow

On a Character or Vintage page, the show clock and the played count stand on the set list's plain card (the clock's slot in Cards and Titles, its divider in Covers), never on the leather or its wear.

Stage Flow is a performance-focus mode for a setlist. As the show goes on it marks the songs you have played, so your attention stays on what is still to come — without deleting or reordering anything.

Turn it on per setlist with the Stage flow switch in the Edit Setlist sheet. Under it, Mark as played chooses when a song counts as played (see Mark as played below, and §5.1c Edit Setlist Settings).

In the Setlist module

The module shares the Library’s show clock and played history. When a song is marked played, the clock takes its card or cover slot and keeps that song’s transition button accessible. Earlier played songs tuck away, leaving upcoming songs in view. 2 Songs ✓ below the timer means two songs played; the Library spells this out as 2 Songs Played. Tap that count (or swipe down on the divider) to reveal history; swipe up to hide it. Double-tap the divider to reset the show in both places.

The module always displays songs in forward order; Reverse order applies only to the Library. In Cards and Titles, the clock occupies one grid cell, so it takes no extra row. Covers place it in the same horizontal row as the songs. Tap the played count to reveal all played songs before the timer, keeping their original relative order. Played cards and covers are dimmed, while their transition buttons remain fully visible. Revealed played songs keep these marks:

Style A played song shows
Cards and TitlesA ✓ at the head of the card's info line and a quieter title. In the Dusk and Light finishes the card itself also sinks a step.
CoversA ✓ tag on the art and a quieter title plate. The art dims with the title plate.

The song that is loaded (NOW) and the song lined up for a SEGUE (NEXT) always show as such, even if they were played earlier in the show.

In the Library window

When the setlist with Stage flow on is the one loaded, its song list in the Library window's Setlists tab (§3.8) becomes a running show view:

Setlist direction Where the played songs sit
Normal orderAbove the divider
Reverse orderBelow the divider

The timer shows the count once at least one song is marked played, for example 2 Songs Played; no zero count is displayed in either setlist. The count follows your At start / At finish choice and resets with the show.

Accessing played history

Played songs are never removed. Tap the chevron in the Library, the played count in the module, or swipe down on the divider to show them; tap again or swipe up to tuck them away. Shown, they sit on their side of the divider in their original order, greyed out (except the song that is playing or armed for a SEGUE). They are tappable — you can reload a played song at any time.

Starting a new show

There is no reset button. Double-tap the show-clock divider to start a new show: every song's played mark is cleared and the clock goes back to zero — useful at the start of a second set or a repeat performance.

Mark as played — recap

Set with Mark as played in the Edit Setlist sheet:

Mode Behavior
At startThe song counts as played the moment it begins playing — good for performers who immediately look ahead
At finishThe song counts as played once it ends, including the outgoing song after an Overlap or Crossfade. Starting in the last region works the same way.

6. Song Editor

The Song Editor is where you build and refine a song — its info, mix, regions, lyrics, and audio. You open it from Go Live with the Editor puck (square.and.pencil); it edits the currently-loaded song, so load the song you want (tap it in the Setlist module or the Library window) first. Audio keeps playing while the editor is open.

iPhone and iPad Editors

The editor opens differently on each device — the same underlying tools, a different layout:

Device How it opens Where the tools live
iPhoneFull-screen cover with ✓ (keep and close) and ✕ (discard) at the topFour bottom tabs: Info (Song Information), Lyrics (Lyrics Editor), Tracks (Audio Tracks), and Editor (Waveform Editor). The phone rotates to landscape on the Editor tab and stays portrait on the others (see Orientation below).
iPadIn place over the cockpit — no cover; changes save continuously; return with ‹ Live (top-right of the header)A single Regions editor; audio tools live in its ••• menu and Lyrics + Mixer returns to the split workspace (the PRO key in the compact mixer opens the Pro Mixer). Info is a header tab and Lyrics editing lives in the Regions bottom panel. Unlike the phone/cover layouts, the wide inline editor shows every toolbar control at once — both the AI pill and Follow Playhead button, and the lyrics Import button — nothing gated by play state or edit mode.

iPad in a narrow Split View window. When the app shares the screen at compact width, the cockpit switches to the iPhone layout — and the Editor puck opens the same full-screen editor as on iPhone (four tabs, ✓ to keep and close, ✕ to discard) instead of the in-place iPad editor. To reclaim width, the cover hides a couple of controls the genuine iPhone keeps: the lyrics Import button and the ↩ ↪ undo/redo pair show only while you're editing lyrics. (Like the iPhone — and unlike the wide iPad inline editor — the cover also swaps the AI pill and Follow Playhead button by play state; see Toolbar Buttons.)

The detail sections below — §6a Info, §6b Regions, §6c Lyrics, §6d Audio Editor Tools — document these tools. They are reached as tabs on iPhone and as the Regions editor + a header tab + the bottom panel on iPad, but the editors themselves are the same.

On iPhone the editor saves as you work — ✓ keeps your changes and closes, and ✕ rolls back the current tab and closes (see below). On iPad the editor auto-saves; tap ‹ Live to close it.

The iPad editor's own controls. The in-place editor carries a few controls of its own. They stay where they are — nothing here is dragged:

  • Transport — fixed at the top right of the waveform, on the toolbar row beside the +: ⏮ Rewind · ▶ / ⏸ Play·Pause · Metronome · Language. Play is Play/Pause from the current position (never stop-to-start); Rewind returns to the top. The Language button switches the language the way the Go Live language key does — it arms at the next bar while playing (turning orange here), switches immediately when stopped, and grays out when the song has only one language; when the editor is narrow it is left out to give the region name room. The Metronome button is tuned for editing — by default it stays silent while the song is stopped and clicks only during playback (see The editor metronome below).
  • Library (building.columns) — in the header of the lyrics panel below the waveform. It opens the editor’s docked Library on either side of the bottom panel and turns teal while visible; tap outside an unpinned window to dismiss it.
  • ‹ Live — at the right end of the header, returns you to the cockpit. The compact mixer has its own PRO button, beside Channels / Outputs.

The editor metronome. In the song editor the metronome is built for tracking your edits, so it works a little differently from the live show. This applies on both iPhone and iPad.

  • Editor Style (the default) — silent while the song is stopped; it clicks only while playing, keeping the room quiet while you scrub, trim, and place regions.
  • Live Style — makes the editor metronome behave exactly like Go Live, including clicking while the song is stopped when its mode is When Stopped or Always. Switch between the two with the Style row (Editor / Live) at the top of the metronome's long-press picker. (This is the metronome's own Editor / Live Style — a completely separate setting from the lyrics "Editor" typography tab described in §6c.)
  • Single tap puts the metronome in standby — the click turns fully off (both the audio and the beat dot go dark); tap again to bring it back.
  • Double-tap mutes the metronome's audio channel while the metronome keeps running.
  • Long-press opens the picker: Style (Editor / Live), Mode, Visual Pulse, and Offset (this song).

Keep & Close (✓) and Discard (✕)

The editor saves your work continuously as you go — there is no separate Save step. On iPhone, two header controls decide what happens when you close it (on iPad the inline editor auto-saves the same way; tap ‹ Live to close it):

Control What it does
✓ — keep and close (top-right)Keeps everything you changed and closes the editor. This is the normal way out.
✕ — discard (red, top-left)Throws away the changes you made on the current tab since you opened it, then closes. It appears only when the current tab has unsaved changes — when a tab is unchanged the ✕ is hidden and the title stays centered.

Key behaviours to know:

Undo / Redo are separate from ✕. The Lyrics editor and the Editor (waveform) tab each keep their own Undo / Redo history that survives switching between tabs and is cleared when you close the editor. The Info and Tracks tabs have no undo — they save as you change them.


Orientation & the Landscape Waveform Editor (iPhone)

On iPhone the editor rotates itself to suit each tab:

In the landscape Editor there is no top navigation bar — the full-height waveform fills the screen, with its own header. At the left of that header sit the ••• Timeline Tools button and the AI pill, side by side. The ••• opens a Timeline Tools action sheet — Zoom In / Zoom Out, Beat Align, Trim & Fade, the Show Tips action (re-arms the tip banners), and, for tempo-changing songs, the variable-tempo detection/correction tools. Beside them the header carries the playhead clock (with the snap control), undo/redo and delete-region; the AI pill and Follow Playhead button swap by play state — see Toolbar Buttons.

One slim rail sits on the right edge:

The bottom four-tab bar and the slim play bar are hidden in landscape; use the right rail to move between tabs.

(This per-tab rotation is iPhone-only; iPad does not rotate.)


Key & Transpose

The editor header shows a tappable Key chip — a colored capsule with the song's current key in short form (e.g. G, Gm, A♭) and a small chevron. It does non-destructive performance transpose: it changes how the song sounds and/or how the chart reads for performance, without rewriting the song's stored key. The chip uses the theme accent normally (white in the iPad bottom panel) and turns orange while a transpose is active. (For a song with no written key it shows the shift amount instead, e.g. +2, or a music-note icon when nothing is applied — still tappable.)

Tapping the chip opens the Transpose popover:

Control What it does
Target-key readoutThe resulting key after the shift, shown large.
− / value / + stepperShifts by semitones — ±12 range, shown as +N st. Double-tap the value to reset to 0.
MOVES selectorAudio + Chords (shift both), Audio only (re-pitch the recording; the chart stays in the written key), or Chords only (re-spell the chart; the audio stays put).
ResetReturns to no transpose.

Changes apply live on every tap. This is separate from Rewrite Key, which permanently changes the song.

Rewrite Key (permanent)

Two places let you permanently transpose a song's written chords — this is destructive and changes the stored chart, unlike the performance transpose above:


6a. Info — Song Details

The Info tab is the central record for everything you know about a song.

Header Badge (Inline Editing)

The top of the Info tab shows a header badge containing the song's most essential fields — editable directly inline, without navigating to a separate section:

Element How to edit
TitleTap the song title text to place the cursor; a pencil icon appears next to the title while tapping it
ArtistTap the artist name text to edit inline
Title ColorTap the color swatch on the left side of the badge to open the color palette
KeyTap the key capsule on the right side of the badge to open the Key Picker

Changes are saved automatically as you type (800 ms debounce).

Key Picker

Opens in a three-column sheet:

Tap Done to apply or Clear to remove the key.

Title Color Picker

Tapping the color swatch opens a compact popover that floats directly next to the button. It dismisses when you tap anywhere outside it — no Done button needed.

The palette is a 2-column grid of rounded squares: a clear cell, Theme Accent, and the four theme colours. The active selection shows a checkmark:

Swatch Description
Theme Accent (top right, beside the clear cell)A square swept with every theme's accent colour, with the current theme's accent as a circle in the middle. Selecting this makes the title color follow the active app theme dynamically — it always displays in the current theme's accent color. Useful if you switch themes regularly and want song titles to always feel native to the current look. (The colour theme is chosen in Go Live, from the ••• menu's APPEARANCE strip.)
Stage Teal, Rosewood, Golden Era, TitaniumFixed colors matching each app theme's accent. Choosing one of these pins the title to that specific color regardless of which theme is active.

Tap the top-left neutral cell (with an ✕) to clear the color and restore the default. Theme Accent is the default for new songs.


Tempo & Meter

Control Description
BPM fieldType a tempo directly, or use the slider
Tempo sliderDrag to set BPM (20–300 range); color changes: blue (slow) → green → orange → red (fast)
Tap TempoTap the button repeatedly — the app calculates the average from your last 8 taps
Time SignatureTwo number fields for the top and bottom values (e.g. 4/4, 3/4, 6/8)

All tempo and meter values are saved and used by the metronome / beat grid engine.


MIDI Info

On iPad, the MIDI › heading opens global song devices and channels. The two fields below remain per-song: Send on load is the Trigger; Load song is the Index. Supporting Info text is 18 pt, with concise rows so the three cards fit without scrolling.

Field Description
MIDI TriggerCommand sent every time this song is loaded — e.g. to switch a guitar amp, recall a rack preset, or arm a DAW track
MIDI IndexCommand received to retrieve/navigate to this song — e.g. a Program Change from a foot controller selects this song in the list
Learn (Trigger)Tap to open the MIDI Learn sheet, then send any MIDI message from a controller to auto-capture the format
Learn (Index)Same workflow, captures the incoming message that should point to this song
TC OffsetTimecode offset in seconds. Use the ±1ms steppers or type directly. Positive values delay the song start relative to incoming timecode
MIDI FileImport a Standard MIDI File (.mid) to associate with this song. Tap Load to browse, Replace to swap, or the trash icon to remove

After a MIDI file is loaded, the card shows its format (Type 0/1/2), file size, and PPQN (ticks per quarter note) resolution.

Important distinction:

  • MIDI Trigger = outgoing — the app sends this command the moment a song is loaded, to sync external gear.
  • MIDI Index = incoming — when the app receives this command from an external controller, it navigates to this song.

Manual Input Format Reference

If you prefer to type a MIDI command directly instead of using Learn, use the exact formats below. All formats are case-insensitive.

Message Type Manual Format Examples
NoteNote <name><octave> Ch<n>Note C4 Ch1, Note F#3 Ch10, Note Bb2 Ch16
Control Change (CC)CC#<number> Ch<n>CC#64 Ch1, CC#7 Ch2, CC#0 Ch16
Program Change (PC)PC#<number> Ch<n>PC#0 Ch1, PC#127 Ch16
nRPNnRPN <MSB> <LSB> Ch<n>nRPN 0 64 Ch1, nRPN 1 22 Ch2
Song SelectSong Select #<number>Song Select #0, Song Select #127
System ExclusiveSysEx <hex bytes>SysEx F0 41 10 42 12 F7

Notes on manual format:


General Info

Field Description
Song NotesFree-text field — setlist notes, cues, key changes, anything you need to remember
YearRelease year or year learned. Used when AI auto-fill cannot retrieve it from the catalog

Title Announcement

A spoken announcement of the song's title, set on the Title Announcement When: card in the Info panel. The card's header reads straight into the three trigger checkboxes directly beneath it (which pick when the title is spoken); below them, Mode picks how it's produced. Recording your own opens the Announcements & Cues panel (the microphone button, part of Info).

Trigger — the three checkboxes under the title control when it's spoken:

Checkbox Plays the title when…
Playedyou start the song from the top
Loadedyou load / select the song
Segue (on by default)the song is reached through a SEGUE

Mode — how the announcement audio is produced:

Mode What it does
AI synthesis (default)The app speaks the title with a synthesized voice. Pick the voice from the menu beside it.
RecordRecord the title in your own voice. The panel shows a waveform with drag-to-trim handles, plus Preview and Use.
Use a fileImport any audio file to use as the title.

A new song defaults to AI synthesis; recording or importing switches the mode automatically.

The title plays through the Click & Cues bus (in-ear monitoring, on the cues channel — the right side when the click/cues split is active) and is automatically level-matched to your other cues, so recorded, imported, and synthesized titles all sound consistent. The trim you set applies everywhere the title plays.


Language

When a song's lyrics are in more than one language, the Info tab shows a Language card:


Stats & Maintenance

At the very bottom of the Info tab, two cards sit side by side. (In the iPad editor, where Info is a compact panel, the same Duration, Plays and Clear Waveforms button sit at the foot of its General card instead.)

Stats (left card — read-only)

Field Source
DurationCalculated from the longest audio track in the session
Play CountIncremented each time the song is played from start

Maintenance (right card)

Action Effect
Clear WaveformsClears the stored waveform data for this song only. The waveform is regenerated automatically next time you open the song. Use this if the waveform looks incorrect or corrupted.

To clear waveforms for all songs at once, go to Settings → General → Maintenance → Clear waveforms for all songs.


AI Auto-Fill ✦

The Auto-fill with AI button runs three on-device analyses in parallel and populates empty fields:

Analysis Engine What it finds
ShazamKitTitle, Artist, Year (from Apple's catalog match)
MusicKitYear fallback — if Shazam matched but returned no year, queries the Apple Music catalog
vDSP Tempo DetectorBPM — onset-detection via FFT spectral flux and autocorrelation
Key DetectorMusical key — FFT chromagram + Krumhansl-Schmuckler profile matching

After analysis, an AI Suggestions sheet appears. Each detected value is shown as a card with:

Tap Apply to accept all toggled-on suggestions, or Cancel to discard all.

Privacy note: ShazamKit runs entirely on-device using Apple's built-in matching. No audio is stored or sent externally beyond Apple's standard ShazamKit API. MusicKit requires a one-time authorization prompt. Tempo and key detection never leave the device.

Requirements: MusicKit requires an active Apple Music subscription or Apple Music service availability. ShazamKit requires iOS 15 / macOS 12 or later.


Automatic Analysis on Import

Separate from the manual Auto-fill with AI button described above, the app runs its own analysis automatically in the background the moment a song finishes importing — no button, no waiting. Because the header Create Song button opens the same Add Song to Library importer (a song is always created by importing audio), this automatic pass applies to every new song.

Two passes run on their own:

Based on what it finds, a teal Song Setup banner appears at the top of the Live screen, the song's row in the library glows with a pulsing teal wand, and matching offer cards wait in the Regions Editor as a backstop.

What is not automatic on import: Key detection, time-signature detection, and Shazam title lookup run only when you tap Auto-fill with AI in the Add Song sheet. Section detection is never automatic — it's the separate Detect Sections action in the Regions Editor (see AI Detect Sections).

Song Setup offers

Each row has its own accept button plus Not now, so you can act on one and ignore the rest. Song names and BPM values are filled in live.

Finding the real downbeat through silence, pickups, and anacrusis

The steady beat grid is laid out from the file start (bar 1 at sample 0). Leading silence is corrected separately, as a grid shift, only when you accept the Align / Set up offer — this slides bar 1 off sample 0 and onto the first real downbeat.


6b. Regions Editor

Regions divide a song into labeled sections (Intro, Verse, Chorus, Bridge, Outro, etc.) that you can navigate to instantly during performance.
The Regions Editor is also where you generate the song's Built-in Vamp, run AI Section Detection, and fine-tune boundaries with precision drag tools.

Audio Editor tools. On iPad, open the Regions ••• menu to adjust trim, fade, beat grid alignment, and audio track settings using tools that overlay the same waveform. On iPhone, use the Tracks tab to manage the track list and the Editor tab for trim, fade, beat align, and cuts. See §6d — Audio Editor Tools for full documentation.

The Marker Banner in the Regions Editor

When the song has lyric section markers (stamped in the Lyrics editor's Mark Mode), a marker banner strip appears above the waveform. The banner is always full height and always interactive in the Regions Editor, so you can:

The menu opens near the marker you held, above or beside your finger when space allows, and stays inside the editor window.

The long-press menu follows regions:

Each marker follows its own region’s color, even when several regions share the same section tag. Recoloring that region updates its marker immediately; color edits and their undo/redo do not reload audio. The banner scrolls and zooms with the waveform viewport — only markers visible in the current view are shown. Changes made here are saved immediately and synchronized to all other views (Lyrics tab, Go Live, Mixer). The banner is hidden automatically when the song has no markers.


Empty State (No Audio Tracks)

If the current song has no audio tracks imported at all, the Regions Editor waveform area shows a prominent empty-state placeholder instead of a waveform:

This placeholder only appears when the song has zero audio files of any kind — not when audio is loading or when the waveform data hasn't finished rendering yet. Once you import an audio file, the placeholder is replaced by the full waveform editor automatically.

Tip: Songs with only percussive tracks (e.g. a click track or cue stem classified as percussive) show the "Loading waveform…" state rather than this placeholder, because audio is present even though no waveform amplitude data is rendered.


Creating a Region Manually

  1. In the Regions Editor, the full waveform is displayed with a timeline axis showing time or bars.
  2. Tap and hold on the waveform at the start point to place the region start marker.
  3. Drag to the desired end point.
  4. Release to create the region. A name dialog appears — enter a name (e.g. "Chorus 1") and tap Done.

Region Chips

Each region appears as a colored chip above the waveform. The active region (the one currently under the playhead) is highlighted. Tap any chip to jump to the start of that region.


Region Playback Modes

Long-press a region chip or tap the region in the editor to open its settings:

Mode Behavior
ContinuePlays through the region and continues to the next
Repeat OncePlays the region once more, then continues
LoopLoops this region indefinitely until you manually advance
SkipSkips this region entirely during playback
PauseAudio pauses automatically when the playhead reaches this region

Skip also applies at the beginning: Play from the top and automatic song transitions bypass consecutive leading Skip regions, starting at the first region that is not skipped. This works even if you set Skip after loading the song. Tapping a skipped region deliberately still plays it, and resuming paused playback keeps your position. If every remaining region is skipped, the song stays stopped.


Editing Regions

Name vs. Section Tag: A region has two labels. The top name is for display and performance — you can write anything here. The bottom section tag is for structure — it links the region to the matching lyrics section via fuzzy matching (e.g. "V1", "VER 1", "VERSE 1" all match a lyrics section labeled "Verse 1:").


Long-Press Region Actions

Long-press any region block on the waveform to open an action menu near your finger. The menu stays above the waveform content and inside the editor window, clear of the header:

Action What it does
Split at PlayheadCuts a region into two adjoining parts at the playhead and selects the new right-hand part. Available only inside the region. No rename field opens automatically. Change the new part’s Tag/ID when ready to give it a different lyric section. Until then, existing cues keep their timing. Arrangements retain both parts; Undo restores the original.
DuplicateCreates an identical copy immediately after the source region — same name (no "Copy" suffix), color, section tag, and playback mode. The duplicate's length is clamped so it does not overlap the next region. Any lyric marker linked to the region is carried too — recreated on the duplicate with the same name/cue and matching relative position, so a duplicated Chorus arrives with its marker already in place (no re-adding or renaming).
Copy RegionSaves the region — and any markers linked to it — as a template in the in-session clipboard. Nothing is placed yet.
Paste Next to This Region(Appears only when a region has been copied.) Places a copy of the clipboard region starting at the end of the long-pressed region, recreating its linked marker(s) at the paste location.
DeleteDeletes only the long-pressed region.
Delete AllRemoves every region in the song at once. Supports full Undo (⌘Z) if you change your mind.

To paste at an empty waveform location:

  1. Long-press a region → Copy Region.
  2. Long-press any empty area of the waveform (outside all regions).
  3. Tap Paste Here — the copied region is placed at that sample position, clamped so it does not overlap the next region.

Notes:

  • The clipboard persists for the whole editing session — you can paste the same region multiple times (each paste also recreates the copied region's markers).
  • All paste and duplicate operations support Undo / Redo (⌘Z / ⌘⇧Z) — the carried markers are included in the same undo step.
  • A pasted region receives a new unique ID but inherits the name, color, section tag, and playback mode of the source. Carried markers likewise get new IDs, keeping the originals untouched.

Toolbar Buttons

The Regions Editor toolbar is organized into two areas: the inspector bar (top) and the generated-track toolbar (bottom, below the waveform).

Inspector Bar — Right Side

The right-hand side of the inspector bar contains the main editing controls, arranged left-to-right:

Button / Group Description
🔒 Lock · ↔□ PushTwo buttons connected by a joining line. Lock keeps the region’s length fixed — dragging either handle moves the whole region and its paragraph markers together (orange when active). Unlock to resize individual boundaries. Push toggles drag-boundary behavior between Stop at Neighbor (default) and Push Neighbor — when active (orange), dragging a region boundary pushes the adjacent region to maintain gapless coverage.
+ · [n]Two controls connected by a short joining line. + (tap) adds a region at the current playhead position. A small ··· ellipsis beneath the icon hints that long-press opens the Auto-Marker Settings popover (CUE offset, beat/time offset stepper). The bar-size pill (e.g. 8, 4, ½, Fill) opens the Region Length picker — each length also shows its duration at the current tempo. (The snap control moved out of this group to sit beside the clock — see Snap-to-Grid.)
AIStandalone pill (wand.and.stars icon; the "AI" text shows only on the wide iPad inline editor). Opens a menu with: Detect Sections (AI section detection) with a Language sub-menu, a Cues Track section (Add / Delete Cues, with a voice Language sub-menu), and a Built-in Vamp section (Generate / Delete Built-in Vamp). Shows a spinning progress indicator when any AI task is running. On phone-width layouts (iPhone, or an iPad in a narrow Split-View cover) the AI pill appears only while the song is stopped — every AI action is a stopped-time operation — and during playback its slot is taken over by the Follow Playhead button (they swap live on play/stop). The wide iPad inline editor keeps both visible at once.

Inspector Bar — Center

Element Description
LCD Counter / Region InfoWhen no region is selected, shows the playhead LCD counter. When a region is selected, shows the region name (tap to rename), color swatch (tap to change), and section tag.
📌 PinAppears next to the LCD counter / region info. Tap to drop a lyric section marker at the current playhead position. Long-press to delete all markers at once (confirmation dialog).

Inspector Bar — Left Side

Element Description
Play / Pause / RewindNot on this bar — the editor's transport sits elsewhere on each device (see Adaptive Play Button below)
Follow PlayheadToggle auto-scroll (location icon). Active (blue, filled): waveform follows playhead. Bypassed (orange, pulsing): follow suspended by manual pan/pinch. Off (plain outline): follow disabled. On phone-width layouts (iPhone, or an iPad in a narrow Split-View cover) this button appears only while the song is playing, sharing its slot with the AI pill (AI when stopped, Follow Playhead when playing); the wide iPad inline editor always shows it.

Header Bar — Center (Undo / Redo / Delete)

When on the Regions tab, the header bar's center cluster shows:

Button Description
🗑 Delete (trash icon)Visible only when a region is selected. Deletes the selected region. Icon-only, red-tinted.
↩ UndoUndo the last region edit (⌘Z). Disabled when nothing to undo.
Lyrics ⇄ RegionsTab toggle pill
↪ RedoRedo (⌘⇧Z). Disabled when nothing to redo.

Waveform Floating Overlays

Two floating pill buttons appear over the top-right corner of the main waveform:

Overlay Position Description
Playback ModeTop-right, stacked below Waveform SourceAuto-sizing capsule pill (44 pt tall). For Continue, shows only the arrow icon (compact). For Repeat Once, shows repeat.1 icon + "Once". For other modes, shows icon + mode title (e.g. "Loop", "Skip", "Pause"). The pill grows horizontally to fit its content. Tap to open the playback mode dialog. Only visible when a region is selected.
Waveform SourceTop-right corner44×44 capsule pill with a waveform icon. Tap to choose which track's waveform is displayed (Mix Down or individual stems). Only visible on multi-track songs.

When you hide the Cues row, an eye.slash pill joins the same stack — tap it to bring the row back.

Generated-Track Toolbar (Below Waveform)

Element Description
👁 CuesAppears when the Cues row is hidden and its pill is not showing — tap to bring the row back

Region recording is not on this toolbar: it is the red R hand in the lyrics panel's tool pill. See Region Recording Mode below.


AI Menu

The AI pill in the inspector bar opens a menu organized into three named sections:

Detect Sections

Item Description
Add Regions 🟣Run AI section detection and add the detected regions to the waveform. Tinted purple. Disabled when regions already cover the full waveform, or while detection is in progress.
Language ▸Sub-menu (grey label/icon). Set the spoken-cue recognition language used during detection: Auto-detect (default) or a specific language (EN, ES, PT, FR, IT, DE, NL, etc.).

Cues Track

Item Description
Add Cues 🔵Generate a spoken-cue audio stem timed to your region boundaries. Tinted blue. Disabled when no regions exist or while generation is in progress. Only shown when no Cues track exists yet.
Language ▸Sub-menu (grey label/icon). Set the voice language for the generated cue audio. A checkmark shows the current selection. The choice is saved per song.
Delete Cues(Only shown when a Cues track exists.) Removes the cues track — deletes the audio file and its Mixer channel.

Built-in Vamp

The song's generated groove track, now named the Built-in Vamp.

Item Description
Generate Built-in Vamp 🔴Generate a beat-synced kick track locked to the song's tempo — one hit on every beat you feel, so a 6/8 song gets two per bar, one under each group of three. The same pattern at every tempo. Created muted; VAMP brings it in. Tinted warm red. See Groove Track Generation.
Delete Built-in Vamp(Shown instead when the song has one.) Removes it.

Button Tip Banners

When you tap the Lock, Push (↔□), or Follow Playhead buttons a compact frosted-glass banner slides in from the top-right corner of the waveform. It sits in the gap between the inspector toolbar and the ruler and shows:

The banner stays visible for 4 seconds then fades out. It never shifts any content — it floats over the waveform as a pure overlay.

Each tip shows a few times, then stops. Every hinted control spends its banner the first few times you use it, then stays quiet — the final banner reminds you where to turn them back on. To re-arm every control's hints, open the editor's ••• menu and tap Show Tips. The preference is saved and survives app restarts.


Drag Boundary Modes ↔□

When you drag a region's left or right edge, you can choose how the neighboring region reacts:

Mode Behavior
Stop at Neighbor (default)Dragging a boundary stops when it reaches the next region — no gaps allowed
Push NeighborDragging a boundary pushes the adjacent region, shifting it to maintain gapless coverage

Tap Push (↔□) in the toolbar to toggle between modes. A 2-second info banner confirms which mode is active.


Snap-to-Grid

When snap is enabled (on by default), all region boundary operations — create, resize, and move — snap to the nearest musical grid position. The snap control sits beside the playhead clock (where the old Time/Bars toggle used to be). A small ··· hint beneath it means hold for its menu.

Control How to use
Snap control — tapToggles snap on/off. Orange text and border when active; the label shows the current resolution (Bar, ½, or Beat).
Snap control — holdOpens a menu with two groups: Snap Resolution and Ruler (below). The menu stays open so you can set both, then tap outside to dismiss. Choosing a resolution also turns snapping on.
Resolution Snaps to
Bar (default)Nearest bar line (beat 1 of a measure)
½ BarNearest half-bar position
BeatNearest individual beat

The Ruler group in the same menu switches the timeline's units — this replaced the always-visible Time/Bars button (ruler units aren't changed often enough to need a permanent control):

Ruler Shows
BarsBar numbers along the ruler
TimeMinutes:seconds along the ruler

Snap requires a BPM to be set on the song (Info tab). When no BPM is available, snap has no effect.

When snap is applied:

When snap is NOT applied:


CUE Offset

Controls whether a lyric section marker is automatically created when a region is added, and how far before the region's start the marker is placed (as a lyric lead-time cue for pickups/anacrusis). This is only about lyric marker timing — it does not move the beat grid or the downbeat. For anacrusis-aware downbeat placement, see Automatic Analysis on Import.

Access these settings by long-pressing the + button in the inspector bar. The Auto-Marker Settings popover appears with:

Control Description
Auto-create marker with regionToggle. When enabled, every region creation automatically drops a linked lyric section marker. Pink when active, dimmed when off.
Beat offset stepperFine-tune the offset (0–8 beats when BPM is set, or 0–8 seconds when no BPM). Shows the current value, e.g. "Beat offset: 3 beats".
Reset to global defaultResets the per-song offset to the global default (appears only when a per-song override is set).

When enabled, every region created (via +, Detect Sections, or Recording Mode) automatically drops a linked lyric section marker the specified number of beats before the region's start. This marker drives the lyrics highlight — the performer sees the section label scroll into view a few beats before the musical change.

The offset is stored per song (Session.markerBeatOffset) with a global default of 3 beats. It can also be overridden per marker by dragging the marker to a different position.


Region Recording Mode

Region Recording Mode provides a fast, real-time workflow for creating regions by tapping lyric sections while audio plays. Instead of drawing regions manually on the waveform, you press Record, start playback, and tap each section in the lyrics panel as it arrives.

How to Use

  1. Tap the red R hand in the lyrics panel's tool pill (if the blue L hand is showing, choose Draw Regions from the ▾ beside it first).
    • If audio is already playing: recording starts immediately.
    • If audio is stopped: the button arms (turns red). Recording begins when you press Play.
  2. As the song plays, tap each section label in the bottom lyrics panel when it arrives.
  3. Each tap creates a new region at the next bar boundary, trimming the previous region to end there (gapless).
  4. Tap the Stop button (⏹) or press Stop to end recording.

Visual Feedback During Recording

Indicator What you see
Red lyrics panel borderA 2 pt red border around the lyrics preview panel (right side of the bottom panel) confirms recording is active. The projection preview (left side) retains its normal border.
REC bannerA red gradient banner at the top of the waveform reads "● REC — TAP LYRICS TO CREATE REGIONS"
REC indicatorA red "● REC" label appears at the bottom of the lyrics panel
ToastEach successful tap flashes "MARKED: [Section] AT [time]" in green at the center of the lyrics

Per-Region Undo

Every region created during recording gets its own undo snapshot. Pressing ⌘Z (Undo) removes one region at a time — not the entire recording session. This lets you fix a single misplaced boundary without losing all your work.

Re-Entering Recording After a Mistake

If you stop playback while recording, the system re-arms automatically instead of fully exiting recording mode:

  1. Stop — the current region is trimmed to the current bar boundary. Recording pauses.
  2. Undo (⌘Z) — removes the last region that was placed incorrectly.
  3. Seek — drag the playhead back to the position you want to resume from.
  4. Play — recording resumes automatically from where you left off.

This design keeps the recording workflow fast — you never need to navigate back to the Record button to re-activate it after a mistake.

Automatic Marker Creation

Each region created during recording also creates a linked lyric section marker at the appropriate CUE offset (see CUE Offset above). The marker inherits the section label from the lyric you tapped.

Tapping a later paragraph of the section you are already recording does not start a new region — it drops a paragraph-break marker (a labelled ¶ capsule) inside the current region instead. A multi-paragraph verse stays one region while each paragraph still gets its own cue.


Cues & Regions Lists (▾ Menu)

Next to the tap-to-place hand button in the lyrics panel's tool pill (the red R hand draws regions, the light-blue L hand cues lyrics) sits a small ▾ chevron — shown when both tap modes are available, and whenever the song has no lyrics. Tap it to open a menu:

Item What it does
Draw Regions / Cue LyricsSwitches the hand between its two tap modes — a checkmark and the hand's color mark the active mode, and switching disarms the other. (Hidden when the song has no lyrics — with nothing to tap, the ▾ is purely the lists host.)
Cues… (trash icon)Opens the Cues list — every lyric cue with its colored dot, section label, and time. Swipe a row to delete one cue, or tap Delete All. (Appears only when at least one free-standing cue exists — one not linked to any region. When every cue belongs to a region, the Regions list already owns them all and this entry is hidden.)
Regions… (trash icon)Opens the Regions list — every region with its color, section tag, and start–end times. Swipe a row to delete one region, or tap Delete All.

Deleting a region also deletes the lyric cues that were added with it — whether you delete from the Regions list or with the waveform editor's trash button, and whether the cue was recorded, AI-detected, or dropped onto a matching section. Free-standing cues are never touched; they survive even Delete All regions.

Everything is undoable. Recorded region taps, dropped cues, and every list deletion enter the Undo history. On the iPhone Lyrics tab the tool pill's ↩ / ↪ pair steps through this history whenever you are not editing the lyrics text (while editing, the pair drives the text history instead); in the waveform editor use its Undo / Redo buttons (⌘Z / ⌘⇧Z).


Cueing & Recording on the iPhone (Lyrics Tab)

Everything above is available on the iPhone too. The Lyrics tab is where it lives, because the lyrics and the slim transport bar share one screen there.

PlacingArm the 👆 hand, then tap the lyrics. Cue Lyrics drops a marker at the playhead; Draw Regions records boundaries as the song plays — arm it while stopped and recording begins with playback.
Marker pinsCues appear on the mini waveform as small ringed pin heads in their section color, standing slightly proud of the region bar so they read as pins rather than dividers. Paragraph-break markers show as slim ticks. A live playhead tracks playback.
Tool pill orderEdit · Import · ↩ ↪ · 👆▾ — the hand sits at the right end. (In the narrow iPad Split-View cover only, Import and the ↩ ↪ undo/redo pair stay hidden until you tap the pencil to edit lyrics, reclaiming header width. On a genuine iPhone and the wide iPad inline editor they are always shown.)
With the Mixer openThe undo/redo pair and the hand are hidden — they act on lyrics that aren't on screen. Closing the Mixer brings them back.
Songs with no lyricsThe hand is hidden (nothing to tap), but the ▾ remains so the Cues and Regions lists stay reachable.

While you are typing, the transport rail docks against the top of the keyboard so it stays usable: a compact Start/Stop button sits at its left, and the region strip beside it can be dragged anywhere along its height to scrub — so you can jump to a spot, hear it, and keep editing without dismissing the keyboard.


Adaptive Play Button (Regions Tab)

The Regions editor's transport is a small group of keys whose place depends on the device. It is not on the inspector bar.

Where Keys Colours
iPad editorFixed at the top right of the waveform, beside the +: ⏮ Rewind · ▶ / ⏸ · Metronome · Language (see the iPad editor's own controls)Round keys — Play on green, Pause on orange
iPhone (landscape Editor tab)A slim bar at the bottom-right of the waveform: ⏮ Rewind · ▶ / ⏸ · Metronome. Zoom − / + sit at the bottom-left, level with itGreen ▶ while stopped, red ⏸ while playing
iPad in a narrow Split ViewThe same slim bar as the iPhone — on the right of the editor's second toolbar row in a tall window, at the bottom-right of the waveform otherwiseAs on iPhone

Key behavior: Play is Play / Pause, not Play / Stop. Pausing freezes playback in place; tapping Play again resumes from the paused position. Only ⏮ Rewind returns to the beginning — it stops playback if the song is playing.


Zoom & Navigation

Double-Tap Region Zoom

Double-tap the body of any region block (the area below the title bar strip) to zoom. The behavior depends on where the playhead is at the moment of the double-tap:

Scenario What happens
Playhead is inside the tapped region — song playing or stoppedToggle: first double-tap zooms in (~70% width); next double-tap on the same region zooms back out to full-song view. Alternates. No selection or pulse is applied.
Playhead is inside a different region — song playingZooms in to the tapped region and queues it for playback (it starts pulsing). If it is already queued, the queue is cancelled; during a held vamp it moves where the song comes back in instead. Handles are never shown.
Playhead is inside a different region — song stoppedZooms in to the tapped region and moves the playhead to its start, so PLAY starts there.

Key points:

Follow Playhead & Bypass Mode

When Follow Playhead is enabled, the waveform keeps the live playhead centered in the viewport as audio plays. This is the default during performance.

Bypass is an automatic suspension of follow-playhead, activated whenever you interact with the viewport while audio is playing:

Trigger Effect
Pan gesture (drag left/right)Bypass activates — viewport holds position
Pinch gesture (zoom in/out)Bypass activates — viewport holds position
Double-tap zoom-inBypass activates — viewport stays on the zoomed region

While bypassed:

Bypass clears automatically once the live playhead re-enters the center band of the visible viewport (~5% tolerance). Normal follow-scrolling resumes immediately — no button tap required.

To clear bypass manually: tap the Follow Playhead button once. The button returns to blue and the waveform snaps back to the playhead.

To disable follow-playhead entirely: tap the Follow Playhead button while it is blue. It goes back to a plain outline. Tap again to reactivate it. (On iPhone and the narrow iPad cover the Follow Playhead button is on screen only while the song is playing — it shares its slot with the AI pill — so these taps apply during playback; the wide iPad inline editor shows the button at all times.)


Live Region Navigation (Region Loop Coordinator)

The Region Loop Coordinator controls how region taps behave. The Live page's chips, the mini waveform transport bar (the song editor's Info, Lyrics and Tracks tabs, the stage screen) and the Pro Mixer's timeline (§9.0) all follow one rule, below — so you can navigate regions from any of them. The Regions Editor follows it too — its waveform, its lyrics and its double-tap zoom — with two differences: a region chosen while stopped keeps the editor's steady highlight instead of pulsing, and while the song plays, tapping the selected region again stops its loop or cancels its queued jump.

While Audio Is Playing

Rule 1 — Toggle the active loop
Tap the region chip for the region that is currently playing (or currently looping).

Rule 2 — Queue the next region
Tap any region chip that is not the currently playing region.

During a held vamp (FADE or VAMP holding — §5.13), a region tap does neither: it moves where the song comes back in (the chip takes the CUE), and the vamp keeps holding.

While Audio Is Stopped

Rule 3 — Preselect a region (seek on tap)
Tap any region chip while stopped.

Rule 4 — Deferred jump
If you tap a different region right before pressing Play, the most recently tapped region becomes the start point, overriding any earlier preselection. The coordinator resolves the correct position at the moment Play is pressed.

Region State Indicators (chips and blocks)

Visual state What it means
Bright / full opacityActive — playhead is inside this region
PulsatingLooping, queued for play, or preselected while stopped
DimmedInactive and not queued

Playback Mode vs. Loop Toggle

Region Playback Mode (set in the editor) is the default behavior when the region is reached in normal playback. The loop toggle (Rule 1) is an in-performance override that supersedes the default mode for that pass.

Scenario What happens
Region mode = Continue, loop toggled ONRegion loops until you tap it again
Region mode = Loop, loop toggled OFFRegion plays once, then continues to next
Region mode = Repeat OncePlays the region twice, then continues — cannot be loop-overridden
Region mode = SkipRegion is skipped transparently during playback
Region mode = PausePlayback pauses automatically at this region boundary

Dynamic Vocal Cues — the Cue Follows the Plan, Not the Recording

Repeat a section, or jump to one that was not coming next, and the app announces the section you are actually going to — in time to be useful, and without the recorded voice contradicting it.

A cues track is a performance. Whoever recorded it named each section a bar or two before it arrived — which is exactly right until you change the plan. Loop a chorus and the baked voice still says "bridge" over the top of it; jump somewhere else and it names the section you have just left behind.

Vessa Rig keeps the voice honest. The moment you loop, hold, release or jump, it works out where you are actually going, holds the recorded announcement quiet for the few bars where it would be wrong, and speaks the right section name in its place — about a bar ahead, so it lands before the change rather than on top of it.


Undo / Redo

All region edits support undo (⌘Z) and redo (⌘⇧Z) while the editor is open.


✦ AI Detect Sections

AI features are assistants, not authorities. Section detection is designed to give you a fast starting point — it can save significant time when setting up a new song, especially when a cue/guide track is present. However, the AI can and does make mistakes: labels may be wrong, boundaries may be off by a bar or two, or a section may be missed entirely. Always review the Detected Sections sheet before tapping Add Selected, and correct anything that looks off using the inline rename, Nudge, and Size controls. The more you correct, the faster your workflow becomes.

Tap Detect Sections to have the AI automatically analyze the song and create labeled regions.
All processing happens entirely on-device — no audio leaves your device.

How it works

The analyzer divides the song into overlapping 4-bar windows and extracts a 21-dimensional feature vector for each one, then applies multiple layers of musical intelligence to identify boundaries and assign section names.

Acoustic Features (per segment)

# Feature What it captures
0–11Chroma (12 dims)Harmonic content — which notes and chords are active
12Log-RMS EnergyOverall loudness — choruses are typically louder than verses
13Spectral CentroidBrightness — hi-hats, cymbals, and distorted guitars rank high
14High-Frequency RatioPresence of content above 4 kHz — crashes, shakers
15Spectral FluxRate of spectral change — measures drum activity and transitions
16Low-Frequency RatioBass and kick presence below 250 Hz
17Onset DensityTransients per second — busier sections score higher
18Dynamic RangePeak-to-mean RMS — compressed punchy mixes signal a chorus
19Stereo WidthSide-to-mid ratio — choruses are mixed wider than verses
20Sub-Bass EnergyEnergy below 80 Hz — kick drum and 808 indicator

Multi-Track Intelligence

Layer What it does
Track Activity DensityCounts active stems per segment. Full band = chorus; stripped back = verse or intro
Distant Repetition ScoringFinds segments that recur at non-adjacent positions (the strongest chorus signal)
Energy Gap DetectionDetects dramatic energy valleys and injects a boundary right after them
Cue Track HintsTracks named cue, guide, click, metro, etc. — onset bursts and spoken labels drive boundary injection
Multilingual Cue RecognitionOn-device speech recognition decodes spoken section names in seven languages: English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, Italian, German and Dutch
Vocal Track HintsTracks named vocal, vox, bgv, harmony, etc. — silence-to-entry transitions flag new sections; louder/harmonised vocal energy lifts chorus scores

Label Assignment — Multi-Factor Scoring

Every segment cluster receives a "chorus-likeness" score based on:

Factor Weight
Repetition count30%
Energy20%
Track activity15%
Onset density15%
Brightness10%
Stereo width10%

Additional rules refine the result:

Track name matching

The AI automatically identifies helper tracks by name — no manual configuration needed:

Track type Match keywords
Cue / Click hintscue, cues, guide, announce, click, clk, metronome, metro, spk, tag
Vocal hintsvocal, vox, voice, lead vox, bgv, bv, bg vox, harmony, harm, choir, soprano, tenor, alto, backing

Privacy: Cue-label speech recognition uses Apple's on-device SFSpeechRecognizer with requiresOnDeviceRecognition = true. No audio is ever sent to a server.

Analysis Progress Overlay

When detection starts, an animated progress card slides in at the bottom of the waveform area:

Element Description
"Analyzing Sections" titleConfirms analysis is running
Gradient progress barPurple-to-indigo fill shows 0–100% completion
Percentage badgeLive number next to the bar
Phase messageSingle-line description of the current analysis step (e.g., "Computing chroma features…")
✕ dismiss buttonHides the overlay — analysis continues in the background — tap Detect Sections again to re-open the result sheet when done

The overlay disappears automatically when analysis completes and the review sheet opens.

The Detected Sections Sheet

When analysis finishes (or when you tap Detect Sections a second time and a cached result exists), a bottom sheet slides up titled "Detected Sections". It lists every section the AI found.

Sheet header:
A large purple badge shows the total number of detected sections, next to a brief explanation.

Each row contains:

Element Description
Toggle (purple)Check/uncheck to include or exclude this section. Only checked sections become regions when you tap Add Selected
Section name fieldEditable inline text field — tap it to rename the section before adding
Time rangeShows start → end in m:ss format by default, or Bars X–Y when the Bars display is active
Confidence badgeShows AI confidence as a percentage. Green = ≥ 80%, Orange = ≥ 50%, Red = < 50%

Understanding the Confidence Percentage

The number next to each section name tells you how sure the AI is that it found the right boundary and the right label.

Range Color What it means in practice
80–100%🟢 GreenSpeech recognition confirmed the label and the acoustic analysis strongly agrees. Accept it as-is.
50–79%🟠 OrangeEither speech recognition matched or the acoustics look right — but not both. Skim through and nudge if anything feels off.
< 50%🔴 RedThe AI made its best guess based on position and musical pattern alone. Worth a quick listen before adding.

What raises confidence:

What lowers confidence:

Improving Detection Over Time

The AI starts getting better the moment you start editing. Here is how:

  1. Add a Cue / Guide Track — Record a simple voice track where you say the section name 1–2 bars before each section starts (e.g., "Verse — 1, 2, 3, 4"). Import it as a track and name it something with the word cue or guide. The AI will pick it up automatically on the next detection run. Spoken cues are the single biggest accuracy boost available.
  2. Correct the sections in this sheet before tapping Add Selected — Use the inline name field to fix wrong labels. Use Nudge to fix a boundary that is off by a bar. Use Size to shrink an oversized section. The more accurate your final regions are, the more useful they become as a reference.
  3. Keep your sections consistent — If you call the same musical part "Chorus" in every song, the AI's position and repetition heuristics reinforce each other. Inconsistent naming (e.g., "Refrain" in one song, "Chorus" in another) does not confuse detection, but consistent naming makes the review step faster for you.
  4. Re-run Detect Sections after adding a cue track — The cached result is automatically cleared when you add or rename a track. Just tap Detect Sections again to get a fresh (and usually much more accurate) result.

Note on privacy: All analysis — including speech recognition on your cue track — runs entirely on your device. No audio is uploaded anywhere.

| Preview button | Tap ▶ Preview to hear that section play from its start. A horizontal progress bar appears while it plays. Tap ■ Stop to end early | | Nudge ◀ ▶ buttons | (Only shown when BPM is known.) Shift the section's start and end boundaries left or right by one bar. All subsequent sections shift too. | | Size − + buttons | (Only shown when BPM is known.) Shrink or grow the section by one bar from its end boundary. Adjacent sections absorb the change. |

Swipe to delete: Swipe a row leftward (or swipe fully) to delete that section. The bars it covered are absorbed by the adjacent section — no gap is created.

Toolbar buttons:

Button Placement Action
CancelTop-leftDismiss the sheet — no regions are created
Add SelectedTop-right (purple)Create permanent regions from all checked sections. Disabled when nothing is checked
🕐 / 🎵 iconTop toolbarToggle position display between time (m:ss) and bars (Bar Numbers)
Deselect AllBottom bar (iOS) / top toolbar (macOS)Uncheck every section at once
Select AllBottom bar (iOS) / top toolbar (macOS)Check every section at once

Tip: The Bars toggle defaults to on when the session has an established BPM (user-set or auto-detected). It defaults to time display otherwise.

Tip: Analysis results are cached — tapping Detect Sections again is almost instant if the analyzer has already run (or is already running in background). The cache is cleared automatically when you change the cue language.


🌐 Cue Language Picker

The 🌐 globe button sits immediately to the right of Detect Sections in the toolbar. It controls which spoken language the on-device speech recognizer uses when decoding section names called out in a cue/guide track.

Button label:

Selecting a language:

Tap the globe button to open the language menu. Options:

Selection Effect
Auto-detectThe recognizer scouts the first few onsets with multiple languages and locks to whichever produces the best matches
Englishen-US
Spanishes-MX
Portuguesept-BR
Frenchfr-FR
Italianit-IT
Germande-DE
Dutchnl-NL

One entry per language. A section is called out in a single word — Coro, Ponte, Refrão — and it is the same word either side of an ocean, so there is no separate Spain / Mexico or Brazil / Portugal choice to make. Fewer recognizers also means a faster scout when you leave it on Auto-detect.

Persistence: The chosen language is saved per song (stored on the Session record). It is automatically restored when you revisit that song's Regions Editor.

Cache invalidation: Changing the language clears any cached section-detection result for the current song. The next Detect Sections tap will run a fresh analysis using the new language.

Live override: If you change the language while analysis is already running, the new locale takes effect at the next internal checkpoint — you don't need to cancel and restart.

Supported spoken section names (recognized in all seven languages):
Intro, Verse, Chorus, Pre-Chorus, Bridge, Hook, Interlude, Outro / End / Coda, Tag, Solo / Instrumental, Break / Breakdown.


+ Button — Add Region (Tap vs. Press-and-Hold)

The + button in the toolbar adds a new region to the waveform at the next available gap.

Gesture Result
TapAdds a region immediately using the last-selected bar length (default: 8 bars)
Press and holdOpens a pop-up menu to choose the region length, then adds the region

Available lengths (press-and-hold menu):

Option Duration
1 barOne measure at the current BPM
2 barsTwo measures
4 barsFour measures
8 barsEight measures (default)
16 barsSixteen measures

The selected bar count is remembered — subsequent Tap presses use that same length until you press-and-hold and pick a different one. A checkmark in the menu shows the currently active length.

The new region is placed at the first available gap that is large enough to fit the requested length, starting from after the playhead position. If no gap is large enough, the region is placed at the largest available gap. Region length is always calculated from the song’s BPM and time signature set in the Info tab.


Groove Track Generation

The song's generated groove track is now called the Built-in Vamp. Open the AI menu → Built-in Vamp → Generate Built-in Vamp to make one: a beat-synced kick that locks to the song's tempo and beat grid — one hit on every beat you feel (two per bar in 6/8), the same pattern at every tempo.

There is no generated click track. The built-in metronome is the timing reference (see §12 — Beat-Grid & Metronome). You can still import your own click as a regular audio track — name it with "click" or "metronome" and it routes to the C&C (in-ear) bus automatically, staying audible through fades.

Menu item Action
Generate Built-in VampCreates it. It is created muted so it never surprises the main output — VAMP brings it in.
Delete Built-in Vamp(Shown instead when the song has one.) Removes it. A song whose Built-in Vamp you delete is not given a new one automatically; generating one again by hand lifts that.

Cues Track Generation

Open the AI menu → Cues Track section to generate a spoken-cue audio stem that announces each region by name.

Voice Language: Before generating, tap Language ▸ in the Cues Track section of the AI menu to choose the voice language. The sub-menu shows a checkmark on the current selection. Available voice packs: English (Female), English (Male), English (Gospel), Spanish, Portuguese, French, German, and more. The selection is saved per song.

Audio Source Priority: The generator uses bundled pre-recorded audio files as the primary source for maximum quality and zero-latency rendering. If a section name doesn't match any bundled file (e.g. a custom name like "Guitar Solo Break"), it falls back to on-device TTS (Text-to-Speech) for that cue only.

Cues track waveform row — inline controls:

Once generated, the CUES row appears just above the main waveform with three inline control pills:

Control (28×18 pt) Function
Speaker iconMute / unmute the cues track during playback. Turns red when muted; the entire row dims to 40 % opacity. Mute state is saved — it persists across editor closes, app restarts, and device redeploys.
Eye iconHide the Cues row. A floating eye.slash pill appears at the top right of the waveform; tap it to restore. The row also comes back from the 👁 Cues button in the generated-track toolbar.
Trash iconDelete the cues track entirely (red). This removes the audio file and also removes the Cues channel from the Mixer.

Follow Playhead: When Follow Playhead is enabled and you are zoomed in, the Cues waveform row scrolls in perfect sync with the main waveform — it always shows the same time window as the track you are viewing, and it moves with the main waveform at 60 fps during playback.


6b-1. Versions

A version is another way to perform the same song — a two-minute offering arrangement, a run that starts on the chorus, a set without the bridge. The song itself never changes. A version is only a list of pointers into the sections you already have, so the audio, the tempo, the stems and the lyrics all stay exactly where they are.

Open it from the Regions editor menu → Versions….

The list

Original always sits at the top and cannot be deleted or edited. It is the song as recorded — every section, in order — and choosing it is a real answer, not the absence of one.

Below it are your versions. Tap one to hear it: the transport switches to it straight away, so you can play the song while the sheet is open and judge a cut by ear rather than by reading. Nothing is saved until you tap Done; Cancel puts back whatever was playing when you opened the sheet.

Making one

Tap Make another version… and either type what you want in your own words — shorter, start on the chorus, two minutes — and tap Make it, or tap I'll do it myself to start from the whole song and cut it by hand.

When it makes one for you it tells you in a sentence what it did and why. It works from the shape of the song, not from the section names, so it still does something sensible on a song whose sections are unlabelled.

Editing a version

How it starts

Jumping straight into the middle of a record is the thing that sounds wrong — all the instruments arrive at once, at full level, with no lead-in. Smooth the start fixes that in one tap.

It reads the song and shapes the entry for what you are walking into. A chorus arrives: short ramps, everything essentially on the downbeat, because a chorus that swells in for two bars is a chorus that has been apologised for. A verse eases in: the drums and bass come up under the first bar, the keys and pads take longer. The vocals are never touched — they carry the words, and a room waiting for a line it already knows is the one thing this must not cause.

If the version starts where the record starts, it says so and offers nothing. The record's own intro is already the best entry there is.

It also listens for pickup words — the few beats of vocal that begin just before a chorus. If it finds them, playback starts early enough to catch them, with only the voice up for those beats.

Hear the start plays the version from its first section so you can judge the entry itself. Fine-tune each instrument opens the shape as handles you can drag: the left handle sets when an instrument comes in and how far under it starts — drag it past the section line and it comes in early — and the right handle sets how long it takes. Double-tap the right handle for its shape.

The same handles are reachable from the Audio tab, as a How "…" starts row for each version.

How it ends

A version that stops dead on a chorus needs an ending. There is one recommendation and it is almost always the right one: End like the record adds the section the song actually ends with. If a version already ends that way it says so and offers nothing.

Where that is not what you want, Or let the band land it brings the band out one group at a time — the drums stop first and are gone for the final bar, the guitars go half a bar later, and the keys and pads ring right to the end. The vocals are left alone at this end too. A band finishing a song does not all get quieter together, which is why a plain fade never sounds real.

On a song that is a single mixed track there are no instruments to bring out separately, so only End like the record is offered.

Choosing a version for one set

A song can be shortened in one setlist and played whole in another. In the Library → Setlists tab, tap a song in a set and choose:

Make a version… in the same menu takes you to the song's own Versions sheet.

What follows a version

The lyrics follow automatically — they track the playhead, so when a version jumps, the words jump with it. The chord sheet you share follows too: it prints the sections in the order the version plays them, repeats included, and says which version it is whenever that differs from the record.


6c. Lyrics Editor

The Lyrics tab is the central workspace for writing, importing, editing, and projecting song lyrics with optional chord notation. It combines a lyrics editor (left), an optional External Video panel (right), a waveform transport bar (bottom), and a song info header (top).

The lyrics text editor uses a comfortable 18 pt left margin so text starts slightly inset from the left edge, making it easier to read on stage and reducing accidental edge-of-screen taps. This margin applies in both the iPad inline editor and the full-screen editor (iPhone, or an iPad in a narrow Split View) — both opened from the Go Live Editor puck.

The editor sits on a dark panel with rounded corners. (The Go Live lyrics are styled separately — see Lyrics Appearance.)


Song Info Header

Displayed at the top of the lyrics area. Mirrors key fields from the Info tab — edits here show there, and the other way round.

Field Example Editable
TitleHOLY FOREVERYes (tap to edit)
KeyKey: BYes (tap → Key Picker)
TempoTempo: 72 BPMYes (tap to edit)
MIDI IndexPC83@16Yes (tap to edit)

Importing Lyrics

  1. Open the Lyrics tab in the Song Editor.
  2. Tap the ⋯ menu → Import Lyrics.
  3. Paste or type your source text into the text area — or tap Open a File… to load a file.
  4. Tap Import Lyrics.

You are never asked what format your text is in. The moment there is text in the box, the app works it out and shows you a badge — PLAIN, LRC, CHORDPRO or CHORD SHEET — with the line count and one sentence telling you what is about to happen to your words. The badge is a readout, not a control: there is nothing to choose.

The text area is monospaced, so a chord sheet's columns line up on screen exactly as the importer reads them — you can see the alignment is right before you commit.

If the song already has lyrics, importing replaces them. The button says Replace Lyrics and a caution line appears, so it is never a surprise.

After a successful import the lyrics replace the current content and the editor resets to the top of the document.


Sections & Paragraphs

Your song's structure comes across with it. This applies to Plain, ChordPro and Chord Sheet (LRC is timestamped and is never re-laid out).

A full OnSong-style ChordPro export — &color:Label: section tags, inline chords, blank lines between sections — imports with its sections and paragraphs intact, with no clean-up needed afterwards.


Formats It Recognises

These are the four shapes the importer understands. You do not pick between them — it identifies which one you have pasted and tells you. The descriptions below are what each one means for your text.

How it decides, in order — the first match wins:

  1. LRC — a line beginning with a timestamp like [00:12.50], or a standard LRC tag like [ti:] / [ar:] / [offset:]. Timing is the one thing that cannot be recovered later, so it is checked first. Bracket chords such as [Am] and [D/F#] are not mistaken for timestamps.
  2. ChordPro — a {directive} line, an OnSong &color:Label: tag, or a real chord inside square brackets.
  3. Chord Sheet — a line of nothing but chord names sitting directly above a lyric line. A single ambiguous one-letter line is not enough on its own, so ordinary lyrics that happen to start with a line reading A are left alone.
  4. Plain — the fallback, and a safe one: it keeps every line exactly as pasted.

The file name only breaks a tie. If the text itself is inconclusive, a .lrc, .crd / .chords, or .pro / .chordpro / .chopro / .cho / .onsong extension decides. Content always wins over the name — a .txt holding a chord chart is read as a chord sheet.

Plain Text

Plain is raw lyrics with no timestamp codes or chord markup.

Typically: lyrics copied from a website or document that uses no special formatting.


LRC (Timestamped)

LRC is lyrics that scroll automatically in sync with audio.

LRC is a plain-text format where each lyric line is prefixed with a timestamp:

[00:12.50]Amazing grace
[00:16.20]How sweet the sound

Typically: an existing .lrc karaoke file, or pre-timestamped lyrics from a lyric-sync service.


ChordPro

ChordPro is the standard .cho / .chordpro format with inline chord brackets.

Standard ChordPro example:

[G]Amazing [Em]grace, how [C]sweet the [G]sound

ChordPro directives on their own line (e.g. {title:}, {key:}, {comment:}) are recognized:

OnSong / Enhanced ChordPro formatting is also supported:

Chord-only lines: When a ChordPro file contains a line of only chord brackets (no lyric text on that line), those chords are merged onto the next lyric line — producing the correct [G]Amazing [Em]grace form. This handles exporting tools that emit chord lines and lyric lines separately.

Typically: exports from OnSong, Chord!, iRealPro, or any app that saves in .cho or .chordpro format.


Chord Sheet (Chords Over Lyrics)

Chord Sheet is the traditional printed format where chord names appear on a separate line directly above the lyric they belong to:

G       Em    C       G
Amazing grace how sweet the sound

Bar notation lines are also recognized:

|| Em | C | G | D ||

How it works:

Auto mode switch: After a chord sheet is imported, the editor automatically switches to Bracketed chord display mode so the imported chords render correctly inline.

Typically: sheet music transcriptions, chord charts copied from a lyric-chord website, or .crd / .chords files from a music library.


What You'll See

Your source Badge shown What happens to your text
Lyrics from a website or document, no chordsPLAINEvery line kept; a run longer than four lines is split into paragraphs.
Pre-timestamped .lrc karaoke fileLRCTimestamps become lyric timings. Untimed lines are kept where you wrote them; blank lines are not.
App export in .cho / .chordpro / OnSong formatCHORDPROChords stay inline and section tags become labels; other directives are removed.
Printed chord chart or text with chords above lyricsCHORD SHEETChord rows are folded into the line below them.

Section Labels & Region Linking

Lyrics are organized into labeled sections (e.g. Verse 1:, Chorus 1:, Bridge:) that are linked to Regions via the Region's section tag (not the user-editable display name):


Lyrics Tab Header Toolbar

The top-right corner of the Lyrics tab contains a row of quick-access controls displayed to the right of the song info header:

Button Icon / Label Description
Tool buttons🎹 (piano keys), ⊙ (DIN-5 connector), PINInsert chords, capture MIDI, and pin section timestamps while editing. See Editor Toolbar below.
Import Lyrics↓ (down arrow)Opens the Import Lyrics sheet. Paste your words or open a file — Plain, LRC, ChordPro and chord sheets are all recognised automatically.
Projectionsparkles.tvShows or hides the projection settings (audience / stage lyrics look) on the right of the editor, opening straight to the settings over a live preview. Turns orange while open. Switch between Projection and Editor with the two tabs — in the panel, or (on iPad) lifted into the Lyrics header.

Chord Display Modes

Toggle via the [Dm] toggle inside the CHORDS popup (tap the CHORDS button in the header, then tap the [Dm] toggle next to "Display Chords" at the top of the popup):

Mode Example Description
Bracketed (default)LE CA[G#m]NTAN AL CORD[F#add4]EROChord names appear inline inside [brackets]. This is the editing format — chords are always stored this way internally.
Chords Over LyricsChord names stacked on the line above the syllable they belong toThe editor expands each bracketed line into a two-line pair: a chord line on top, the lyric line below. You can edit both lines freely.
Hide ChordsLE CANTANTAN AL CORDEROChord markers are hidden. Only the lyric text is shown and printed. Chords are preserved in storage — switching back to Bracketed or Chords Over restores them.

Chords are always stored internally in Bracketed format. The display mode is a per-session view preference; it never changes the underlying data.

Switching Between Bracketed and Chords Over Lyrics

When you switch from Bracketed to Chords Over, the editor automatically expands every inline chord line into the two-line display (chord line above, lyric line below). You can edit either line freely in this expanded view.

When you switch back from Chords Over to Bracketed, the editor merges each chord/lyric pair back into a single bracketed line — losslessly. Chord column positions are preserved. You can round-trip between the two modes as many times as you like without losing any chord information.

Bar notation lines (|| Em | C | G | D ||) are a special case:

Typing Chords By Hand

If you add a section yourself and type a chord row the way it reads — || Bm ||, or Am G — without brackets, the editor brackets it for you when you tap Done. Your spacing and bar lines are kept exactly as you typed them.

This matters because an un-bracketed chord row is stored as an ordinary lyric line: it isn't styled as a chord, and it is skipped when you transpose the song — so it would stay in the original key while every other chord moved. Bracketing on save keeps a hand-typed chord a real chord.

Nothing changes while you type; the tidy-up happens only when you finish editing. A line is only treated as chords when every word on it is a chord name and there are at least two of them, or it uses bar lines — so a lyric is never mistaken for a chord.

Tip: Import a Chord Sheet file → the mode is automatically set to Bracketed so the imported chords render correctly. From there, if you prefer the chords-above-lyrics layout for editing, simply switch to Chords Over — everything converts cleanly.

Playing Chords In From a Keyboard

Connect a MIDI keyboard and you can put chords into a chart by playing them instead of typing them.

Put the cursor where you want the chord, then play it. Hold the chord and the panel shows what it hears; let go and it lands at the cursor. That is the same path the chord chips and hand-typing use — the keyboard is just another way to name the chord, never a second way to write into the chart.

It reads the chord, not the last note standing. Roll a chord and it still names the chord — everything you touched during the press counts, not only what was left held at the end.

It says so when it is not sure. Most chords arm without comment. Where several names fit the same notes — a diminished seventh has four equally good ones — it arms the best and shows you the others, one tap away. Where there is genuinely nothing to go on, it arms nothing and asks.

One note is a note, not a chord. Press a single key and it shows you the note name and nothing else. Naming it a chord would be claiming a major third you did not play.

Chords are named in the key the song is in, so the spelling matches the rest of your chart rather than arriving as sharps in a flat song.


Key Changes Inside a Song

Some songs lift for the last chorus. You can tell the app where that happens, and every screen that shows chords will follow it.

Press and hold a region in the song editor and choose Key. Pick how far it moves — the menu names the key each choice lands in, so Up a whole step · E rather than a number to work out. From that region onward the chords read in the new key.

Choice What it means
No changeThis section carries on in whatever key is already in force
Back to the written keyEnds an earlier lift — use it on the section where the song comes back down
Up / DownMoves from here on, up or down to five half steps

The region also carries a small key chip showing what it is set to, so you can see at a glance which sections move without opening anything.

Where the change shows up: the Live lyrics, the stage monitor, the editor preview, any phone or tablet following this rig, and a PDF you export. Everywhere a musician reads chords.

Where it does not: the audience screen, which never shows a chord at all.

The key chip at the top of the song does not change. That is the song's written key — what it is filed under and what you transpose from. A number that changed halfway through a song would be one you could not trust. The change shows on the region, and in the chords themselves.

Transposing still works normally. Moving the whole song and a key change inside it are different things and they add up: transpose a song down a step and its lifted chorus still lifts, one step lower.

Exporting: a chart with a key change in it prints in the keys as played. If you want the written key instead, the As played / Original choice in the share sheet still does that.


How Lyrics Sync Works

When audio plays, the app reads each lyric line's timed start and highlights the line whose window contains the current playback position. Syncing happens automatically — no action is required during performance.


Lyrics Editor

The lyrics editor opens as a full-screen text editor when you tap Edit (or tap the pencil icon in the toolbar). It uses a Notes-style scrolling text canvas — the entire song is one continuous document, with section labels rendered in the appropriate colors inline. The top and bottom edges of the editor have a subtle gradient fade for a polished, modern look.

Entering and Exiting Edit Mode

Action Description
Tap Edit / pencil iconOpens the editor. A snapshot of the current lyrics is saved for cancel-revert (see below).
Tap DoneSaves all changes and closes the editor.
Tap CancelReverts all changes made since you opened the editor and closes without saving. The lyrics return to exactly what they were when you tapped Edit.

Cancel is a full revert. It undoes every change made in the current editing session back to the state when you opened the editor — independent of the Undo/Redo stack. Use Cancel when you want to discard an entire editing session; use Undo when you want to step back one change at a time within a session.

Undo / Redo

The lyrics editor maintains a full snapshot-based undo/redo stack independent of the iOS system undo:

Gesture / Button Action
⟵ Undo button in toolbarSteps back one change
Redo button → in toolbarSteps forward one change
⌘Z (hardware keyboard)Undo
⌘⇧Z (hardware keyboard)Redo

How snapshotting works: A snapshot is captured automatically on each meaningful edit (word boundary, punctuation, chord insertion, paste, etc.) — not every single keystroke. This means you can undo a short burst of typing in one step rather than character-by-character.

Cursor stays at the edit position: After an undo or redo, the cursor returns to the location of the change — the document does not jump to the top or the bottom of the text.

Stack is cleared when you close the editor (Done or Cancel) — the undo history does not persist between editing sessions.


Inline Editing

The lyrics editor has no separate edit mode — tap any lyric line to start editing immediately, just like a modern text editor.

Tip: You can build an entire song from only section labels with no lyric lines. The MIDI and Mark buttons (below) work on section labels too, so you can timestamp each section for projection-screen sync.


Editor Toolbar — CHORDS · MIDI · PIN

A three-button strip embedded in the transport bar at the bottom of the Lyrics tab. All three buttons become active whenever a lyric line or a section label has keyboard focus.

Button Action
CHORDS (🎹 piano keys icon)Opens the chord-insert popup. The button uses a pianokeys icon instead of a text label. At the very top of the popup a "Display Chords" row lets you toggle between Bracketed and Chords Over Lyrics display modes — the [Dm] button turns orange for Bracketed and gray for Chords Over. Below that, the "Insert Chords" section lets you choose a root note and modifier to insert a chord at the cursor position. The format depends on the active chord display mode: in Bracketed mode the chord is inserted inline as [G#m]; in Chords Over Lyrics mode the chord is placed on the chord line above the current lyric line at the cursor's column position. The inserted chord immediately renders in the configured chord color. Tapping the keyboard Dismiss button while the picker is open closes both the picker and the keyboard simultaneously. Tap the 🎹 piano keys icon in the top-right corner of the popup to open the MIDI keyboard reference panel. A ‹ back chevron returns you to the chord picker.
MIDI (⊙ DIN-5 connector icon)Toggles MIDI-capture mode. The button uses a custom-drawn circular DIN-5 connector icon (a circle with five dots arranged in a pentagon pattern, matching the face-on appearance of a standard 5-pin MIDI connector). While active, incoming MIDI notes are inserted as chord markers with timestamps on the focused line. The icon highlights in the accent color while capturing.
PIN 📌Toggles Mark Mode — a dedicated timestamping and section-marker mode. While Mark Mode is active, the in-editor overlay shows "TAP A LYRIC SECTION TO SYNC IT WITH AUDIO" on the right side of the strip (icon immediately to the left of the text), with the current playhead time displayed in larger bold monospaced digits at the far right. Tapping any section label stamps the current playhead sample position as its sync point; after a successful stamp the strip briefly flashes "MARKED: [section] AT [time]" in green. These stamps appear immediately in the Lyric Section Marker Banner above the waveform (see Lyric Section Marker Banner below). Long-press the PIN button to delete all markers at once (a confirmation dialog appears).

All three buttons are visually dimmed and non-interactive when no line or label is focused (CHORDS and MIDI).

Section-only songs: Tap a section label, then press PIN to stamp the current playhead position as its sync point. The app will advance from section to section automatically as the audio plays past each timestamp — ideal for projection setups where there are no individual lyric lines.


Lyric Section Marker Banner

The Lyric Section Marker Banner is a horizontal strip above the waveform in the Regions Editor whenever at least one section has been stamped. It is a live, interactive timeline of all your section markers — see Where the Banner Appears.

The banner has one state: full height and interactive. Typing lyrics does not shrink it, and Mark Mode does not change it. Each marker is a tall squared flag (a rounded rectangle) with a short stem pointing down at the waveform.

The banner is hidden entirely when no markers have been created for the song.

Marker Flag Visual Design (full-height mode)

Each marker flag in full-height mode is a rounded rectangle (not a capsule) giving it a distinct, squared look:

Case What you see on the flag
Marker has CUE textTwo lines: CUE text (up to 7 characters, bold) on top · section label (smaller, 70% opacity) below
No CUE textSingle line: section label only

A small white dot indicator appears on the flag when a cue text is set — so you can spot cued markers at a glance even when the flag is narrow.

Marker Interactions

Every gesture works whenever the banner is showing — you do not need Mark Mode active:

Gesture Action
Drag left / rightRepositions the marker along the timeline
TapOpens the marker's audio swap window, for the live Language switch: the lyrics flip at the marker, and this sets how much later the vocal track swaps (0 = together). Step it with − / +, or use Auto-detect gap, Reset this to 0 (swap together), Auto-detect ALL sections and Reset ALL markers' offsets. Tap the marker again to close it.
Double-tapZooms the waveform to the marker; double-tap again to zoom back out
Long-pressWith no regions: opens the cue editor — type a short reminder (e.g. "LEAD IN" or "REPEAT") shown on the chip during performance; Clear empties it and Done saves it. With regions: a delete window instead — Delete, or the trash marked All for every marker.

CUE Text Propagation

When you set or edit cue text on any marker, the same text is automatically applied to the other markers with the same section label and the same paragraph in the current song. For example, editing the cue on the first "Chorus" marker updates the other Choruses — you never have to set the same reminder twice — while the two paragraphs of one verse keep separate cues.

To remove a cue from those markers, clear the cue text field and save — they are all cleared together.

Marker Colors

Each marker flag inherits the section color from the matching Region:

  1. The section label is looked up against the current Region list.
  2. If a matching Region with a color hex is found, that color is used.
  3. If no Region match is found, the color is derived from the section label text using the app's built-in label-to-color mapping.

Where the Banner Appears

View Banner
Regions Editor — the iPad inline editor, and the full-screen editor's Editor tabShown, full height, fully interactive
Lyrics panel and Lyrics tabNot shown — stamp markers there, and edit them in the Regions Editor
MixerNot shown

Go Live shows markers as chips, not as this banner. When a song has section markers but no regions, the Regions module draws the markers in place of region chips — keys with a dashed outline (solid on the current one) and the section's colour as a dot, so they read as markers rather than regions. Tap one to jump the lyrics to that section (and, when the song has audio, the playhead with it).


Lyrics Appearance

The lyrics you read on this device in Go Live are styled in the Device tab of the floating Projection panel. Open the panel with the sparkles.tv key in the Controls module (or ••• → Projection when the Controls module is hidden — see §5.10), then tap Device beside Projection at the top. (With a display connected, the Projection tab shows its resolution instead of its name. On a panel pulled very short the tabs give way to the preview — pull it taller to bring them back.)

Changes take effect immediately. The panel floats over the page, so you can watch the lyrics change behind it. These settings belong to this device's lyrics only — the projected screens have their own (see Section 7). Close the panel with its ✕, or tap the sparkles.tv key again.

The tab has five sections: Typography, Chords, Active Section Highlight, Background and Cue Overlay. Dual-column lyrics are not set here — they have their own key in the Controls module (see Dual-Column Layout).

Typography

Control Range / Options Description
FontClean · Serif · Mono · RoundFont design for all lyrics text. Clean = Avenir Next (geometric sans-serif), Serif = SF Serif, Mono = SF Mono (monospaced), Round = SF Rounded (default). Separate from the editor's own lyric settings
Lyrics16 – 32 ptFont size for lyric lines. Default 29 pt
Chords16 – 32 ptFont size for chord symbols. Default 23 pt
Sections16 – 30 ptFont size for section header text. Default 25 pt
Spacing0.8× – 2.5×Space between lyric lines. 1.0× = default; 1.5× = relaxed; 2.5× = widest

Chords

Setting Options Description
Show ChordsOn · OffShows or hides the chords on your Go Live lyrics. Default on. With chords hidden, the two colour controls below are dimmed
Text ColorOrange, Yellow, Cyan, Mint, Green, Pink, Purple, WhiteColor applied to chord symbol text
BackgroundNone, Amber, Yellow, Teal, Indigo, Rose, DarkOptional filled pill placed behind each chord symbol

Each colour shows as a single swatch — tap it to open the palette.

Active Section Highlight

Controls how the currently-playing section stands out from unplayed sections.

Style Appearance
BG Stripe (default)A soft neutral wash behind the active section's lines
RegionThe active section's lines take the color of the matching Region
CustomThe active section's lines are drawn in a color you pick (a single swatch — tap it for the palette)

When Region or Custom is selected, a Background stripe toggle appears — enable it to combine colored text with the wash.

Section names. Whichever style you choose, the current section's name sits on a neutral pill with the section's colour as a thin bar beside it; every other section shows a quieter name beside a quieter bar. The bar uses a softened stage version of the region's colour — the colour stored in the song never changes.

Two focus aids apply to any of the three styles, and both are on by default. Brighten active turns the lamp up on the current section: the lyrics keep their own colour and simply read brighter and heavier, so a yellow section becomes a brighter yellow rather than turning white, and a white one is already at the top of its travel. Fade others dims every other section so your eye stays on the one you're singing (dimmed sections stay readable); a faded section's chords and name bar turn a quiet neutral rather than a dimmed version of their colour. Both take effect only when the selected section actually has lyrics; with nothing selected, or a selected section that has no lyrics, the lyrics display normally even with the toggles on.

Background

The Lyrics Module Background — what sits behind the words on your Go Live page:

Option What you see
Theme Tint (default)The lyric screen with a light wash of your colour theme's accent over it
NoneThe look's own lyric screen, plain

Whatever the page look, the Lyrics module sits on a dark lyric screen, and the background turns black while a vamp is holding the song — see The Lyric Screen for both. The projected screens have their own backgrounds.

Cue Overlay

Cues drawn over the lyrics themselves — the count-off, the language announcement, and song and section names — so you can take them in without looking away from the words.

This screen only. Each device decides for itself; what you set here changes nothing for anyone else in the building.

Control Range / Options Description
Show On LyricsOn · OffMaster switch (default on). With it off, everything below is greyed out
Count-Off NumbersOn · OffThe beats of a count-off appear over the lyrics as you hear them. Default on
Language AnnouncementOn · OffNames the language you are about to switch into. Default on
Song & Section NamesOn · OffThe spoken song title and section announcements also appear as text. Default on
Size0.6× – 3.0×A multiplier, not a point size — the overlay measures itself against the lyrics panel, so it fits whatever shape that panel is. Default 3.0×
Visibility5% – 100%How solid the overlay is. Default 10% — sheer enough to read the lyrics straight through it. The keyline and backing fade with it, so low really is see-through rather than merely dim
Hold1.0 – 6.0 sHow long an announcement stays on screen. Default 3.0 s
Warn AheadOff · 1 – 4 barsHow far ahead of a language switch its announcement appears. Shown once; arm the switch later than this and it appears on the tap instead. Off means no language announcement. Default 2 bars
PositionBottom · Centre · Left · RightWhere the overlay sits. Left and Right are the top corners, and a short panel always uses one of them. Default Bottom

External Video Panel

Open it with Projection (sparkles.tv) in the editor toolbar. On the wide iPad editor it returns to your last settings/lyrics choice; Lyrics + Mixer returns to that workspace. On iPhone it opens settings over a live preview, and tapping Projection again closes it.

Panel Mode Toggle

A two-segment toggle switches the panel between two modes:

Segment Contents
Projection (default)Live projection preview beside the settings, headed by the Audience / Stage output-target row (see below)
EditorLyrics color palette and typography sliders for the editor workspace — Lyrics (default 24 pt), Chords (default 20 pt), Sections (default 18 pt)

The active segment is highlighted; the inactive segment is dimmed.

iPad — clear destinations in the header. The cyan Lyrics button replaces the left settings/images pane with lyrics, keeping the preview on the right. It then becomes Settings to bring that pane back. The amber Images button opens Region Images; the Projection / Editor pill selects projection settings or editor typography. Labels yield to icons when the toolbar is narrow. Returning from Info, Audio or Lyrics + Mixer preserves your last projection view. Library opens on the left; the preview stays on the right and continues displaying as you open or close Library. Lyrics, Settings and Images each hide Library temporarily and open beside the preview. Editor makes room for its own controls too. Tap the Library button to browse again; your pin and browsing position stay intact.

iPhone — the controls lift into the toolbar. On iPhone, while the projection panel is open the editor toolbar swaps to: a ✕ that closes the whole panel (back to the lyrics editor), the Projection / Editor pill (only the active mode shows its word — the inactive one is icon-only), the photo.on.rectangle.angled images button, and a Mixer button (slider.vertical.3) that jumps straight to the mixer panel. In portrait the settings sit on top with a small live preview pinned below; in landscape they sit side by side — settings on the left, preview on the right.

Output Target — Audience & Stage

The live projection preview — a real-time scaled-down mirror of the actual projection screen — always stays on screen beside the settings. Pinned at the top of the settings pane, an output-target row never scrolls away:

The Audience / Stage choice persists as you navigate and across launches. On iPad the chips carry icons: Audience uses person.3, Stage uses music.mic.

The virtual canvas is automatically sized to match the detected resolution of your connected TV or monitor (e.g. 3840×2160 for a 4K display). When no external display is connected, it defaults to 1920×1080. All projection settings are reflected in the preview in real time as you adjust any control.

Swipe to Navigate Sections

Swipe left or right on the preview to jump between sections without leaving the Lyrics editor:

Gesture Action
Swipe leftAdvance to the next section (seek forward)
Swipe rightGo back to the previous section (seek backward)

A pair of ‹ › arrow buttons at the bottom corners of the preview also trigger section navigation with a tap.

The preview's top-left chevron opens Apply to Setlist: select Theme, Overlay and/or Bg Clip, then tap the destination setlist's name. It works the same as the Live preview.


Region Images — Inline Picker

Tap the photo.on.rectangle.angled images button beside the Projection / Editor pill to swap the settings for the Region Images picker — the live preview stays alongside (on iPhone portrait the picker sits on top with the preview below). Tap the button again to return to the settings.

The picker lists every region with its Top Layer and BG Layer slots, plus the On-Demand Top Layers grid — see Per-Region Projection Images for how the slots work.

The ••• menu on the Region Images header row holds:

Section Controls
GlobalBG Layers and Top Layers toggles — master switches for every song. Turning BG Layers off hides all region background videos and images everywhere (the song background or theme shows instead); turning Top Layers off shows the lyrics in place of any region's top-layer image.
This SongRemove BG Layers / Remove Top Layers — strip that media from every region in the current song (asks to confirm). These appear only when at least one region carries media.

Song Settings Tab

Per-song projection settings — these are stored with the song and change from song to song.

Setting Description
Lyrics ColorAudience lyrics text color. When set, overrides the global lyrics color for this song only
Background ColorSolid background color behind lyrics. When set, overrides the global background color for this song only
Background MediaSelect a video clip or image from your media library as the audience projection background
Overlay EffectsSemi-transparent visual effects layered on top of the background: None, Fade, Vignette, Focus, Pinstripe, Vintage, Grunge (see Overlays)
Auto AdvanceAutomatically advance to the next section after a set number of seconds (0 = off)

Global Settings Tab

App-wide audience projection settings shared across every song.

Section Controls
Lyrics ColorDefault audience lyric text color — used when a song has no per-song lyrics color
Background ColorDefault background color — used when a song has no per-song background color
LayoutHorizontal alignment (Left / Center / Right), vertical alignment (Top / Middle / Bottom), margins (Compact / Normal / Wide), maximum lines per section
TypographyLyrics font size (24–120 pt), font multiplier, line spacing
Text EffectsStroke width, drop-shadow radius
LyricsFont design (Clean / Serif / Mono / Round), adjust-to-fit toggle, remove extraneous options (hyphens, spaces, symbols)
BackgroundBackground fill mode — Fit / Stretch / Zoom
TransitionsSection-change animation style (Opacity / Slide / Scale / Blur) and speed slider
Lyrics ProjectionToggle Auto-Project Lyrics on or off (see §7 for details)

Stage Tab

Global settings that control what musicians see on a stage monitor or confidence display:

Section Controls
Lyrics ColorMonitor lyric text color
Background ColorStage monitor background color
TypographyLyrics font size, font multiplier, chord font size, section label font size, line spacing
OptionsShow Chords toggle, text alignment, stack mode (Push / Overlap / Underlap), waveform overlay (Off / Top / Bottom)

All Global Settings are shared with Go Live. Changing a value here updates the audience projection and the Go Live Projection panel immediately — they are the same settings.

Colour swatches — tap to open. To save space, every Lyrics Color and Background Color control (on all three tabs) shows a single round swatch of the current colour on its title line. Tap the swatch to open the palette — preset colours plus a custom colour wheel; pick one and tap away to close. Per-song (Song tab) colours also include a Use Global swatch that clears the per-song colour so the song follows your global look. The Intro Slide's Letterbox backdrop colour works the same way (it expands in place).

For complete projection behaviour see Section 7 — External Lyrics Display.


Waveform & Transport Bar

A compact waveform strip pinned at the bottom of the screen (extending to the physical screen edge below the home indicator). It is the same bar across the editor (see the note below). Contains:

Keyboard-aware: When the software keyboard opens for text editing, the bar docks flush against the top of the keyboard as a compact rail (animated with the keyboard's own curve): the waveform collapses away, leaving a 44 pt Start / Stop button (green ▶ / red ⏹, same action as the full-size button) at the left and a slim region-strip timeline on a gray track filling the rest of the row. The strip's full row height is a scrub surface — drag anywhere along it to scrub the song and lift your finger to seek there — and it shows whether or not the song has regions. The bar drops back to the physical screen edge the instant the keyboard begins to dismiss — no lag or stutter in either direction.

Region section markers shown as colored blocks in the waveform. Tapping a block scrolls the lyrics editor to the matching section and glides the active-section highlight into position.

This is the same transport bar shown across the editor — the iPhone editor's Info, Lyrics, and Tracks tabs, and the iPad inline editor. The START / STOP button in every location controls the same shared audio engine.


6d. Audio Editor Tools

Audio Editor tools work on the same waveform surface you use for region editing — trim and fade handles, beat grid alignment, range-select cuts, and a full audio tracks panel below. On iPad they live in the Regions ••• menu; on iPhone the equivalent tools live on the Tracks and Editor tabs.


Activating the Audio Editor Tools

On iPad, open the ••• menu above the waveform and choose a tool (Trim & Fade, Beat Align, Range Select, or Tracks) — plus, for songs whose tempo changes, the variable-tempo tools (see Variable Tempo (Tempo Map)). The toolbar switches to those audio-editing controls on the same waveform; close the tool to return to standard region editing.

On iPhone, use the Tracks tab to manage the track list, and the Editor tab for the waveform trim / fade / beat-align / cut tools described below.

Visual indicators while the audio tools are open:


Reaching the track list from the Lyrics/Info panel (iPad)

On iPad you don't have to open the audio tools just to manage tracks. The editor's Lyrics/Info panel header — alongside the Projection and Song Info buttons — also carries a Tracks button (waveform icon). Tap it to reveal the audio track list inline, in place of the lyrics preview:

This is the quickest way to add or rename stems, or change the global Order, while you keep working on lyrics. For trim, fade, beat alignment, and pitch, use the full audio tools described below.


Audio Editor Toolbar

When the audio tools are open, the right side of the inspector bar shows a connected group of audio-editing buttons (joined by short visual lines):

Button Icon Description
Beat Alignruler.fillActivates Beat Align mode (amber when active). See Beat Align Mode below.
Zoom +plus.magnifyingglassZooms the waveform in by 1.5×, centered on the playhead.
Zoom −minus.magnifyingglassZooms the waveform out by 1.5×, centered on the playhead.
Song Cuesmic.fillOpens the Song Cues recording panel — record custom spoken cue marks directly in the app.
Normalizewaveform.path.badge.checkmark(Coming soon — currently disabled.)
Range Select / CutsscissorsActivates Range Select mode (teal when active). Use to select a range of audio for time-deletion or muting. See Range Select & Cuts below.

Trim & Fade Handles

When the Trim & Fade tool is open — or whenever you tap the Audio tab — four drag handles appear as translucent overlays on the waveform:

Handle Position What it controls
Trim StartLeft edge of the audioWhere playback begins — audio before this point is silent
Trim EndRight edge of the audioWhere playback ends — audio after this point is silent
Fade In EndInside the trim start regionThe point where the fade-in ramp reaches full volume
Fade Out StartInside the trim end regionThe point where the fade-out ramp begins

How to use:

  1. Open the Trim & Fade tool — the trim and fade handles appear immediately on the waveform.
  2. Drag any handle left or right to adjust its position. The change is previewed in real time during playback.
  3. Changes are committed when you lift your finger from a handle.
  4. All trim and fade adjustments support Undo / Redo (⌘Z / ⌘⇧Z).

Fade curve shapes: Long-press a fade handle to cycle through Linear, Logarithmic, Exponential, and S-Curve shapes. The selected shape is reflected visually in the fade region.

Persistence: Trim and fade settings are saved immediately when you release a handle. They survive tab switches, app restarts, and device restarts.

Tip: You can also set trim and fade values numerically using the Song Trimming controls in the Audio Editor's scrollable settings panel (below the waveform).

Audio-tab header. Tapping the Audio tab also switches the panel header to the audio tools — a Language default-language picker, Order and Theme preset buttons, and Add Tracks.


Per-Track Fade & Silence (Tracks tab)

Trim & Fade above shapes the whole song. You can also shape each track on its own from the Tracks tab, where every instrument and vocal shows its own mini-waveform. Unlike Trim, this is a volume envelope, not a cut — the "silenced" parts are muted and the fades ramp that track's gain, but the track still plays its full length and stays perfectly in sync (song length, VAMP, and SEGUE are untouched).

Four handles sit on each track's waveform:

Handle What it does
Silence-until bracket (left)Mutes the track from the start up to this point
Silence-after bracket (right)Mutes the track from this point to the end
Fade-in dot (left)Ramps the track up from silence over this span
Fade-out dot (right)Ramps the track down to silence over this span

The rest of the track row. Each row also gives you, inline: a color swatch; the track name (tap to rename); Solo / Mute; a language chip (assign the track's language, or N/A); and a P badge on percussive tracks.


Beat Align Mode

Beat Align Mode lets you manually align the song's beat grid — the relationship between audio sample positions and bar/beat numbers. Use it when the metronome drifts because a song's downbeat is offset from sample 0, or when the song was recorded at a slightly different tempo than what was set in the Info tab.

Activating Beat Align Mode

Tap the ruler (ruler.fill) button in the Audio Editor toolbar. An amber border appears around the waveform and a Beat Align banner slides in above it.

Beat Align Banner

Control Description
BEAT ALIGN labelAmber text confirming the mode is active
−0.1 stepperDecreases the draft BPM by 0.1
BPM readoutShows the current draft BPM (e.g. 127.0 BPM). Turns amber when it differs from the original value.
+0.1 stepperIncreases the draft BPM by 0.1
"Drag ♩1 to align" hintInstruction to drag the beat-1 marker on the waveform to set the offset
DiscardExits Beat Align mode and reverts all draft BPM and offset changes
DoneCommits the draft BPM and beat grid offset to the song permanently. Exits Beat Align mode.

Aligning the Beat Grid

  1. Activate Beat Align mode.
  2. Drag the ♩1 (beat 1) marker on the waveform to the exact sample position where the first musical downbeat lands. The grid lines shift visually as you drag.
  3. (Optional) Tap −0.1 / +0.1 to fine-tune the tempo if the grid drifts later in the song.
  4. Tap Done to commit, or Discard to cancel all changes.

Why this matters: An accurate beat grid is required for snap-to-grid region editing, the Built-in Vamp, and for the metronome to fire on the correct downbeat during live performance. If the metronome feels slightly early or late, Beat Align mode is the right tool.


Variable Tempo (Tempo Map)

Beat Align Mode lines up a single steady grid. For songs that don't hold one speed — they speed up, slow down, or drift — the variable-tempo tools build a grid that follows the song. They live in the same waveform editor tools menu (the three-dots ••• button above or beside the waveform); that button turns teal whenever a grid mode is active. These tools tell the app when the song's tempo changes and where bar 1 really sits. See Variable (Adaptive) Tempo for how the grid and metronome then track the song live.

Detect Variable Tempo — analyzes the song for tempo changes and builds a following ("staircase") beat grid. While it runs it reads Detecting Variable Tempo… and is disabled. When it finishes, a Variable Tempo summary appears:

The remaining items appear only after a variable-tempo map exists for the song:

After a correction (Detect, Halve, Double, or Move Bar 1), the Variable Tempo summary offers Update Region(s) when some regions no longer land on the changed grid — it re-aligns them; Not Now leaves them, and Re-snap N Regions to Grid stays in the ••• tools menu for later. The song's Built-in Vamp is re-made on the new grid automatically, whichever you tap.

Where these controls live can shift between builds and between iPhone and iPad. Look for them in the waveform editor's ••• tools menu; the tempo-correction items only show up once a song already has a variable-tempo map.


Range Select & Cuts

Range Select mode lets you select a portion of the waveform and apply a time-delete or mute operation — for example, to cut a false start, silence a noise spike, or remove dead air from the middle of a track.

Activating Range Select Mode

Tap the scissors (scissors) button in the Audio Editor toolbar. A teal border appears around the waveform.

First-time warning: The first time you activate Range Select mode, a confirmation dialog explains that time-delete operations are non-destructive and stored as metadata — your original audio file is never modified. Tap OK to proceed. The dialog does not appear again.

Selecting and Cutting a Range

  1. Drag on the waveform to draw a selection (highlighted in teal).
  2. When a selection is active, action buttons appear:
    • Time Delete — marks the selected range as a cut. During playback the audio skips over the cut region as if the material were physically removed. No audio file is changed.
    • Mute Range — marks the selected range as muted. The audio plays normally but that segment is silenced.
  3. Existing cuts are shown as overlays on the waveform. Tap a cut overlay to reveal a Restore button that removes the cut.
  4. Cuts are saved immediately and persist across app restarts.

Tap the scissors button again (or tap outside the selection) to exit Range Select mode.

Non-destructive: All cuts and mutes are stored as metadata. You can restore any cut at any time by tapping it on the waveform and choosing Restore. The original audio is always preserved.


Audio Tracks Panel (Bottom Panel)

When the audio tools are open, the bottom panel switches from the lyrics preview to the Audio Tracks panel. It lists all audio stems for the current song and lets you manage them without leaving the waveform view.

Track Rows

Each track is shown as a collapsible row:

Press and hold a row for its actions:

Action What it does
Replace AudioOpen the replacement review with this track selected. Choose one file, or several, while keeping track names, levels, routing and settings.
Split Click & CuesOffered on any stereo track. Splits a file that carries the click on one side and spoken cues on the other into two separate mono tracks — Click and Cues — each with its own fader. Both stay on the Click & Cues bus. The track is checked first, and if it isn't really two different signals it is left alone and nothing changes.
Delete TrackRemove the track from the song.

Songs you already have. A file like that is split for you when you import it. Use Split Click & Cues for a song already in your library — one press-and-hold per song. It's only worth reaching for on a track that really is a click one side and cues the other; on anything else the app will tell you it left it alone.

Replace several audio tracks

Open Audio Files → Replace Audio… in the Audio Tracks panel header. Select the replacement files together in Files, review which track each file will replace, then tap Replace. Audio Files → Add Tracks… adds tracks without replacing any. Pressing and holding a track still offers the single-track entry to the same review.

Replacements preserve regions, lyrics, paragraph markers and timing, and rebuild the waveform display. Files with a different sample rate are converted to the song's existing rate to preserve those positions. If the lengths differ, confirm that the existing timing should be kept; the audio still needs the same musical starting point. Cancel leaves the song unchanged. New files never overwrite audio shared with another song, even when their filenames match.

Use this entry after editing stems elsewhere, rather than overwriting files in the app's folder through Files: it updates the song and its waveforms together. If the song is playing, its audio reload waits until playback can safely reload it.

Track Order

Tracks are ordered by the global Order preset — see Order (Global Track Ordering) below — by their bus, the same way in the Audio tab, the mixers and the Go Live Performance Grid. There is no per-row drag in the Audio tab, and no per-song arrangement anywhere (the Performance Grid has no edit mode): to change the arrangement, edit the Order preset.

Order (Global Track Ordering)

The Order button in the Audio Tracks panel header (up/down-arrows icon, next to Theme and Audio Files) sets the left-to-right order of the buses — and so of the tracks on them — across the mixers, the Go Live Performance Grid, and this track list. Order is a global setting: it is the only order there is.

Tapping Order opens the Track Order window directly:

The Built-in Default is never changed. Drag anything while it is selected and the drag starts your own order instead — a new preset (My Order, or Order 2 and so on) appears, selected, with its name field. With all three preset slots full, the drag is refused and the window says so.

How the scope works: Arranging updates the current song and new songs at once. Apply to all songs re-sorts every other song in the library under this order — nothing is deleted, because a song has no order of its own to lose.

Expanded Track Properties

Tapping a track row reveals its full property panel:

Property Description
NameEdit the track's display name. Shown in the Mixer channel strip header.
ColorTrack color comes from the colour group of the track's bus, set in the Theme window — it is not a per-track setting.
LanguageAssign a stem to a language in a multilingual song, or leave it neutral.
Fade / SilenceAdjust the track's start/end silence and fades on its waveform.

Theme (Track Colors)

Track colors are set by colour group, not per track. Tap the Theme button in the Audio Tracks panel header (paint-palette icon, next to Order) to open the Themes window. Every track is colored by the group its bus belongs to — five groups:

Group Buses Default color
RhythmDrums, Percussion, Loops, Bass — so the Built-in Vamp tooOrange
InstrumentsPiano, Keys, Lead Guitar, Electric Guitars, Acoustic GuitarsPurple
VocalsVocalsTeal
UtilityClick, Cues and the MetronomeBlue
OtherStrings, Horns, Auxiliary and Soundtrack — and so anything that lands on AuxiliaryGrey

The Themes window has three tiers:

  1. Theme selector — a Default theme (built-in) plus up to 3 of your own, and a + to create one. Selecting a theme applies it everywhere.
  2. Group chips — tap Rhythm / Instruments / Vocals / Utility / Other to choose which group you're recoloring. A preview banner shows the group's name, swatch, and members.
  3. Palette — tap a color to assign it to the selected group. Changes save automatically and repaint the mixer strips, the colour edge on Performance Grid tiles, and track rows instantly.

The Built-in Default is read-only — tap + to create an editable theme (seeded from the current colors). Your own themes get a name field and a Delete theme button; deleting one reverts to the Built-in Default.

Colors are global. A theme applies to every song — there is no per-song or per-track color.

Minimal styles leave the group colours out: With the compact mixer's style set to Minimal (Settings → General → Compact Mixer → Style), its strips and bus cards drop their colour line and their coloured labels. With Tile style set to Minimal (Settings → General → Tiles), Performance Grid tiles drop their colour edge. The colours you set here are kept, and come back with Vivid.


Song Cues Panel

Tap the mic (mic.fill) button in the Audio Editor toolbar to open the Song Cues panel — a sheet for recording custom spoken cue annotations tied to sample positions.

(Full Song Cues documentation will be added in a future update.)


Pitch

Controls pitch transposition for the entire song. This control is accessible by scrolling the Audio Editor panel below the waveform.

Control Description
Transpose sliderShifts the pitched music buses by −12 to +12 semitones. Whole-number values only.
Shift Chords toggleWhen on, the chord symbols shown in the Lyrics tab are transposed to match the new key.

Audio transpose follows bus routing. Every track on a pitched music bus follows the song's transpose. The Drums, Percussion and Loops buses keep their recorded pitch; click and cues also stay unchanged. Tracks sharing a bus cannot opt out individually. Processing the grouped tracks together avoids a separate pitch processor on every stem.


Song Trimming

Defines where playback starts and ends, and shapes the fade-in and fade-out envelopes. These numeric controls mirror the Trim & Fade Handles on the waveform — changes made in either place are immediately reflected in the other.

Control Description
Trim StartWhere playback begins (m:ss.ms). Audio before this point is skipped.
Trim EndWhere playback ends. Audio after this point is not played.
Fade In DurationLength of the fade-in ramp (0–30 seconds).
Fade In CurveShape of the fade-in envelope — Linear, Logarithmic, Exponential, or S-Curve.
Fade Out DurationLength of the fade-out ramp (0–30 seconds).
Fade Out CurveShape of the fade-out envelope — same options as Fade In.

All sliders have a Reset button.


Landscape Layout (iPad)

On iPad in landscape orientation (regular-width size class), the Pitch and Song Trimming sections are displayed side by side in two equal columns, making efficient use of the extra horizontal space. The Audio Tracks panel always spans the full width.


How Audio Settings Connect to the Mixer

Changes made with the audio tools are reflected live in the Mixer:

These syncs happen automatically in the background. No need to close and reopen the Mixer.

7. External Lyrics Display

Vessa Rig can project lyrics on a second screen — a TV, projector, or external monitor connected to your iPad or Mac. You can also connect that screen to a second device following the rig over the network; see Using More Than One Device.

Automatic Projection (Lyrics Projection)

By default, Vessa Rig automatically takes over any connected external display and projects your lyrics the moment a screen is detected — no button tap required. The projection service runs as a persistent singleton: external display detection and auto-projection stay active for the whole session. Opening the Song Editor or the Pro Mixer does not interrupt an active projection — lyrics keep projecting seamlessly until you disconnect the display or manually disable the setting.

This behaviour is controlled by the Lyrics Projection setting:

Projection settings (sparkles.tv) → Audience → Global → Lyrics Projection → Auto-Project Lyrics

Setting Location
Open the projection settings — the sparkles.tv button (in the editor's Lyrics header, or the Controls module in Go Live)Opens the projection settings panel
In the output-target row, tap Audience, then its Global pillShows the audience's global projection settings
Scroll to the bottom — Lyrics Projection sectionToggle Auto-Project Lyrics on or off

Alternatively (Go Live): Tap the sparkles.tv key in the Controls module (or ••• → Projection when that module is hidden) to open the floating Projection panel → Projection tab → Audience → Global → scroll to Lyrics Projection → toggle Auto-Project Lyrics. The panel is non-modal — all controls behind it remain interactive.

Tip: If you need to screencast or mirror your display for a rehearsal video or tutorial, simply open the Projection settings (Audience → Global) and turn Auto-Project Lyrics off before connecting your display or screen-sharing.

Manual Setup (if Auto-Projection is off)

  1. Connect an external display via HDMI, USB-C, or AirPlay.
  2. Turn Auto-Project Lyrics back on in the Projection settings (Audience → Global, bottom of the page).
  3. The external display switches to a full-screen black background with large white lyrics.

Before the Show — Connecting the Screen

Which device should drive the screen? Best first:

  1. A second device. If a second iPad is already following the rig — for a singer's lyrics, say — connect the projector or Apple TV to that device. The rig is left to play music, and a problem with the screen can never touch the sound. See Using More Than One Device.
  2. A cable from the rig (HDMI or USB-C), following the routine below.
  3. AirPlay from the rig to an Apple TV. Your mic effects, click and interface keep working, but the screen now depends on Wi-Fi: if the Apple TV sleeps or the network drops, the lyrics leave the screen and the rig has to change its audio setup mid-set. Start Screen Mirroring before the first song, while nothing is playing, and keep Send audio to displays off.

If the rig drives the screen by cable:

  1. Connect everything first — interface, power and the display cable — and turn the projector on, set to the right input.
  2. Then open Vessa Rig. If it was already open, swipe it away in the app switcher and reopen it.
  3. Check Settings → Hardware → Routing → Send audio to displays is off (the default). The screen gets the lyrics; your interface keeps the sound.
  4. Check before the first song: play a few seconds and listen on every output, unmute your mic and hear its effects, and confirm the lyrics are on the screen. If an orange warning appears under Send audio to displays, sort it out before you start.
  5. Leave the cable alone during the set. If it comes out, wait until the song has ended and playback is stopped before plugging it back in.

Plugging in or unplugging a screen while music plays can make the iPad reset its audio outputs mid-song. Connecting everything before you open the app means that happens once, before there is any sound to interrupt.

Tip: Many projectors, video switchers and HDMI extenders briefly disconnect when they are turned off or switched to another input — to the iPad, that is the same as pulling the cable. Ask the booth not to power-cycle the projector or change its input during the set, or put an HDMI splitter or EDID emulator between the iPad and the venue's system to hold the connection.

Detected Display Resolution

The app automatically detects the native resolution of your connected TV or monitor. No manual configuration is needed:

How It Looks

Interaction Lock

There is nothing to switch on or off here. The projected screen is display-only: it never responds to touch, a mouse or a trackpad, so nothing on it can be clicked by accident during a show. Everything you control happens on the device itself.

Lyric Display Themes

A Lyric Display Theme is a one-tap look for the projected lyrics — a bundled font, all-caps styling, a size rhythm (a large hero line with supporting lines that varies from section to section), and a gradient background. Themes apply per song and only to the audience screen; your stage monitor keeps its own look. Pick one from the Theme menu at the top of the projection settings (Audience → Song):

Theme Look
Global FontThe house look — your global projection appearance (font, colour, size). No theme styling.
KnockoutEditorial — hero lines sit in a light panel with the background showing through the letters; smaller supporting lines beneath.
Kinetic ScalePure size rhythm — big hook lines with the key word in amber, small dimmed tail lines. No boxes.
Slab BannerThe hero line rides a solid amber bar (dark text); smaller lines are plain light lead-ins.
Emphasis MixThe "lyric-video" look — light, centred lines all the same size, with the key word heavy and amber.
EmberCalm warm option — amber gradient.
ClassicCalm cool option — indigo gradient with a vignette.

A theme's gradient background shows unless the song or region has its own background clip, which overrides it. Assigning a theme never changes your global settings — clearing it returns the song to Global Font.

Size & Energy

Two per-song sliders under the Theme menu tune how a theme sizes the lyrics:

Both are saved per song.

Projection Fonts & Text Effects

Backgrounds — Image or Video

Each song can carry an audience-projection background — a still image or a muted, looping video clip — drawn behind the lyrics, chosen from the shared clip library:

Video backgrounds play muted and loop seamlessly, on a video-only layer that never touches the backing-track audio — so a clip can't duck or interrupt your music. Under sustained heat the app automatically pauses the video and falls back to the solid background colour to protect playback, resuming when the device cools. A Bg Video toggle (in the Media section header of the Projection settings) switches video backgrounds off app-wide if you ever want stills only.

Transparent video: a foreground video with a see-through background (e.g. animated lyrics laid over a clip) must be HEVC with alpha (.mov / .mp4) or ProRes 4444 — "transparent WebM" (VP9) will not play on iOS.

The Intro Slide

The Intro Slide is a per-song image or muted video clip shown to the audience while a song is loaded but not yet playing — a title card, a "Welcome" slide, or an announcement. The moment the song starts (or you tap a section) the lyrics take over and the Intro Slide disappears; it does not return until the song is reloaded. Pick one with the Intro Slide button in the Media section (the Intro button in the Go Live panel); the picker has two tabs — This Song and a shared Shared library.

Once an Intro Slide is set, a small button beside it shows the current fill mode (Fill by default) and opens the Intro Slide options:

Overlays

A per-song overlay is a single static layer composited over the background, below the lyrics — it improves legibility without dimming the words:

Overlay Effect
NoneNo overlay.
FadeLight top, dark bottom — a bed for lyrics near the lower third.
VignetteDarkens toward the edges and corners.
FocusThe opposite — darker in the centre (behind the lyrics), clear at the edges.
PinstripeFine embossed diagonal ridges with an edge fade.
VintageAged film look — scratches, grain, edge darkening.
GrungeSubtle weathered stipple.

Note: overlays darken, so they read only over a coloured or media background — they are invisible over pure black.

Per-Region Projection Images

Beyond the song-level background and Intro Slide, you can assign projected media to individual regions, so it appears exactly when that region plays — like lyrics. Open the Projection Images panel from the photo button (photo.on.rectangle.angled) — in the editor it sits in the projection panel's header beside the Projection / Editor pill and swaps the settings pane for the picker (tap it again to return); in Go Live it sits beside the Projection | Device selector at the top of the Projection panel and opens the picker as a sheet. Each region row has two slot buttons (a set slot shows the clip's thumbnail and name, with an ✕ to clear it):

Slot What it does
BG LayerA video clip or still image shown behind that region's lyrics (overrides the song background for that region).
Top LayerAn image or video that replaces that region's lyrics and composites over the background. Use a transparent PNG (or an HEVC-alpha video) to let the background show through. A "Hides lyrics" badge marks a region with a Top Layer; a Fit / Fill control appears beneath it.

The ⋯ menu at the top collects the layer switches and the clean-up actions:

A video layer that can't play (paused under heat) falls back gracefully — a BG Layer to the solid background colour, a Top Layer to the lyrics — never a blank screen. A region carrying projected media also shows a hatch pattern, a photo glyph, and an accent line on its timeline block, so you can see at a glance which regions have visuals.

On-Demand Top Layers

On-Demand Top Layers are images or videos you fire by hand from the Top Layers module in Go Live during a performance — not tied to any region. In the Projection Images panel, tap Add and choose the scope:

Each tile shows its thumbnail, name, and scope. Tap a top layer to edit it — rename it, reset the name to the file name, or delete it. (Renaming only changes the label shown here and in the Top Layers module; the media file is untouched.)

Firing a top layer in Go Live

The Top Layers module shows this song's on-demand layers and your Persist Across Songs ones as a grid of thumbnails, each with its name underneath and a thin line separating it from its neighbours. The module has no title bar — the tiles say what it is.

A fired top layer is always on top

What you tap here is the last thing painted on the audience screen. It sits above the background, above a region's own top layer, and above the intro slide — so you can put something over the picture that is already showing without disturbing it. Because it composites rather than replaces, a transparent PNG or an alpha video shows whatever is underneath through its clear areas.

If the picture can't be found — the file was moved or deleted, or a video can't play because the iPad is too hot — the screen keeps showing what it was showing. Firing a top layer can never blank the audience screen.

A "Persist Across Songs" top layer stays up when you change song, which is what its name promises: use it for a welcome slide or a logo that spans the whole set, and tap the ✕ key on the Top Layers module when you want it gone. A "For This Song" top layer clears itself as soon as you move to another song, so nothing bleeds from one song into the next.

The projection preview — in the editor's External Video Panel and in the Go Live Projection panel — shows a fired top layer too, so you can check what the room is seeing without looking at the projector.

Top layers are for the audience screen. The Stage target stays on the words, because a stage monitor is there so the musicians can read their lyrics.

Deleting Clips Is Reference-Safe

Because one clip can back many regions, songs, and top layers, deleting it from a picker checks where it's used first. If it's assigned somewhere, a confirmation tells you exactly where — "used in this song and 2 other songs" or "your “Every song” top layers" — with Delete Everywhere or Cancel. Confirming removes it cleanly from every place that used it, so no song is left pointing at missing media; a clip that's used nowhere is deleted without a prompt.

Where These Projection Settings Live

Every projection control appears in both places, kept in sync:

Both show the same output-target row — an Audience chip carrying Song | Global sub-views, plus a separate Stage chip — and a live preview of the projected screen. Per-region visuals and on-demand top layers are edited in the Projection Images panel — the same photo button in both places (in the editor it swaps in beside the preview; in Go Live it opens as a sheet).


8. EQ (Equalizer)

Vessa Rig includes a parametric EQ applied to the song bus (master mix output).

EQ Controls

The EQ editor shows a visual frequency curve graph with draggable control points:

Band Type Description
Low ShelfBoosts or cuts all frequencies below the shelf frequency
High ShelfBoosts or cuts all frequencies above the shelf frequency
Peak / BellBoosts or cuts a narrow band at the center frequency

For each band:

Accessing the EQ

EQ is Per-Song

Each session (song) stores its own EQ settings. Changes to one song's EQ do not affect any other song.


9. Mixer

The Mixer is a full-featured performance mixer for controlling your tracks during a show.

Performance optimized: Like Go Live, the Mixer automatically suspends background processing to dedicate maximum resources to audio playback and real-time mixing. Use it during live performance for the best responsiveness.

9.0 The Console

On an iPad window big enough, the Pro Mixer is this console: the 13-inch iPad in landscape and in portrait, and the 11-inch iPad in landscape. On the 11-inch the faders are shorter (about 190 pt of travel, against about 390 on the 13-inch); every other row keeps its size. Everywhere else — the 11-inch in portrait, a Split View half, a small Stage Manager window and the iPhone — the Pro Mixer is the compact mixer (the one the Live page's Mixer panel draws) under the console's header keys and over the console's timeline tray: see §9.13.

What it shows (CHANNELS):

What it shows (OUTPUTS) — the same scale, bays and strips, your live inputs first, then the buses:

The header is two rows. Row 1: CHANNELS | OUTPUTS, then MUTE GROUPS and six keys — an empty group is a dim outline, a group with channels shows a dot per channel, a muting group is red with a crossed speaker; tap to mute or unmute — and the ✕ that closes the console. Row 2: MIX (the Save Mix menu), your snapshots and +, the language key, an overview strip, CLEAR SOLO, the RAMP tag and PERFORM | SETUP. A recalled snapshot keeps its name, lit and ringed in blue, with ↺ (tap it again for the saved mix; hold a snapshot to Overwrite, Rename or Delete it). The overview strip appears on CHANNELS when the strips run past the screen: a bar per bay in its family colour and a frame where you are — tap a place to jump there. CLEAR SOLO appears while anything is soloed; its place is kept, so nothing moves. On a narrower screen row 2 folds in a fixed order — RAMP becomes a lamp on SETUP, the overview narrows, CLEAR SOLO becomes a headphones key, the language key shows only its target, MIX becomes its icon — and nothing is shrunk or cut; the close is never folded away.

The OUTPUTS bay, pinned at the right: C&C, MAIN 2, SONG and MASTER as full faders on the channels' scale, each with an M key. C&C has MONO; MAIN 2 has SPLIT (Main ↔ Cue split, ◀ when on) or MONO on a multi-output interface; SONG and MASTER have EQ (±6 dB). Status words: ← SPLIT / → SPLIT; 🔒 DESK while the desk mixer holds MAIN 2 (its fader then has no cap and shows no value, and nothing on the console changes its level); AUDIENCE OFF (amber) on SONG while your tracks are not going to the audience. Hold an output anywhere except around its cap for Reset to 0 dB, Output port… (C&C and MAIN 2, multi-output) and, on SONG, Tracks to audience. Double-tap a cap for 0 dB; double-tap the small value for 0 dB (not with Hold faders on). A level stored below −40 dB keeps its level: its cap rests at the bottom, its value shows e.g. −50.0 ▾, a resting finger never moves it (move the cap 2 pt or more), and the console says once each time it opens that it stays there until you move it.

The MASTER crown on top of the bay: DYN GR with gain-reduction gauges GLUE LO LM HM HI (the compressor) and LIM (the limiter). COMP OFF means switched off; NOT RUNNING means on but not running. OVER turns red and reads CLIPPED after an over — tap to clear. Tap the crown to open the compressor in the bottom tray (the chevron flips); tap again, or Start, to close it.

The timeline tray runs along the bottom (PERFORM):

PERFORM | SETUP. The key at the top right, beside the close button, turns the bottom band into the SETUP deck; PERFORM turns it back. Under every strip, lined up with it and scrolling with it, are three keys:

On OUTPUTS, SETUP has three rows, IN · EQ · OUT: a mic's input list, EQ (±6 dB) for V·PAD, V·KEYS and the mics, and each output's port. A mic has no dry output — its fader is its send to the effects — so its OUT is the shared 3-4 FX RETURN.

The legend BUS · GROUPS · EQ · PAN is written once under the scale. Faders, S and M, the mute-group keys, snapshots and Start keep working while SETUP is open. Start always brings the transport back, and SETUP is not remembered. On the OUTPUTS tab, SETUP's rows are IN · EQ · OUT for each live input and output.

SETUP's column, under the OUTPUTS bay, holds three keys one above another: TRACKS TO AUDIENCE (double-tap; greyed while a backup rig mirrors its host), RAMP and HOLD FADERS — each key shows its name with ON or OFF under a lamp that lights when on. On a multi-output interface, set the C&C and MAIN 2 ports from each output's hold menu (Output port…). The transport stands exactly as in PERFORM: PLAY full height, and in Play / Pause mode TOP beside it while the song plays or the playhead is past the start — its place kept, so nothing moves when it appears.

Look. The console follows the page LOOK (Stage, Dusk or Daylight, in ••• APPEARANCE), and draws Stage while this device is driving another rig.

9.1 Layout Overview

The console (§9.0) has three zones, top to bottom:

  1. Header — two rows of keys, from CHANNELS | OUTPUTS to PERFORM | SETUP: among them the mute groups (§9.2), MIX and the snapshots (§5.12) and the overview strip (§9.8).
  2. Console — the scale at the left, the strips in their bays (scrolling sideways), and the OUTPUTS bay pinned at the right under the MASTER crown.
  3. Bottom tray — the timeline (§9.3), the compressor (§9.7) or the SETUP deck, with the transport key always at its right.

On a narrow window the same pieces are arranged around the compact mixer: §9.13.

9.2 Mute Groups

Six mute groups, each a key in the header: tap one to mute or unmute every channel in it at once. How the keys, and a strip muted by a group, read: §9.0.

A channel joins or leaves groups with SETUP's GROUPS key on the console, or Mute Groups… in its hold menu on the compact mixer: the same six toggles — tap a number to join or leave — and Clear all, which asks first.

9.3 The Timeline Tray

The Pro Mixer's transport is the bottom tray, on the console and on a narrow window alike: the info line, the region band, the waveform, the ruler and the transport key, all described in §9.0. A region tap follows the Live page's rule (Live Region Navigation). The tray is always fully visible. On the console the compressor and the SETUP deck open in its place, and Start brings the timeline back.

9.4 Channel Strips

What a console strip shows — its name, status row, value row, meter, and the S and M keys with their words — is in §9.0. The compact mixer's strips are in §9.12.

To On the console On the compact mixer
Set the levelThe fader: fully off to +6 dB, 0 dB by defaultThe same
MuteMTap the name
SoloS — any number of channels at onceS
RenameDouble-tap the nameHold → Rename Channel
Reset to 0 dBDouble-tap the value, or hold → Reset to 0 dBDouble-tap the foot, or hold → Reset to 0 dB
Change the busSETUP's BUS key (§9.5a)The bus badge
Mute groupsSETUP's GROUPS key (§9.2)Hold → Mute Groups…
EQ, pan and input trimSETUP's EQ · PAN key (§9.11)Hold → EQ · Pan…, or Trim & Pan…

Fader Enhancements

The console's faders also have:

Feature How it works
Haptic snap at 0 dBThe fader produces a subtle haptic tap as it crosses exactly 0 dB (unity gain), so you can feel the unity position without looking at the dB readout.
Fine-mode dragSlide your finger slightly to the side (left or right) while dragging a fader to enter fine-adjustment mode — the fader becomes more sensitive, allowing precise small-step control. Slide back to center to return to normal speed.

9.4a Group Channels

The mixers have no group strips. A group on the Go Live Performance Grid is a bus: every bus carrying two or more of the song's tracks shows there as one group tile (see Tile Groups). The mixer already has that bus, on the OUTPUTS tab, so there is nothing separate to fold or keep in step.

The grid's group swipe is not the bus fader. Swiping a group tile up or down moves every member's own fader together, keeping their balance. The mixer has no single control for that: move the bus fader, or open the bus and set the members one by one.

Opening a bus in the mixer does not open its group on the Performance Grid — the engineer's view and the performer's view stay independent. The Pro Mixer and the Standard Mixer share which buses are open, and a bus stays open from song to song until you close it.

9.4b Instruments & Microphones

The OUTPUTS tab opens with your instrument and microphone strips — V·PAD, V·KEYS, MIC 1 and MIC 2 — to the left of the buses. They stay in the same place on every song. They carry a steel-blue accent and show no bus badge.

On the console (§9.0), FROM and ASSIGN are SETUP's IN and OUT rows, and a mic's OUT is the shared FX RETURN. TALK, the FX door and SILENT are described there.

Choosing a microphone's input

Set which physical input each mic listens to from the FROM chip at the head of the mic strip — a key with an orange edge — in the compact mixer, or SETUP's IN key on the console. On the Live page's floating Mixer the chip is hidden while the strips are short; make the card taller, or open the Pro Mixer, to change it (§5.17). The list shows the channels your connected interface offers, and the change applies immediately.

A mic with no signal is usually listening to the wrong input. Check this before anything else.

A mic strip shows both halves of its routing:

9.4c Vocal Effects — the MIC panel

Everything your voice needs lives in one place: the MIC panel, a floating card. Open it with the microphone key in the Controls module, or from ••• → Microphones when the Controls module is hidden from your layout. It also opens from the FX button on either mic strip in the mixer — tap it again to close it. Opened from the floating Mixer that way, it closes that Mixer unless the Mixer is pinned. The Pro Mixer brings up the same card over itself. On the console the mic's FX door opens it with a tap; swipe up or down on the door to nudge the effects, double-tap it to clear.

It is a floating card, like the Mixer and the Library. Drag it by its title bar (MIC · pin · ✕) or by the grabber down either side, resize it from either the top-left or bottom-right grip, and pin it to keep it open whatever other panel you open. Unpinned, it closes by its ✕, the microphone key, or when another panel opens — never on a tap outside it. It remembers where you put it, separately for each screen layout.

There is no handle on the top edge, on purpose. Near the top of the screen iOS takes that grab for itself and shrinks the whole app. Move the card by its title bar or a side grabber instead.

Pull it short and it becomes one row. A short card is the Live row alone — the keys you reach for mid-song, each laid out in the room there is, none clipped. Shorter still, the title bar gives way to a thin strip that still drags; the side grabbers and the corner keep working, and the microphone key still closes the card. Pull it taller and the setup appears under the row: the effects, the INPUTS card and the card's Look. The effects' chain and section list fold away behind chevrons and remember whichever way you leave them.

The card has its own look. The Look row at the foot of the tall card offers Dark, Dusk, Light and Match page — the default, which follows the Live page's look. It is kept with the card, not with a layout. The effects themselves always sit on a dark panel, whatever the look.

The microphone key reports two things with the panel closed. While a mic is in TALK it shows a filled mic with a blue lamp in its corner; while every mic is muted — which is how a fresh install starts — it shows a slashed mic with a red lamp, so nothing looks normal when it isn't. (On Stage and Daylight the glyph takes the lamp's colour too.) A ring around the key means the panel is open, and a small pin badge on its top-left corner that the card is pinned. The key appears only once the mic channels exist; with the feature off there is nothing to control and nothing taking up space.

Don't use the card? Turn Microphones off for this device in Layout Design → Modules → PANELS (Layout Design): its key and its ••• row go, on every layout. One thing brings the key back: whenever a mic is talking, it still appears — and, while the Controls module is hidden, so does its ••• row — with the talk lamp lit, and a tap opens the MIC card, where you turn TALK off. Muted mics don't bring it back: with the card turned off, the red all-muted lamp is not shown.

The Live row

The top of the card — and the whole card when you pull it short — is one row of keys:

Key What it shows What it does
A voice inputTALK, TALKING (the key lit blue) or MUTED (the key red), with the mic and the input's name under itTap: TALK on or off — or, when muted, unmute. Double-tap or hold: mute completely
An instrument inputIts name, a guitar and ON or MUTED, with a lamp in the cornerTap: mute or unmute
HARMONYA lamp, the word Harmony, the chord it is singing over, and its level along the footTap: on or off. Drag sideways: the level. Hold: the level panel
NUDGEA ring showing how far everything has been nudgedDrag up or down. Double-tap: clear
EFFECTSA leading chevron pointing down, where the effects open, and four dots — reverb, chorus, delay, harmony — each lit while that effect is onTap: the effects

Every input key carries an LED ladder in its top-left corner: eight small segments showing the level arriving at that input. It keeps moving while the mic is muted, so you can see a mic is picking up before you unmute it.

Which inputs get a key, what each is called and whether it is a voice or an instrument is set in the INPUTS card. On a narrow card the input keys sit on top with HARMONY · NUDGE · EFFECTS beneath them; with no input shown, the row says No input is shown here. where it has room, and HARMONY takes the space where it does not.

If a mic looks dead

Both mic channels start muted on a fresh install, on purpose: an open microphone feeding a live reverb is a feedback loop waiting for a wedge. After that each mic comes back the way you left it — a mic you opened last night is open when you next launch, and one you muted stays muted. When a mic is muted, three things say so, and you do not have to open anything to see the first two:

where what you see
Controls modulewhile every mic is muted, the microphone key shows a slashed mic with a red lamp — unless Microphones is turned off in PANELS, which takes the key away
the mic stripa MUTED badge — tap the badge and the mic is live again
the MIC cardthat input's key turns red and reads MUTED — tap it and the mic is live again

Muting a mic strip does not silence you. Your dry voice reaches the house from your desk and never passes through this app — muting the strip removes your effects, not your voice.

TALK — one per microphone

The biggest keys on the row, because you reach for them mid-sentence without looking. Tap to stand your effects down so you can speak to the room — the key lights blue and reads TALKING; tap again to come back. The tap acts the instant it lands.

Each voice has its own. Talking on MIC 1 leaves a guest singing on MIC 2 completely untouched — their reverb, and their tail, keep going. An input set up as an instrument has no TALK at all; its key simply mutes and unmutes it.

It is not a mute. Your voice keeps going out of the desk at the same level; only the effects move, and they ramp rather than cut, so there is no click.

The delay and the double go completely, however What TALK leaves behind is set. That control governs the room and nothing else. The three effects fail differently on speech: a little reverb is natural because you are in a room, but a delay is you talking over yourself, and a double is an uncanny second speaker. There is no small amount of either that sounds like anything but a fault.

With two mics, TALK only strips the delay and the double when everybody is talking. The effects chain is shared, so a guest still singing into the other microphone keeps theirs. Every input that is still sounding counts — an instrument on the other input is still playing, so it keeps its effects too, and an input hidden from the row still counts. A muted input does not.

TALK hands the effects back when the singing starts — a bar early, so your first line is never dry. Not when you pick the next song, and not when you press play: you introduce a song while its intro rolls, and TALK stays on through all of it. The app finds the singing from the song's first timed lyric, or failing that from the first section that isn't an intro.

A song that says neither leaves it to you. With no timed lyrics and no section labels there is nothing to aim at, so nothing fires and you tap TALK off yourself when you're ready to sing.

And if you tap TALK off by hand, it stays off for that song — it will not come back on and then hand itself over at the chorus.

The same control is on each mic strip in the mixer, where the pill reads TALK.

Double-tap or press and hold TALK to mute that mic completely. TALK only stands the effects down as far as What TALK leaves behind allows; at anything above zero the reverb is still open. The full mute is for when you want it gone. You get a firm haptic so you know it took, and a plain tap on the same key brings it back. A double-tap leaves TALK where it was — only the mute sticks.

HARMONY

A second singer above you, on the notes of the song's chords. While it is on, the key shows the chord it is singing over — E♭, F♯m7 — or No chord when neither the chart nor a keyboard has given it one; the harmony stays silent then rather than guess. Along the foot runs its level: a gold line while it is on, a grey one while it is off — the level it will come back to.

It is one shared level — the same one as the HARMONY slider in the effects chain.

NUDGE

The room is boomy, or the band is louder than at soundcheck. One ring takes everything up or down without disturbing anything you have set.

Drag up or down on the ring. At rest it is quiet; nudged, an amber arc grows out of the top in the direction you moved it and the amount shows in the middle (+20, −15), so "more or less?" reads at a glance. Double-tap the ring to clear it.

It rides on top of whatever the song and its sections chose, and it survives every section boundary — a correction that vanished at the next chorus would be useless exactly when it started working. It clears when you load another song, because it is about right now and not about the song; the tall card says so under the row.

It is also on the strip's FX button — swipe up or down on it, double-tap to clear — and that button shows the amount so you can never leave one running without noticing.

EFFECTS

Four dots for the four effects — reverb, chorus, delay and harmony — each lit while that effect is on, over the word EFFECTS, led by a chevron pointing down — the way the effects open. (The two-arrow glyph on the card is only its resize corner.) Tap it: in a tall card it scrolls down to the effects; in a card pulled short, the effects open in a popover beside the key.

ALL EFFECTS — and everything inside it

One knob for your whole library: find the sweet spot once and every song follows. Tap its header to unfold the chain it masters — the THIS SONG and SECTIONS pickers (see Presets), then REVERB, CHORUS / DOUBLER, DELAY, HARMONY and What TALK leaves behind — and the knob stays reachable whether the fold is open or shut.

SEND TO EFFECTS

One knob per microphone, at the end of the effects: how much of that mic goes into the effects. Set it once, like a gain. It is post-fader, so a muted mic sends nothing regardless.

INPUTS — names, voices and instruments

The INPUTS card lists every live input under its desk name (MIC 1, MIC 2), shown on the row or not — this is where a hidden one comes back.

Show on Live pageWhether the input has a key on the row. A single-mic setup can hide the second key. Hiding only takes the key away: the input stays on the desk, still sounds and keeps its effects
NameType a name, or leave it empty for the desk name. It is the same name the mixer strip shows, so renaming either renames both
Voice · InstrumentA voice keeps TALK. An instrument — an acoustic guitar on the second input, say — gets its name with ON / MUTED instead. Switching a talking input to Instrument turns its TALK off
QuickVocal names the input Vocal and makes it a voice; Acoustic names it Acoustic and makes it an instrument

What the three effects actually do

Each card's main slider — the one with no label of its own — is that effect's level, and none of them carries your dry voice — that reaches the house on its own leg. What comes back is only the effect.

CHORUS / DOUBLER — a second take of your own voice.

The main slider is how much of that second voice you hear. CHARACTER is how different that take is from you: at the bottom it is you again, a hair off pitch, drifting so slowly you cannot follow it — a doubler. At the top it is a full chorus. There is no switch between the two; it is one continuous move.

Two things make it sit behind you rather than on top, and neither is on a slider:

Judge the two controls in different places, because they are different kinds of control.

CHARACTER — solo the effect. Mute your dry voice and listen to the double alone. It is the only place you can hear character properly: in the mix your own voice masks exactly the detail you are trying to judge.

The level — with the band, never soloed. It is a ratio against your dry voice, and soloed, half the ratio is missing. A double that sounds right on its own is nearly always too loud in the mix — its job is to be felt, not heard.

REVERB — the room.

Past three-quarters of the way up, the control stops only getting louder and starts lengthening the tail. That is a different thing from a bigger room: a bigger room pushes you further away and blurs your consonants, while a longer tail leaves you where you are and simply holds on after you stop. Over a band the first costs intelligibility and the second does not.

The stretch scales whichever voicing you are on, so a tight room stretched is still a tight room.

DELAY — the repeats, and the throw.

INTO REVERB is how much of the repeats wash into the reverb tail, and it is independent of the delay level on purpose.

Its normal full is at 80%, not at the top. At 80% the repeats reach the room at exactly the level the delay puts them out — that is the natural setting. The last fifth of the travel pushes them in hotter than that, which blooms quickly. It is there for a song that wants it, not a place to live. Turn the delay itself down to nothing and leave this up, and you get

repeats that exist only inside the room — softer, further away, and a sound people choose. It is not broken when the delay is down; that is when it does its most distinctive thing.

Presets — THIS SONG and SECTIONS

Unfold ALL EFFECTS and its first two rows choose the sound for the song:

A preset is a character for the whole vocal chain — how dark, how open, how much of the work the delay does versus the room. It carries no timings: the tail length and pre-delay are worked out from the song's own tempo, which is why one preset works at 68 bpm and at 148. The ⓘ beside THIS SONG opens THE PRESETS, a guide to the sounds and how AUTOMATIC starts from your pick.

CURRENT SETTINGSUses your shared effects sliders wherever no section preset is assigned. The default.
TIGHTFast songs. Short reverb, wide delay and a touch of chorus.
CRISPSlower songs. Light, bright reverb that keeps the vocal clear.
WIDEBig ballads. A long, dark reverb tail behind the band.
fourth vocal sound presetOpen and spacious, with a bright, lingering reverb tail.
YOUR SAVED PRESETSYour own vocal sounds, with effect timing adapted to each song's tempo. This is the guide's heading; the picker lists your presets by name.

Presets you save yourself appear in the same menu, in a My presets submenu that also holds Delete for them. The four presets that come with the app cannot be deleted.

The SECTIONS card under the chain lets any single region differ from the rest — a chorus can be TIGHT while the song is WIDE. Each section's menu offers Same as the song or any preset. A section always wins over the song's own pick. The card folds away — tap its header — and a small count on the header shows how many sections carry their own preset, so a folded list still tells you whether anything is set.

Changes between sections glide rather than jump, and arriving somewhere by scrubbing gives the same sound as arriving there by playing.

Automatic sections

Set SECTIONS to AUTOMATIC and the app reads your song and picks a preset for each section. It runs when you choose it — and again whenever you pick a different THIS SONG preset while SECTIONS reads AUTOMATIC, so the sections follow the new pick — and writes its answers down as ordinary section picks, so what you hear in rehearsal is exactly what you get on Sunday, and you can change any of them by hand afterwards.

It starts from the song's pick. Whatever THIS SONG is set to is the baseline, used wherever the arrangement does not call for something else — most of a song is mid-weight, and that is where it goes. It still reaches for a tighter preset on the biggest, densest sections and a more open one on the sparse, slow ones, because those are corrections a general-purpose voicing does not make. With THIS SONG on CURRENT SETTINGS it starts from the preset you saved most recently, or — with none saved — from the app's own neutral choice.

It works from how busy the band is rather than from section labels, so it works on a song you imported five minutes ago and never labelled. Its one big idea is the opposite of what most people do: less room in the big chorus, not more — a dense chorus has none left, so the delay carries the width instead.

It will decline on some songs — no regions, no separate stems, or a song with no dynamic range at all. That is deliberate. A guess made from nothing is worse than leaving your sound alone.

Undo, and being asked first. Choosing AUTOMATIC when you have set sections by hand asks first and says how many: Replace all N I set myself, Keep mine, fill the rest, or Cancel. After a run an Undo appears on the SECTIONS card — it puts back exactly what was there, which Clear all does not: that one wipes every section's pick.

MANUAL keeps whatever is assigned, and every other section follows the song. Change a section by hand while the app is choosing and the row reads MANUAL straight away, because the sections are no longer all the app's.

Saving your own preset

Dial the effects in until you like them, then open the THIS SONG menu and choose Save settings as preset. Give it a name — and, if you like, a note on what it is for. It becomes an ordinary preset: pick it for a whole song, give it to one section, or let AUTOMATIC start from it.

It keeps the character, not the numbers. What you dialled in was a tail of so many seconds, on the one song you were singing. What gets saved is the musical proportion — the tail as a length in bars — so your preset follows the tempo of every song instead of freezing to that one. A tail that is right on a ballad turns a fast song to mud, and this is what stops that happening.

Moving the sliders while a song is playing

Drag a microphone slider horizontally to adjust it. A vertical swipe scrolls the panel without changing the level.

Inside a section, your moves stick. At the next section boundary they are replaced by that section's preset — the assignments are what the song is following, and it goes back to following them.

So during a performance, reach for NUDGE rather than the sliders. It is added to whatever the song is doing, so it rides through every section change. That is the "more reverb, right now" control; the sliders are the base it is added to.

Save settings as preset keeps whatever the sliders read at that instant. Tweak a character you like and save the result and you get your tweak. Do it after the song has moved into the next section and you get that section's preset instead — so save before the playhead crosses the boundary.

The chain

control what it does
REVERBthe tail
CHORUS / DOUBLERa second take of your own voice, with CHARACTER underneath it: low is two takes of one singer, high opens into an audible chorus
DELAYthe repeats, with NOTE and INTO REVERB underneath
HARMONYa second singer above you, on the notes of the song's chords — the same level the HARMONY key sets, with the chord it is hearing underneath. At zero there is none
WHAT TALK LEAVES BEHINDhow much room survives when you press TALK. Zero is bone dry and usually right; a little can sound more natural over a big PA. It governs the reverb only — TALK removes the delay and the double completely, whatever this is set to
ALL EFFECTSscales everything together — one knob for finding the sweet spot across your whole library

The delay knows the song

The repeats are locked to your tempo, on the note you choose — 1/2 through 1/16, including dotted and triplet eighths. Change the note and it retimes immediately. A song with no detected tempo free-runs instead.

It also ducks under your voice: the repeats pull back while you are singing and open up in the gaps, which is how a delay stays audible without covering the words.

INTO REVERB — the throw

The repeats can wash into the reverb tail instead of sitting dry beside your voice. That is standard practice on records and in rooms, and it is what makes a delay sound like part of the space rather than an effect bolted on.

DELAY and INTO REVERB are independent on purpose. Turning DELAY to zero silences the direct repeats — but with the throw still up they carry on washing through the reverb, and the panel says so. That combination, no dry repeats with everything going to the tail, is a sound people choose deliberately. Turn both down for none at all.

Two things handled for you

Sibilance. Both the reverb and the chorus de-ess what feeds them, so the tail carries the body of a word rather than the hiss on the end of it. Your dry consonants stay sharp.

The low end. The tail's bass dies faster than its middle — deliberately unlike a real room — so a long reverb never muddies the band underneath it.

Your dry voice never passes through the app

The microphone feeds the effects and nothing else, and only the effect comes back. There is no latency on your voice, and nothing to phase against the line your desk already sends to the house. The return has its own output assignment, shared by both mic strips, so a master fade or a master EQ can never touch it.

9.5 Bus Channels

There are sixteen buses, and all sixteen always exist — the same way a physical desk always has its channels whether or not anything is patched to them. Only the assignment changes per song, never the desk itself. What the mixer draws is another matter: a bus the song routes nothing to is left off, so the desk shows only buses carrying audio. Turn on Show Empty Buses (Settings → Buses) to see all sixteen; the empty ones then appear as narrow spines carrying just the bus number, its name and a mute dot (see Empty buses are hidden).

On the console the buses are on the OUTPUTS tab, by family: a bus with tracks has a members key that opens its members beside it, a frozen bus reads ❄ FROZEN, and SYNC and the empty buses are narrow spines (§9.0). In the compact mixer they are bus pillars (Bus Pillar Strips).

# Bus What belongs on it
1VocalsLead and background vocals, every language of a bilingual song
2DrumsKit — kick, snare, toms, overheads
3PercussionHand percussion, shakers, auxiliary percussion
4LoopsProgrammed loops and beds, plus risers, impacts, sweeps and sound design
5BassBass guitar and synth bass
6PianoAcoustic and electric piano
7KeysSynths, organs, arps and pads — keyboards other than piano
8Lead GuitarThe lead / solo guitar line, on its own
9Electric GuitarsRhythm and layered electrics — everything except the lead
10Acoustic GuitarsAcoustic and 12-string parts
11StringsStrings and orchestral pads
12HornsBrass, plus saxophone
13AuxiliaryAnything with no group above — woodwinds, world instruments, one-offs
14SoundtrackOne stereo mixdown of the whole song — what you perform with when there are no stems
15ReferenceThe original recording for the band to hear. In-ears by default, never the audience
16Sync / FailoverTimecode (SMPTE LTC) or the watchdog tone. Never route this where anyone is listening

Each bus has its own fader, mute, meter and physical output pair. Muting a bus silences everything routed to it at once, and a bus mute is a standing decision that survives song changes and app restarts — that is what makes it useful. If a live drummer is playing tonight you mute Drums once, and it stays muted through the whole set.

That is why Lead Guitar has its own bus: when a guitarist covers the lead, you mute one bus instead of editing every song. The same reasoning applies to Drums and Bass.

Soundtrack and Reference are opposites, and the difference matters. A soundtrack (pista) is the performance — the whole band in one file that you play along with, and it always goes to the house. A reference is the original recording, vocal and all, for the band to learn from — it goes to the in-ears, and can be routed to the house only if you choose to.

9.5a Where Tracks Go — and changing it

On the console (§9.0), a channel's bus is changed with its BUS key in SETUP — the same list as the compact mixer's bus badge. The rules below decide where tracks go when a song is imported.

Tracks are routed to buses by name at import. Settings → Tracks lists every name each bus recognises, and the Where Should It Go? field answers the question directly: type a name and it tells you the bus it would be given, and why.

If the answer is wrong, change it there:

  1. Type the name (or part of it).
  2. Tap Always send it to and pick any bus, or Click & Cues, or Reference.
  3. The rule is saved and beats every built-in rule, including the click/cues detection.

Rules match the same way everything else does, so a rule on lead gtr catches "Lead Gtr 1", "Lead Gtr 2" and "Lead Gtr Group". The field shows you the exact keyword it will save before you commit.

A saved rule applies to future imports. Songs already in your library keep the bus they have — until you tap Apply to N songs in your library, which states the count first and moves only the tracks that rule names. If a song is loaded and stopped, it reloads immediately so you hear the change at once; if it is playing, the change waits for the next load rather than interrupting you.

Your rules appear in a My Rules card and can be removed at any time. In the bus lists below, a name you have moved shows in the accent colour in its new bus, and struck through in the bus it came from.

Anything that matches no rule at all lands on Auxiliary rather than being guessed at, and never on a utility bus.

Changing one track in one song

A rule is keyed on the name, so it cannot help a stem whose name means nothing — files exported as 1, 2, Audio 03 match nothing and land on Auxiliary, and no rule you could write would fix that without catching half your library.

For those, reroute the channel directly from the mixer — tap its bus badge and pick a bus. That change belongs to that song only and does not create a rule. At a stopped transport you hear it immediately; while playing, it lands the moment you stop.

Combined Click + Cues File

A stereo click file that carries the beat on one side and spoken cues on the other is normally split into its own Click and Cues tracks when you import it, and this setting has nothing to do with those. It is the fallback for a combined file that has not been split — a song already in your library that you haven't split yet, or one the app could not read with certainty.

For those, Settings → Tracks → Combined Click + Cues File tells the app which side is which:

Option Meaning
Click L · Cues RThe usual export convention, and the default.
Cues L · Click RFor files built the other way round.

It matters during a vamp, where the cues side is muted so a repeated section doesn't keep announcing itself while you hold. Set it to the wrong side and the click is muted instead, for as long as the vamp lasts. If your click disappears whenever you vamp on an older song, this is the setting to check.

The quickest fix for an older song is not this setting at all — press and hold the track in the Audio tab and choose Split Click & Cues. Once it is two tracks, this no longer applies to it.

Restore Defaults

Three actions at the bottom of Settings → Tracks. None can be undone.

Action Scope
Re-route this songSends every track in the loaded song back to what the rules say, discarding anything moved by hand in the mixer.
Re-route the whole libraryThe same, for every song. This is the one to reach for after weeks of rerouting by hand across a set list.
Delete my rulesRemoves every rule you added, restoring the built-in table. Songs already imported keep their current routing — use one of the re-route actions for those.

Click, Cues and the Built-in Vamp are never touched by a re-route. Their bus comes from what they are, not from their name.

9.6 Song & Master Channels

On the console SONG and MASTER stand with C&C and MAIN 2 in the OUTPUTS bay, pinned at the right, and never scroll with the channels (§9.0). On a narrow window they are cards in the bus band above the strips (§9.13).

Strip Description
SongMaster fader for the entire session. Default 0 dB
MasterApp-wide output level after all processing. Real-time meter shows final output

Both have an EQ key, ±6 dB (§9.11).

Note: The Song and Master strips used to carry an FX slot for third-party AUv3 plug-ins. It was removed, and so was the one on the Song bus. The reason is timing, not resources: everything on the master chain — both EQs, the compressor and the limiter — adds zero delay, and that is the only thing keeping the band locked to the click, because the click does not pass through that chain. A plug-in is the one thing there whose delay nobody controls, and plug-ins report their own latency unreliably. A perfectly ordinary mastering limiter with 5 ms of lookahead would put the whole band 5 ms behind the click with nothing on screen to tell you.

9.7 Master Dynamics — the compressor and the limiter

The master output runs through a four-band compressor and then a brick-wall limiter. In the Pro Mixer, tap the MASTER crown — its DYN GR gauges (§9.0) — to see them working; tap it again, or Start, to put them away. On the console they open in the bottom tray. On a narrow window the crown is in the header, and they open in the tray where the window is wide enough for them (the 11-inch in portrait) and in the bus band's place on narrower ones (an iPhone, a Split View half). In the floating Mixer panel the key is DYN, after PRO in the row under the header; tap it again to put them away, and while they are open they take the place of the 2×2 bus band.

What you see What it means
LOW / LO-MID / HI-MID / HIGHEach band's own gain reduction, pressing down from the top
GLUEThe broadband stage, common to all four — what makes the mix feel like one thing
LIMITThe brick wall, the last thing before the output
OVERSomething reached full scale before the limiter. Tap to clear

AMOUNT is global: it applies to every song. 100% uses the gentler default, with each band's own reduction capped at 3.5 dB; lower settings reduce the strength, and 0% removes its gain reduction while the limiter stays active. The separate GLUE stage and limiter can add further reduction, so a band reading is not the total reduction at the output.

Drag the white lines on the graph to move where the bands split; the dividers push each other apart rather than crossing.

Tip: read the limiter as a gauge, not a feature. It is a safety net, and how hard it is working tells you about your material.

  • 0–2 dB on peaks — healthy. The net is doing its job.
  • 3–4 dB constantly — it is being used as a compressor. Something upstream is too hot.
  • OVER lighting up — the material hit full scale before the limiter. No master-chain control can fix that; it has to come down earlier.

If it is working too hard, bring the level down before it. Use the Song fader if only some songs do it — that setting is saved per song, so you set it once. Use the Master fader only if every song does it; pull the master down for one hot song and your quiet songs arrive limp.

Read the numbers as peaks. The display briefly holds gain-reduction peaks. Different tonal balances and transients make the bands react differently from song to song. Set AMOUNT by listening across several representative songs, keeping the punch and brightness you want.

9.8 Scrolling Reference

Every strip fits the window's height, so the strips scroll only sideways (on an iPhone held sideways the Pro Mixer's header and band stand in their own column, which scrolls up and down: §9.13).

Mixer To scroll Where you are
ConsoleSwipe sideways on a strip's glass — its name, status or valueThe header's overview strip, while the strips run past the window: tap a place to jump there (§9.0)
Compact mixerSwipe sideways anywhere on a stripA pulsing >> at the right edge for a few seconds when the strips run past the window, and again with each new song

A fader you are moving never scrolls the mixer.

9.9 Options — RAMP, Hold Faders

On the console these are keys in SETUP's column (§9.0). On a narrow window they are behind the header's OPTIONS key, which opens the same column (with PORTS on a multi-output interface); while RAMP is on, the key shows a lit RAMP in place of its gear, so you can always see it.

Option What it does
RAMPApplies to Compact + Pro channel strips: Solo and Mute move faders with a smooth ramp instead of switching instantly. Mute acts on the first tap. In the Pro Mixer, a quick second tap (within about a third of a second) locks that mute. To unlock, tap LOCKED on the console; on a narrow window a locked channel has a padlock before its name — tap the name. Output-bus mutes keep their usual behavior.
Hold fadersCompact + Pro · hold 0.4 s. One setting protects channel and OUTPUTS faders in both mixers. Rest on the fader for 0.4 s, then drag. Moving too soon does not change the level. Quick flicks are disabled while this protection is on. Double-tap a fader cap to set it to 0 dB even with Hold on; the value-row shortcut stays protected. Hold anywhere on a strip except its fader cap and the area immediately around it for the menu.

With Hold faders off, a quick vertical flick on a channel or OUTPUTS fader changes it by 1 dB: up raises, down lowers. Keep your finger down to drag continuously. The first 0.22 seconds distinguish a flick from a drag without briefly changing to an unwanted level. During adjustment, a large dB bubble appears above your finger, clear of the strip.

Mixer Tiles’ bus rail is always immediate. Hold faders does not affect it: horizontal flicks remain ±2 dB and vertical flicks ±1 dB. The resulting level stays visible for 1.5 seconds outside the touched tile, even when the rail is collapsed to letters. Repeated flicks keep it visible.

9.10 Console Finish (Pro Mixer)

The console (§9.0) is drawn in the page's LOOK and follows its MATERIAL (§5.0a). There is no skin to choose. In Character its bays, scale cheek, tray and OUTPUTS bay are textured metal — bead-blast in Stage and Dusk, a fine satin brushing in Daylight — with machined edges, a recessed fader bed and raised keys; the cheek's labels are 15 pt. The transport key sits in a smooth pocket. Plain stays flat, and Reduce Transparency or Increase Contrast remove the texture.

In Vintage the console is old, well-played rack gear in the page's look — black anodised and brushed (Stage), blue-grey hammer-tone (Dusk), brushed silver (Daylight) — with bakelite fader caps, lamp-ladder meters, screws at each plate's foot (one missing, one Phillips) and light wear at the edges. The bus tier becomes a row of cream VU meters with real needles, each bus's number (or name and number) on a black cap; MASTER's gain gauges sit on a cream face and OVER is a red jewel. Lit keys are backlit lenses with a jewel above (red MUTED, LOCKED and CLIPPED, amber SOLO and RESET, cyan TALKING); toggles show a white jewel; the song title is on paper tape. The needles read the bus meter's averaged level with VU ballistics, calibrated so a −8 dBFS tone reads 0 VU — not a true-RMS reading of the bus sum. VoiceOver reads each bus tier once, with its number and full name (for example, “Bus 4, Loops”), in Plain, Character and Vintage.

The console only. On a narrow window the Pro Mixer is drawn in the page's LOOK, flat — MATERIAL does not apply to the compact mixer.

9.11 EQ in the Pro Mixer

What On the console On a narrow window
SONG, MASTER (±6 dB)The EQ key in the OUTPUTS bayThe EQ key beside M on the SONG and MASTER cards
A track channelSETUP's EQ · PAN key (below)Hold the strip → EQ · Pan…
V·PAD, V·KEYS, a mic (±6 dB)SETUP's EQ row on OUTPUTSHold the strip → EQ…

Everything but EQ · PAN on the console opens the editor as a sheet, at a height that shows the whole graph, the band buttons and the Gain / Frequency / Q sliders; drag it up to expand it to full screen. A channel's sheet is the same editor as EQ · PAN, with its TRIM row above the bands and its PAN row at the foot.

EQ · PAN on the console

On the console (§9.0), tap a strip's EQ · PAN window in SETUP. The same EQ editor opens above it, with the channel's name beside EQ and a PAN row at the foot. Drag sideways to pan: the needle and the value follow your finger, and 200 pt takes it from hard left to hard right, starting from where it is, so a touch never makes it jump. Double-tap to centre. The value reads C, L24 or R100 (percent toward that side). If the pan is still moving when you open the editor — a snapshot's ramp, say — the row moves with it. The row is a needle: white fills from it toward the centre when the pan is left, red when it is right. Undo also puts the pan back; Reset leaves pan and trim alone. Metro, Clips and frozen stems have no PAN row and no trim. A click or cue stem's window holds the PAN row alone.

9.12 Standard Dock Mixer (Pillar Mixer)

The Standard Mixer (also called the Pillar Mixer) is the free mixer built into the Song Editor's mixer panel and hosted by the Go Live floating Mixer panel (§5.17); on a narrow window it is the Pro Mixer's mixer too (§9.13). It ships with the app at no cost and provides all essential mixing controls in a clean, minimal design.

On the Live page it is drawn in the page's look (§5.0a). In the Song Editor the same mixer is drawn in the Stage look whatever look the Live page uses, as the editor's Library window is. The Pro Mixer, opened from either, follows the Live page's look (§9.10).

Pro Mixer vs Standard Mixer: The Pro Mixer (§9.0–§9.11) adds the console, SETUP, the OUTPUTS bay and the timeline tray; on a narrow window it is this mixer with the console's header and tray (§9.13). The Standard Mixer covers faders, mute/solo, bus assignment and output routing — and reaches EQ, pan, input trim and mute groups from each strip’s long-press menu (below). Nothing that changes a channel’s level or position is Pro-only.

Design Concept

Each channel is a 50 pt-wide pillar, a plain key of the page's look. A real fader cap rides a slot down its middle, with a thin blue level meter beside it. Drag up or down in the fader area; a quick flick steps 1 dB. With Hold faders on, first rest for 0.4 s. With it off, double-tap the foot for 0 dB. The line across the cap turns red when the strip is muted, and is orange on a live mic. With Vivid chosen, a thin line along the top of each pillar shows its bus's colour; Minimal leaves it plain. A soloed strip wears an amber ring. A microphone's meter always shows its level, even on a very short card and even while muted.

The compact mixer's C&C, MAIN 2, SONG and MASTER bus wells also accept quick horizontal flicks: right raises 1 dB, left lowers 1 dB. Up/down still steps ±1 dB. Keep moving or hold for 0.22 seconds to drag continuously. A large readout stays outside the well during adjustment and for 1.5 seconds afterward; the small value returns when it clears.

In both Compact and Pro, double-tap a bus well to reset to 0 dB, even with Hold faders on. Holding no longer opens a reset menu. The compact mixer briefly shows 0 dB above the well to confirm the reset.

The name is the mute

There is no M button. Tapping a channel's or bus's name mutes it. The strip shows MUTED on a red capsule beside its fader cap — above or below it, wherever there is more room — and the line across its cap turns red. The strip is not darkened, so you can still read its name to bring it back. Tap the name again to unmute.

Tap MUTED and the strip comes back — so the thing that tells you a strip is off is also the way to switch it on. On a short strip the word gets smaller to fit. On a bus, the BUS number moves level with the MUTED word.

Channels and outputs both carry the MUTED badge, in the floating mixer and the Pro Mixer alike. Two exceptions, both deliberate: an output collapsed to a narrow spine has no room for it, and a strip that cannot be switched on right now — a mic whose input can't be armed, for instance — shows the badge dimmed and does not respond to a tap, because tapping it would do nothing.

This is mostly there for the tap you did not mean to make. Until the name-is-the-mute gesture is second nature, a strip that has quietly gone silent looks exactly like a strip that is broken — the badge is what tells you which one you are looking at.

Solo has its own key — the S at the foot of each strip, one tap. It turns amber when soloed; while another channel is soloed, the other strips' S keys sink — drawn in the colour of the fader's slot, as if set into the strip. Neither mute nor solo needs a double tap, which matters on an iPad on a stand.

Tiles are unchanged. In the Go Live Performance Grid a tile still mutes on a single tap and solos on a double tap. Only the mixer works this way.

Channel Pillar Controls

Element Position Description
NameTop15 pt, set in narrower letters when a name is long, and on two lines when it has two words and needs them; a long single word gets smaller rather than being cut. Tap = mute. Long-press = channel menu. A Language Switch vocal shows the language badge before its name, and its name is quieter while its language is not sounding.
Fader cap and meterMiddleThe cap is the level; the thin meter beside it is the signal.
dB readoutAbove your fingerLarge, high-contrast value while dragging. After a flick, the final value stays visible for 1.5 seconds; another flick restarts that time.
Mute groupsFoot, when there is roomA quiet tag such as G1·3 naming the mute groups this channel belongs to (set with Mute Groups… in the long-press menu).
Bus badgeFootA dark chip showing B1–B15, C&C or — (direct); with Vivid its number is in the bus's colour. Tap it to reassign the channel's bus — a menu lists None (Direct) and every assignable bus. C&C channels are hard-routed; tapping their badge flashes a lock instead.
S keyBottomTap = solo / unsolo. Amber when soloed; sunk while another channel is soloed.

Utility channels are protected: Click, Cues and Metronome — anything on the C&C bus, including imported tracks whose names read as click or cues — are routed by name. They cannot be reassigned or renamed; tapping their badge flashes a 🔒.

Long-press a channel — Trim, EQ and Mute Groups

Press and hold the channel strip, away from its fader cap, and a menu opens with Rename Channel, Trim & Pan…, EQ · Pan…, Mute Groups… and Reset to 0 dB — the same gesture the bus strips beside it already use. It offers only what the channel has: a click or cue stem has no EQ, the metronome has no EQ, trim or pan, and Clips and a frozen stem have no trim or pan (their EQ item reads EQ…).

Trim & Pan opens a small card with just the channel’s trim and pan:

Why it is on every mixer. A trim is stored with the song and keeps working whether or not you can see it. It reaches −24 dB, and a channel fader only reaches +6 — so a stem trimmed right down could not be brought back from any screen that had no trim control. Both settings are now reachable from every mixer, on the same gesture.

Member strips inside an expanded bus have no menu — they are a way to a fader, not a place to administer the channel. The same channel is a full strip on the CHANNELS tab.

Bus Pillar Strips

Bus pillars appear to the right of the channel pillars, separated by a thin divider.

Element Position Description
Bus nameTopTap = mute. Set like a channel's name.
FROM chipUnder the name (mics only)The interface input the mic listens to (e.g. In 5) — a key with an orange edge. Tap to choose (§9.4b).
Bus numberDown the left edgeSet vertically, in a quiet ink. A label, not a button.
Expand chevronFoot of the faderA quiet mark that shows whether the bus is open — not a button (below). A frozen bus shows a snowflake here.
Output buttonFootThe same output-routing control the Pro Mixer uses, showing the current pair (e.g. "1/2"). Tap to pick a stereo pair or a mono channel on your interface.
Effects dotFoot (mics only)Ringed blue while the mic is sending into the effects; ringed amber, with the amount, while an adjustment stands. Tap to open the MIC panel (§9.4c); drag up or down to adjust, double-tap to clear the adjustment.
S keyBottomSame S as a channel. On a mic it is T (talk), and turns cyan while you talk.

When the strips are short, a mic strip hides its FROM and output chips (§5.17).

Press and hold the bus strip, away from its fader cap, for its menu: Rename Bus, Reset to 0 dB, the bus's freeze options, Output (on a multi-channel interface) and Tile in Live — Full tile, Half tile or No tile. Tile in Live sets how this bus shows on the Go Live Performance Grid, for every song (see Half-Size Tiles and Hidden Tiles); it is only in this mixer — the console's bus strips do not carry it. On V·PAD, V·KEYS and a mic the menu adds EQ… — its ±6 dB EQ.

Output routing is no longer Pro-only. Patching a bus to a specific interface output works in the Standard Mixer.

Tap a bus to see what is on it

Tap anywhere on a bus strip except its name and it expands, revealing the channels routed to that bus inline, immediately to its right. Tap again to collapse. The small chevron on the strip is an indicator, not a button — it points right when collapsed and left when open.

Member strips are narrower than the bus they sit under and, with Vivid, wear its colour, so they never read as peers. Each carries only what it needs: a fader, a solo button, and a name that mutes that one channel. There is no bus badge — you are looking at the bus it belongs to — and no rename; both live on the CHANNELS tab where the strip is a peer.

Membership is read live from each track's bus assignment, so rerouting a stem anywhere moves it between buses here immediately.

Empty buses are hidden

A bus with nothing routed to it is not drawn, in this mixer or the Pro Mixer. All sixteen buses still exist and still accept a track — this is only about what the mixer shows — and anything actually carrying audio is always visible. To see the whole desk while patching, turn on Show Empty Buses in Settings → Buses: the empty buses then appear as narrow spines — plain keys of the look with the number at the top, the name down the spine and a mute dot that turns red when muted, and nothing else: no fader, meter or solo. SYNC shows a lock instead of a number, and has no mute dot. (Muting an empty bus ahead of time works: mute Drums before the drummer's song comes up and it is already right when it does.)

Instruments

V·PAD (Vessa Pad, which the Pad module plays) and V·KEYS (Vessa Keys) appear as their own strips; their Vivid line is the Live Inputs blue, and the V· keeps them from reading as the Pads and Keys buses that carry your songs' stems. They are not song material: they converge at the master and never pass through the song bus, so Fade Tracks fades the band while an instrument holds the room.

Instruments have their own output button, like a bus, and they also feed MAIN 2 alongside the band. MASTER changes only their audience feed; their own fader and mute change both. Tracks to audience does not affect Vessa Keys or Vessa Pad.

Touch Zones

Zone Area Gestures
Fader zoneTop ~75% (the name down to the foot)Vertical drag = adjust level. Tap the name = mute. Long-press the name = strip menu. Tap (bus strips) = expand / collapse.
FootBottom ~25% (the bus badge or output button, and the S key)Double-tap = reset to 0 dB. Tap the bus badge = reassign the bus. Tap S = solo.

A horizontal swipe anywhere on a strip scrolls the mixer.

Fader Interaction

Gesture Zone Action
Vertical dragFader zoneAdjust level. 200 pt of travel = 66 dB (-60 to +6 dB).
Double-tapFootReset to 0 dB (unity gain).
Horizontal swipeAnywhereScroll to reveal more channels.
Tap the nameTopMute / unmute.
Long-press the nameTopOpen the strip menu, including Rename.
Tap the bus badgeFootReassign the channel's bus.

Colour

No strip, card or chip is filled with colour. With Vivid, the thin line along the top of each strip is coloured by instrument family, not by bus number — so a bus wears the same colour as the channels on it, and the relationship is visible without reading a label; a channel's bus badge takes the same colour. The four bus cards keep their own — C&C green, MAIN 2 violet, SONG blue, MASTER orange — on their top line and their name. Minimal leaves every strip and card plain. Choose in Settings → General → Compact Mixer → Style. Either way, colour still says state: red for a mute, amber for a solo, cyan for talk, orange for a live mic.

2×2 Aggregate-Bus Band

In the compact presentations — the editor's mixer panel, the Go Live floating Mixer panel (§5.17) and the Pro Mixer on a narrow window — the aggregate buses sit in a 2×2 band above the channel strips: C&C · MAIN 2 (the second mix of the music, usually for the monitors) on the top row, SONG · MASTER below. Each card is a horizontal fader:

Gesture Action
Drag across the wellAdjust level — drag right = louder, left = quieter. The lighter part of the well is the level; 200 pt of travel covers the full 66 dB range.
Tap MMute / unmute the bus. M turns red while the bus is muted.
Double-tap the wellReset to 0 dB, including with Hold faders on.

The bus band. The four cards are plain keys of the look. Each fader is a dark well with the bus's name in it — in the card's colour with Vivid — and the level shows at the right end when it is not at 0 dB; a muted bus reads MUTED there, in red. During adjustment or a reset, the large readout sits outside the well and the small value hides; the bus name stays visible. On a narrow card, MAIN 2 is labelled M2. A thin meter runs underneath. The C&C card carries a MONO key. The MAIN 2 card carries SPLIT on a two-output device, or MONO on a multi-output interface; MONO and SPLIT are held inside a ring when on. With a multi-output interface connected, both cards also carry an output-pair button (see §5.15). When MAIN 2 is not a separate feed — a two-output device in Main mode — its well is drawn out (no lighter part, quiet words) and does not respond; its M still works.

Channel Order

The mixer no longer reorders channels one at a time. Its left-to-right order — shared between the Standard Dock Mixer, the Pro Mixer and the Go Live Performance Grid — follows the global Order preset (see §6d Order), and nothing else: a song has no order of its own. To change the order, edit the Order preset.

Name Display Mode

Names are always set across the head of the strip, at the sizes in Channel Pillar Controls.

Bus Order

The Standard and Pro mixers use the same bus order:

C&C → MAIN 2 → SONG → MASTER

SONG sits next to MASTER. MASTER is always last.

The Go Live Bus Rail follows the signal path instead — C&C → SONG → MAIN 2 → MASTER — and leaves SONG out while the Song Vol module is on the page, so the song never has two faders at once.

9.13 Narrow Windows — the Compact Pro Mixer

Where the console does not fit — the 11-inch iPad in portrait, a Split View half, a small Stage Manager window, the iPhone — the Pro Mixer is the compact mixer (§9.12) under the console's header keys and over its timeline tray, in the page's look (§9.10). Everything the console does has a place here.

Part What it holds
HeaderThe console's keys (§9.0) in as many rows as the width needs, the first always starting with CHANNELS | OUTPUTS and ending with the ✕: the six mute-group keys, MIX and your snapshots with +, the language key, CLEAR SOLO (its place kept), OPTIONS, the MASTER crown (tap it for the compressor, §9.7) and OVER. Snapshots that don't fit wait behind a +n key that lists them all. Keys fold as the console's row 2 does — CLEAR SOLO to its headphones, the language key to its target, MIX to its icon, OPTIONS to its gear — and nothing is shrunk or cut.
OPTIONSSETUP's column: TRACKS TO AUDIENCE, PORTS on a multi-output interface, RAMP and HOLD FADERS (§9.9).
Bus bandC&C, MAIN 2, SONG and MASTER as the compact mixer's cards, SONG and MASTER each with an EQ key (§9.11), and Tracks to audience under them.
StripsThe compact mixer's pillars. With RAMP on, a soloed channel's S reads RESET (on a bus member, a counter-clockwise arrow) — tap it to bring the mix back — and a quick second tap on a name locks its mute (§9.9). What SETUP sets on the console is on the strip: the bus badge, and the hold menu's EQ · Pan…, Mute Groups… and Trim & Pan… (EQ… on V·PAD, V·KEYS and a mic). On OUTPUTS a mic keeps its T (TALK), its effects dot and its FROM chip.
TrayThe console's timeline and transport key (§9.3). In a narrow tray the info line holds what fits: first the initials and title go, then NOW and NEXT (still marked on the region band), then the time.

There is no PERFORM | SETUP and no overview strip here; a >> at the right edge says when the strips run on past the window (§9.8). On an iPhone held sideways (any window too short for the header, the band and the strips together), the header and the bus band stand in a column at the right, the window's full height, scrolling by themselves; the strips and the tray stand at its left, and the strips take all the height above the tray. Where the tray is too narrow for the compressor, it opens under the crown. While following another rig, the Following the rig notice stays on the timeline, or moves onto the disabled transport key when DYN replaces that timeline.


10. MIDI

MIDI Devices

Settings → Hardware → MIDI lists MIDI inputs. Wired devices and other apps have a switch: turning one off makes the whole app ignore it — songs, transport, and instruments alike. Allow messages in Global Connections is the same switch. Wireless inputs follow their Bluetooth connection or the Network MIDI switch, without a second Allow messages switch. Song Load songs and Vessa Keys Play / Control settings choose what an admitted input may do; neither can reconnect a disconnected device.

Devices you have used stay in the list even when they are unplugged, marked Remembered, so a switch you set before a show survives the cable being pulled. Each device is identified in a way that survives unplugging and re-plugging, so its settings come back with it.

Keys → MIDI → Connections also shows remembered inputs and outgoing destinations. For another app on the same device, send to Vessa Rig In and listen to Vessa Rig Out. Vessa reuses these ports' saved identities when it reopens. Ports are available while Vessa is running; reconnection also depends on the receiving app.

Wireless setup: open Bluetooth or Network from Global Connections or Settings → Hardware → MIDI. Bluetooth uses Apple's device browser to connect or disconnect. In Network, the switch beside Network MIDI enables the session; the status shows its advertised name and actual connection count. Connect from the other device. On a Mac, open Audio MIDI Setup → MIDI Studio → Network, select this rig, and click Connect. Then choose Play Vessa Keys, Control Vessa Keys, or both in Global Connections. Roles stay saved when disconnected. Older wireless Allow messages settings no longer block a connection. Bluetooth MIDI connections are shared by iOS, so disconnecting one can also affect other apps using it.

In the song editor’s Info card, tap the large MIDI › button to open Global Song MIDI. Send chooses Vessa Rig Out or specific destinations for every song’s Trigger. Each output can use the channel written in the Trigger or override it with channel 1–16. Receive chooses which inputs may load songs and an optional channel filter. A message must still match the song’s Index, including its channel. These settings apply to all songs and are independent of Vessa Keys assignments; each song keeps its own Trigger and Index. The iPad Info card labels these fields Send on load (Trigger) and Load song (Index), so their direction is clear without extra helper lines. New setups use the virtual output. The old “All destinations” option is removed; an existing broadcast selection becomes an explicit selection of its remembered outputs. Newly connected destinations are not automatically added. A disconnected destination stays selected; messages sent while it is offline are not replayed. Use one route to each receiving app to avoid duplicates.


Vessa Rig supports two per-song MIDI assignments:

Assignment Direction Purpose
MIDI TriggerOutgoingSent by the app every time this song is loaded — use it to recall patches, switch amp channels, arm DAW tracks, etc.
MIDI IndexIncomingReceived by the app to navigate directly to this song — use it so a foot controller or DAW can select songs

Both are set in the Info tab → MIDI Info section for each individual song.


Setting a MIDI Trigger (Outgoing)

  1. Open the Song Editor → Info tab → MIDI Info section.
  2. Tap Learn in the Send on load row (MIDI Trigger on iPhone).
  3. The Learn sheet opens in listening mode (animated pulsing icon). The title reads "MIDI Learn" and the description confirms it will capture the trigger for this song.
  4. Press the button, pedal, or key on your controller.
  5. The message is captured and displayed (e.g. PC#5 Ch1). After 0.8 s the sheet auto-closes and the value is saved.
  6. To clear, tap the ✕ button that appears next to the field.

What happens at runtime: When you select this song, the app sends this MIDI message through the outputs selected in the song editor’s Info → MIDI → Send. External gear (amp switchers, effects units, DAWs) receives it and recalls the matching preset automatically.


Setting a MIDI Index (Incoming)

  1. Open the Song Editor → Info tab → MIDI Info section.
  2. Tap Learn in the Load song row (MIDI Index on iPhone).
  3. The Learn sheet opens and listens for the index command to assign to this song.
  4. Send the desired MIDI message from your controller.
  5. The message is captured, confirmed, and saved.

What happens at runtime: When the app receives this MIDI message on any active MIDI input, it navigates to and loads this song immediately — ideal for foot-controller setlists where each Program Change selects a different song. The MIDI engine runs from app launch, so no manual activation is needed.


MIDI Learn Sheet

Both Learn buttons use the same sheet with an animated pulsing icon. The sheet:


Supported MIDI Message Types

The Learn button and the manual text field both support the following message types:

Type Description Typical Use
Note OnNote press on a keyboard or padTrigger or index a song from a key or drum pad
Control Change (CC)Continuous control or switch (0–127)Sustain pedal, expression, custom switches
Program Change (PC)Patch recall (0–127, all channels)The most common message for song selection
nRPNNon-Registered Parameter Number — 14-bit extended controlFine-grained preset recall on synths/devices
Song SelectMIDI System message selecting song 0–127Some hardware sequencers/DAWs send this
System Exclusive (SysEx)Manufacturer-specific byte stringDeep integration with specific hardware

Manual Input Format Reference

If your controller isn't connected and you know the exact MIDI message, you can type it directly into the MIDI Trigger or MIDI Index text field. The field saves on every keystroke.

Message Type Format to type Examples
NoteNote <name><octave> Ch<n>Note C4 Ch1 · Note F#3 Ch10 · Note Bb2 Ch16
Control ChangeCC#<number> Ch<n>CC#64 Ch1 · CC#7 Ch2 · CC#0 Ch16
Program ChangePC#<number> Ch<n>PC#0 Ch1 · PC#127 Ch16
nRPNnRPN <MSB> <LSB> Ch<n>nRPN 0 64 Ch1 · nRPN 1 22 Ch2
Song SelectSong Select #<number>Song Select #0 · Song Select #127
SysExSysEx <hex bytes>SysEx F0 41 10 42 12 F7

Formatting rules:

Tip: Use the Learn button whenever possible. It is the fastest and most accurate method — it records the exact byte values your controller sends and eliminates manual typos entirely.


nRPN Send Detail

When the app sends an nRPN command it transmits the standard four-message sequence:

  1. CC 99 — parameter MSB
  2. CC 98 — parameter LSB
  3. CC 6 — data MSB (value, always 0 for a trigger; adjust on the receiving device)
  4. CC 38 — data LSB
    Followed immediately by a null-RPN reset (CC 101 = 127, CC 100 = 127) to prevent subsequent CC 6 edits from accidentally modifying the parameter.

SysEx Send Detail

SysEx messages are transmitted as UMP MIDI 1.0 SysEx 7-bit packets. The hex string you enter is parsed byte-by-byte and split into 6-byte chunks with start/continue/end framing automatically applied — you don't need to think about packet framing. All you need to supply is the full message including the F0 header and F7 terminator.

Last-Played Song Restore

The app automatically remembers the last song you selected. On next launch it reopens that song instead of always jumping to the first song in the list. The song list order does not matter for this — the last-played ID is stored independently of sort order.

If the last-played song is deleted, the app falls back to the first song in the list.

MIDI File Import

Associates a Standard MIDI File (.mid) with a song for reference or future playback use:

  1. Tap Load in the MIDI File row.
  2. Browse to and select a .mid file.
  3. The file is copied into the app's storage. Metadata (format, PPQN, file size) is shown immediately.
  4. Tap the trash icon to remove the association (the file is deleted from app storage).

Timecode Offset

Use the TC Offset field to shift the song's start time relative to incoming MIDI timecode. Typical use: compensate for DAW playback latency.


Control Surface modules

Open Live → ••• → Layout Design → Modules → Add MIDI / OSC module, the first entry in the menu. In MIDI / OSC Modules, choose Blank, Buttons, Faders or Patch + Intensity under Start with, or choose a saved surface under Your modules. A new module asks for its name before you tap Create. Created modules carry a keyboard glyph in the Modules list. The chosen module appears in the layout; move and resize it, then tap Done to leave Layout Design. You can add several independent surfaces.

Tap the pencil on the module, then Add control for a button, slider, knob or XY pad. Name the control and add its MIDI or OSC actions. Connections manages MIDI devices; OSC connections manages network destinations. New actions sets the default destination and channel for actions you add next. Editing, restoring a layout and importing a surface never fire its saved performance actions.

Layout: Auto fits buttons, faders, knobs and XY pads to the module’s width and height. Names and values stay compact so the controls get the room: faders have a slim rail and cap, a short knob moves beside its name and value, and an XY pad fills its remaining area. Long names use the card’s full width. Choose 1–6 columns in Edit to keep a particular arrangement. If that arrangement cannot fit at a usable size, scroll vertically or sideways to reach the rest; drag a control’s name or the module frame to scroll without moving its value.

A fader’s Direction can be Auto, Horizontal or Vertical. Auto uses a horizontal rail in a short, wide card and a vertical rail in a tall card; incoming values never change its direction. Existing saved faders keep their fixed direction until you choose Auto. Drag along the visible rail to adjust a fader. Drag a knob right or up to increase it, left or down to decrease it. An XY pad follows the distance your finger moves: right increases X, up increases Y. These drags start from the current value, so touching a control does not jump its value. Edit Name to replace a default label such as Fader 1 with the instrument or parameter you control.

Header: Auto shows the name and pencil when there is room and hides them on short or narrow modules. Choose Show or Hide to override it. To edit locally with the header hidden, hold an ordinary button, a slider/knob/XY label, or the empty module frame, then choose Edit module. Opening the menu or editor sends no performance action. Held-note keys still send on touch-down; the performance areas of sliders, knobs and XY pads keep their immediate controls and have no edit hold menu.

You can also use Live → ••• → Edit MIDI / OSC and choose the module. In Layout Design, tap the pencil on the module’s title bar or beside its name under Modules; that list’s pencil works even if the entire module is hidden. In the editor, set Header → Show, then Done to restore it. Your saved module also has Edit in its ••• menu in MIDI / OSC Modules. An empty module always offers Add control.

These modules follow the page’s Stage, Dusk or Daylight look and Plain, Character or Vintage material. Use the module’s appearance card to choose a different look or return to Match page, just like the other Live modules.

To share a module, open its editor, scroll to Export module, and save the exported file in Files. On the other rig, choose Import module in MIDI / OSC Modules and select that file. Imported modules ask you to map destinations before use.

Receive can perform the control’s action or provide Feedback only, which updates its display without sending. Value controls support pickup so a physical fader need not jump to the software value. Beside the value, an outgoing arrow means Last sent, a checkmark means Confirmed, and opposing arrows mean Move to match for pickup. Feedback changes these marks without moving or resizing the controls. The XY readout gives X then Y, separated by a dot. Choice groups select one button at a time; Use combination links two groups, and Edit combinations changes only the selected pair.

Test deliberately sends the action. Activity → Stop ramps and release notes cancels this surface service’s work. Imported surfaces start paused, ask you to map destinations, and leave receive bindings disabled until checked.

OSC connections use UDP, with a destination address and local reply port. Messages preserve integer, float, text and Boolean values. The X32 profile supplies channel/DCA fader and mute controls with feedback renewal; check the configured address and behavior on your console before a performance. OSC bundles and TCP are not supported.

10a. Vessa Keys — The Layered Instrument

Vessa Keys is Vessa Rig's own playable instrument. Its full-screen workspace is the module opened up: it follows the module's finish — Stage, Dusk or Daylight — and the page's MATERIAL — Plain, Character or Vintage (Material) — on one faceplate, with the module's walnut cheeks when its Trim is Walnut. A patch holds up to four layers, each one either a built-in sound or a third-party AUv3 plug-in, and each with its own place on the keyboard. Every patch carries four intensities — Intimate, Build, Full and Peak — which recall different levels of the same patch. The fifth key independently switches Arranger on or off.

Vessa Keys appears on the Live page as one module, called Keys. Every preset layout starts with it hidden: while arranging, bring it back from the Modules menu (§5.0a). The module is the part you play from (The Live Module, below); the sections after it describe the full workspace, opened with the module's expand key (⤢).

The workspace reuses loaded song data when reopened. Opening patch menus and updating region assignments no longer reload the full song library.

How the module looks is chosen on its card — tap the module in Layout Design, or, without leaving the performance, use ••• → Module looks or a two-finger press-and-hold on the module (§5.0a):

Row Choices
FinishStage · Dusk · Daylight, or Match page to follow the page's look
StyleGrid (default) — six patch keys beside the display. Display — one hand on the instrument: the display between previous and next keys
TrimWalnut (default) — wooden end-cheeks either side of the faceplate, the way a synthesiser is built. None — the faceplate to its edges

Resizing the Grid style gives extra width to the patch keys immediately. Extra height grows the patch keys, intensity keys and display while keeping gaps modest.

Both styles are built like a hardware instrument: keys grouped on plates, a lamp and a word for every state rather than a colour alone, a violet dot-matrix display that looks the same in every finish, and the V·KEYS mark engraved on its power key. A module made too small is cut off at its edge, never shrunk below a readable size.


The Live Module

Keys on both styles

Key What it does
PANICSilences every Vessa Keys note. It takes a double tap, so a stray touch never cuts off held notes. The key reads CUT for a moment after it fires
V·KEYSThe instrument's mark is its power key. Its lamp is lit while Vessa Keys plays; tap to bypass the instrument (the name dims, and the display shows the patch name in a quieter violet with BYPASSED under it where there is room), and tap again to bring it back
Note lampA violet lamp, lit while notes are held on a connected keyboard — a quick answer to "is anything reaching the app?". On the Grid style it sits beside V·KEYS (inside the key when room runs out); on the Display style it is on the display
✋ HANDA key inside the display, at its top-right corner — the same place and size in both styles — showing a hand (you choose), a note (the song chooses) or a pin. Who chooses the patches: Tap to hand them to the song, or take them back — the keys, the lamp and the display change at once, and the song's sound for where you are lands straight away, even while the song is stopped. Its lamp is lit while the choice is yours and dark while the song is choosing. A song that has sounds takes the choice by itself when it loads. Sounds you assign to a song (in the Keys workspace) are seen at once: HAND lights up and is ready to tap — no need to reload the song. Tap twice quickly to keep your own sounds for the night: the key shows a pin, your sound keeps playing, and changing songs no longer replaces your patch set. A single tap releases the pin. The key is dimmed when the song has no patches to follow and the choice is already yours
SHIMMERLatches a fifth sound on top of the patch, whatever the patch is — its lamp lights. It stays on when you change patch. On the Grid style it is the sounding patch key's second job (see The Grid style); on the Display style it is its own key. SHIMMER LEVEL, a slider that reaches the sound as it moves, is in the key's press-and-hold menu. The intensity keys open its filter: dark on Intimate, wide open on Peak
MOD wellThe mod wheel, on screen, down the left edge. Drag up or down from wherever it is — it never jumps to your finger; a violet line shows its position. Let go near the bottom and it springs home to zero. It moves the MOD FILTER of every sound in the patch that has it switched on — pianos start with it off. The mod wheel on your keyboard does the same
Intensity keysThe four intensities share the plate with Arranger. Each intensity wears a bar for its rank — short for Intimate, tall for Peak — and the current one is raised with its bar lit violet. Tap another to recall it; an intensity with nothing stored in it reads dimmed and ignores the tap. Tap the current one again to lock the intensity — locked, changing patch keeps the intensity you are on; unlocked, each patch recalls its own. While the intensity is locked, the current key shows a lit lamp just left of its bar and a closed padlock at its right-hand end; unlocked, it shows only its bar, and the bar never moves (for half a second after a key becomes current, a tap on it is ignored, so a quick double tap never locks by accident). Press and hold to save the sound you are playing into it — levels, effects and the MOD position, even into an empty one; the key reads SAVED
⤢Opens the full workspace

The Grid style

Across the top: PANIC, V·KEYS and the note lamp on the left; the patch-set key (a list glyph), the bank key and ⤢ on the right. Below them, the MOD well, the display (with HAND in its corner), the six patch keys in two rows of three, and four intensities plus Arranger along the bottom. In a short or wide, shallow module the six keys sit in one row above the intensities.

The display is given over to the sounding patch's name — up to three lines, never shrunk, broken between whole words — and a NEXT line: amber NEXT and a patch name while a change is waiting for your hands (see below), or an arrow and the patch the song is about to change to while the song is choosing. The intensity is not repeated on the display: the intensity keys below show it (the current one raised and lit, with its padlock while the intensity is locked). The HAND key sits in the display's corner. When no key on the page holds the sounding patch (the song gave the keys back, or the set doesn't contain it), a small SHIMMER key appears in the display beside HAND, so Shimmer is always one tap away.

The patch keys show one page of six patches from the current patch set (or from the song, while it is choosing). A name that doesn't fit on one line takes two wherever the key is tall enough, broken between whole words; only a name too long for two lines ends in …:

The bank key appears when the set holds more than six patches: one lamp and letter per page — A, B, C — or, past three pages, the current letter and the page count. Tap it to turn to the next page; that page's first patch plays. The keys also turn to whichever page holds the sounding patch.

The Display style

The Display style has no patch keys, so nothing on it glows; the display names the sounding patch.

Across the top: PANIC and V·KEYS on the left, SHIMMER, then ⤢. Below, the MOD well, the display (with HAND in its corner, in the same place as on the Grid style) between a ‹ key and a › key, and four intensities plus Arranger. In a narrow, tall module the display spans the module's width, with the two keys side by side beneath it.

The display has two sides:

‹ and › each show the name of the patch they will go to, broken only between whole words. Tap to move one patch; double-tap to skip one and land two away. They wrap around the list and step over the return point. With exactly two patches, both keys go to the other one; with nowhere to go, they read No other patch.

The patch-set menu

Opened from the Grid style's list key, the Display style's set side, or Choose a Patch Set on an empty row. The compact card has New Patch Set… and Arrange Patches… at the top, then your patch sets with their patch counts and a checkmark on the current one. These appear under My Patch Sets, or Comes back when you do while the song is choosing. Choosing a set puts it on the module and takes the patches back from the song. MIDI Assignments… is below the sets; Done closes the card. Arrange appears once you have a patch set.

When there is nothing to play, the module says why and its tap does what it says: NO SOUNDS YET — TAP TO OPEN V·KEYS, TAP TO START A PATCH SET, CHOOSE A PATCH SET, or "NAME" IS EMPTY — TAP TO ADD A PATCH.

Layouts from earlier versions

Keys used to be three modules, from when the instrument was called Vessa Keys — legacy module 1 (the original panel), legacy module 2 (the pads) and legacy module 3 (the one-hand display). legacy module 1 is retired, and legacy module 2 and legacy module 3 are now the Grid and Display styles of the one module. The first time this version opens, every saved layout and preset is converted once:

The layout showed It now shows
legacy module 2Keys, in the same place, in the Grid style
legacy module 3Keys, in legacy module 3's place and look, in the Display style
legacy module 1Keys, in legacy module 1's place and look, in the Grid style
More than one of themThe first of legacy module 2, legacy module 3, legacy module 1 — the others are removed
None of themKeys stays hidden. When you show it, it takes legacy module 2's old position — else legacy module 3's (in the Display style), else legacy module 1's

Nothing else in the layout changes. A preset file exported from an older version is converted the same way when you import it.

Layouts that save themselves (version 4.29). The first time this version opens, each layout becomes a single saved layout. The one on screen keeps every change you had made to it, even if you never tapped Update; a layout you had switched away from comes back as you left it; the others come back as last saved. POCKET AUTO keeps both orientations, and the small-window layouts both sizes. Nothing you arranged is lost.


Playing Vessa Keys

Play the on-screen keyboard along the bottom of the workspace, or play a connected MIDI keyboard. Both sound the same layers.

The four coloured lanes above the keys show each layer's range — which notes it answers to. Each lane belongs to its strip's slot and wears that strip's colour. Tap RANGE (the sliders key, its lamp lit while editing) to drag a lane's ends; the end notes show while you drag. Tap it again to go back to playing. Notes from your keyboard light the keys violet; a finger lights them in the moon tint. On an 11-inch iPad, an iPad Air or an iPad mini in landscape, the Pad module shows in the lanes' place while V·PAD is on — RANGE brings the lanes back, and V·PAD brings the Pad module back.

The MOD wheel at the far left is the same wheel as the Live module's MOD well — the app has one mod wheel, drawn here in the module's look. It moves the MOD FILTER of every sound in the patch that has it switched on (pianos start with it off), and the mod wheel on your keyboard does the same. The wheel on screen is not passed on to plug-ins.


Arranger

Choose an intensity, then tap Arranger. When on, its wand sits in a filled violet marker and the key is raised; when off, only the wand remains. It shapes accompaniment using sounds already in the patch. In a sound’s editor, Playing: Direct / Arranged decides whether that sound plays your normal notes or receives the accompaniment. Piano and electric piano stay Direct by default; selected factory strings, pads and organs use Arranged. Unknown sounds and plug-ins stay Direct until you choose otherwise.

Arranged sounds choose a small voicing from the notes you play and spread it across the patch. Compatible common tones can stay sounding through a new chord or inversion, including when your hands move to another octave. Open fifths such as G–D–G work without waiting for a third. A brief lift between chords holds existing voices for about two beats, bounded to 0.4–2 seconds; a longer silence releases them. Vessa Pad, by comparison, can hold its main drone until stopped.

Higher intensities allow a fuller voicing; playing strength changes their touch gradually. With a pulse, new notes can enter on its next beat. Without a pulse, settled harmony enters gently. These entrances are deliberate accompaniment timing; sounds set to Direct keep their ordinary keyboard response. Changing harmony cancels an outdated entrance. Source, channel, keyboard range, mute and sound filters still apply. Arranger uses notes you have played; it does not invent extra passing or tension notes from the chart.

The first activation opens listening inputs if none are chosen. Press and hold Arranger to edit them. It works with or without a playing song. Turning it off restores ordinary playing; Panic clears generated notes and pending entrances. It never adds another instrument, changes a plug-in preset, or automatically enables Shimmer.

Older five-intensity patches keep Peak in position four. Old Lift references resolve to Peak; numeric intensity 5 cannot switch Arranger on. The original patch and patch-list documents are kept under Files → Vessa Rig → Vessa Keys Backups before conversion, including customized Lift data. The folder was called legacy instrument backup folder before the rename; the app moves it to the new name when it opens. If both folders exist, everything moves in except a file whose name is already taken in Vessa Keys Backups — that one stays in legacy instrument backup folder. Nothing is overwritten or deleted.


The Header

Control What it does
V·KEYSThe module's power key: its lamp is lit while Vessa Keys plays; tap to bypass
Pedal keyShows whether the sustain pedal is down (the key raised, its lamp lit), from your pedal or from here — tapping it works as a damper. It stays in place in MIDI Learn, so it can be assigned to a footswitch
Readout (the dark well beside the pedal)The last control other than a note that arrived — PEDAL ↓, WHEEL 74, CC20 127 — for three seconds; empty otherwise
DisplayThe sounding patch's name, never shrunk. While a change waits for your hands: amber NEXT over the patch that will land. While the song is about to change patch: SONG over that patch. When Vessa Keys is bypassed: BYPASSED, and the name keeps all its letters in a quieter violet
✋ HAND (in the display's corner)Who chooses the patches — the same key as on the module: tap to hand them to the song or take them back; tap twice quickly to keep your own sounds for the night
✦ SHIMMER (beside HAND)Latches Shimmer on top of the patch; its lamp is lit while it is on. Press and hold for SHIMMER LEVEL
NoticesWhen Vessa Keys refuses notes, or refuses a pedal or wheel, a notice with a red lamp says why. If both are up, the notes one shows. Tap it to read both in full (VoiceOver reads both)
MIDI lampA display, not a button: its lamp lights and the keys glyph turns violet while notes arrive. It is plain when MIDI has arrived before, and quieter when nothing ever has
LEARNEnters MIDI Learn; its lamp is lit while you are in it. On a narrow screen it shows its glyph only
✕Closes the workspace

On a narrow screen (portrait, Split View) the pedal, its readout and the notices move to a second row under the header; in a very narrow window (Slide Over, a phone) the display takes a row of its own. ✕ is always at the right end of the top row.


Layer Strips

Each layer has a strip across the top of the workspace, on its own plate in the layer's colour.

Control What it does
Plug key (with the layer's light)Opens the layer's MIDI panel, in the workspace's look — which keys and inputs it hears (a channel that plays is a raised key with the layer's light on), and Playing: Direct / Arranged. The light is on while the layer is on. The plug takes the layer's colour when the layer hears less than everything, and shows the Arranger's wand while the Arranger plays the layer
Sound nameOpens the sound browser to change this layer's sound. A plug-in shows its icon (on wide strips) and, when it isn't ready, LOADING, FAILED, MISSING or SILENT under its name
⋯Opens the layer's sound editor — a drawer in the strip's colour (The Sound Editor)
REVERB · DELAY · CHORUSHow much of this layer is sent to each effect. — means none. REV · DLY · CHO on narrower screens. What kind of reverb, delay and chorus this sound has is set on the Effects tab of its editor (⋯)
BRIGHTMakes this sound brighter or darker — the same as Brightness in the sound's settings; the bar grows from the middle. 0 means untouched. BRT on narrower screens
FaderThe layer's level
Level key (beside the fader)The layer's light and its level in dB. Tap it to turn the layer off — its light goes dark and its fader grey — and tap again to turn it back on
Plug-in key (under the level key)Opens the plug-in's own window, on tall faders when a plug-in is loaded; otherwise open it from ⋯. Done closes it; drag its title bar to move it and its corner key to resize it

On a short screen each fader becomes a level row — the level key and a slider. An empty strip shows Add Sound. A sound still ringing out after it was replaced shows as a dashed strip you can't touch. While the sound browser is open, each strip's top row and level key stay above it, and the slot the new sound will land in has an amber ring — an empty slot's key, or the name of the layer being changed. The browser is the instrument's own: bank keys, the sounds as keys (a plug-in's icon and maker, WITH FX, or why a row can't sound), the chosen sound raised with its light on, a readout of what's chosen, then MY BANKS · REORDER · IMPORT · AU PLUG-IN and CLOSE · ADD SOUND. CATEGORY and SEARCH open in the same look.

Three readouts tell you when a control cannot act rather than leaving it silent:


The Sound Editor

⋯ on a strip opens the sound editor as a drawer of the instrument, in that strip's colour. Its header has Save Sound, the layer's name with its light (tap to rename) and Remove Sound; a plug-in layer also shows its state with Open Plug-in and Use Built-in (or Choose a Sound, for a layer added as a plug-in). The tabs are keys; the open one is raised.

Tab What it sets
SwellAttack + and Release + add to the recording's own envelope (built-in sounds only); Decay and Sustain show the recording's
DynamicsCompressor on or off; Input, Attack, Release, Ratio, Threshold, Amount, Output
EQEQ On / Off; eight bands — gain in dB, and width in octaves for the six middle bands
FilterThe MOD wheel sweeps the filter from Min to Max; Resonance; Mod Filter on or off
EffectsWhat kind of reverb, delay and chorus this sound has — the strip's sends set how much
SettingsBlock Sustain, Transpose, Touch, Brightness, Width, Voice Count, Fader Range, Sound Level, Pan; MIDI Input shows Direct or Arranged and opens the sound's MIDI panel

EQ, Mod Filter and Compressor each have their own On / Off. Saved sounds keep their previous sound; a saved master bypass becomes all three sections off.

Along the bottom: Replace Sound changes the instrument; Presets puts a saved sound's tone, touch and effects on this one; Discard Changes; Confirm. A fader moves from anywhere on it, and the knobs follow your finger.


Room and Master

Down the right edge:

Both show their values above their faders. MASTER starts level with the layer faders and is never taller than 260 pt. On a short screen the two share the column.


Patches

Patches are listed down the left as keys, each numbered with the program change that reaches it. Tap one to play it. The patch playing is the raised, glowing key — tap it for Shimmer (its light and a violet bar along the key come on; tap again for off); it no longer reloads the patch. With Defer on, a patch tapped while notes are held is ringed in amber and says NEXT, and the playing key says STAY — tap STAY to cancel. A second tap within about half a second counts as the same choice. If the patch library can't be read, a notice says so at the top of the list.

The selector at the top of the list chooses what the list shows:

Row Shows
This SongOnly the patches the loaded song calls for, in the song's own order
All PatchesEverything in your library
My Patch SetsOne of your own lists, in the order you put them in
Recent SetlistsNot a patch filter — open one to see its songs and tap a song to load it, without leaving Vessa Keys

PREV and NEXT at the foot of the list step through whatever is showing.

Adding a patch

Tap ✚ for two choices:

Picking a patch in the library does not play it unless you switch PREVIEW on. With Preview on, tapping a patch plays it, and whatever you were playing comes back when you switch Preview off or close the library.

Use Find a patch to search the names, or use the bank keys to filter the list. Not on This Set appears once a destination is chosen. New Shelf… creates a shelf under User Patches; press and hold a patch to file it there, or hold a shelf to rename or delete it. Deleting a shelf keeps its patches.

Creating and filling a patch set from the Live module

You can create a patch set without opening the full workspace:

  1. Open the patch-set menu — the list key on the Grid style, or the set side of the display (3/9 ⌄) on the Display style.
  2. Choose New Patch Set…, enter a name, and tap Create. The new set goes on the module at once and takes the patches back from the song.
  3. While it has no patches, the module shows "NAME" IS EMPTY — TAP TO ADD A PATCH. Tap that message.
  4. The PATCH LIBRARY opens already aimed at the new set. Select a patch and tap Add to [name]. The library closes and the patch appears in the set.

The same patch cannot be added twice to one set. Creating an empty set is safe: it stays in the patch-set menu, empty, until you fill it.

To fill one particular slot, use the dashed + on an empty position, or Replace With… in a key's press-and-hold menu. The library opens aimed at that slot, with the set's first six slots across its top; tap one of them to aim there instead. With PREVIEW off, tapping a patch puts it straight into the lit slot; with Preview on, tapping plays it and Put in Slot [n] puts it in. Either way the library stays open and the next empty slot lights, so you can fill several in a row — tap Done when you have finished.

Arranging a patch set

Live navigation is kept separate from editing. Open the patch-set menu, choose Arrange Patches…, choose the patch set at the top, and drag its rows into performance order; tap Done to close. The new order is saved immediately and is what the patch keys, the 3/9 counter and the ‹ › keys follow. On the Grid style you can also drag one patch key onto another.

Patch options

Tap ⋯ on a patch row:

Item What it does
Rename Patch
Duplicate PatchA full copy, including its intensities and any plug-in settings
Patch SetsTick the patch sets this patch belongs to
Remove PatchDeletes it

The ten patches that come with the app cannot be deleted — that row reads Comes With the App — Kept instead. You can still take one off any patch set, and once you have edited one it becomes yours and can be removed like any other.


Intensities

The four intensity keys across the bottom are the same patch at different levels — the Keys module's own keys. Tap one and the sound glides to it — the layer levels, the effects, and the MOD position if one was saved there; an empty one ignores the tap. Tap the lit one to lock the intensity (its lamp and a closed padlock show) and tap again to unlock — there is no Lock key. In the workspace, tapping the lit intensity no longer re-recalls its sound: with the lock on, an old-habit tap unlocks it; to re-recall, tap a neighbour and back.

Under each name is what it will do: default means it uses the app's fade time, a fade name like one beat (in figures on narrow screens, e.g. 1½ bars) means it has its own, and empty means nothing has been stored there yet. A dot marks the intensity the patch opens on (beside the name when the line is short).

The intensity row also contains the separate Arranger key. No word on the row is ever cut short: where equal keys would cut a name (an 11-inch iPad in portrait), each key takes the room its words need and they share the rest, and the left keys fold first; only on a window too narrow even for that (an iPad mini in portrait, Split View) do the five scroll, the current one kept in view.

Press and hold an intensity for its menu — holding never saves by itself:

Item What it does
Save Current SoundSaves what you're playing into this intensity: levels, effects and the MOD position
Rename Intensity
CustomizeIts own fade time and what it recalls. Turn Use custom settings on first — until then the rows show the defaults this intensity follows
Move Left · Move RightSwaps what this intensity holds with the one beside it. The four stay in their order — only their contents move — so a controller button you learned for the third intensity still reaches the third
Recall with patchThe intensity a patch loads with; a tick marks the one already chosen
ClearEmpties it. It then reads empty and ignores a tap until you save into it again
Reset to FactoryOnly on a patch that came with the app: puts this one intensity back the way it shipped

Along the bottom bar:

Control What it does
PANICDouble-tap to silence every note at once — it reads CUT for a moment. A single tap does nothing, so a stray touch can't cut the sound. Use it if a note sticks
GearVessa Keys Settings
CardSaves the sound you're playing — levels, effects and the MOD position — into the active intensity
MIDIOpens Keys MIDI (receive and send)
CLICKThe metronome, as on the Live page's Transport: tap to bypass it, double-tap to mute it, swipe up or down for its level, press and hold for its settings. Green while it clicks; MUTED while it runs silent. On the 13- and 11-inch iPads in landscape it carries its word; on narrower screens it shows its icon, and a swipe's level appears just above the key
⏮Back to the top of the song. Shown in Play / Pause mode while the song plays or the playhead is away from the start. With Stage Safety's Require double tap to Stop on, it needs two taps
PLAYThe Live page's PLAY key. PLAY is the Live page's start: it announces the song, counts it in and waits for the bar exactly as the Live page's PLAY does. PLAYING (green) while it runs — tap to stop, or to pause in Play / Pause mode. STOP while a vamp segue waits in its held vamp — tap to end it. ARMED while a start waits for its bar — tap to cancel it. Stage Safety's double taps work exactly as on the Live page. On the narrowest screens PLAY beside ⏮ shows its icon alone
Following the rigWhile this device follows the rig (Play the rig's song too is on), CLICK, ⏮ and PLAY don't answer, and the header says Following the rig — tap it for the whole message

The V·PAD Key

V·PAD, beside the keyboard, shows the Pad module itself inside the Keys workspace — the same instrument as the Pad module on the Live page (§5.19) and the V·PAD strip in the mixer, drawn on the Vessa Keys faceplate as one row. One pad, reached from three places: change its key here and it changes everywhere.

It works exactly as on the Live page: Power; the display (the key, ◀ sound ▶ and the level — tap the name for Pad Sound, drag across it for the level; both roots show while Follow's second note plays); Follow (tap to arm, press and hold for Choose keyboard…); BRT; SHM; and the twelve keys.

V·PAD's key is raised while the pad shows here, and its lamp is lit while the pad plays — even when it is hidden.


The Song Strip

The loaded song sits on its own plate: its cover and title, the waveform to scrub, and the time. Below them: Undo and Clear when they apply, WHOLE SONG, then a chip per section — its colour dot and name; under that a light (lit = its own patch, dark = follows the song, dashed red = MISSING, its patch was deleted), the patch or Song, and bars for the intensity it arrives at. The section playing lights in its colour. Tap a chip to give that section the sound you are playing (WHOLE SONG sets one patch for all of it, Clear removes an assignment); press and hold for Intensity or Play through. On a narrow window the cover and title make room; the scrubber, Undo and Clear stay.

With this set up, choose This Song in the patch selector and the list shows only what the song calls for, in the order it happens. On the Live module, tap HAND to let the song choose: the keys show the song's patches, and on the Grid style the display names the one it changes to next.


Using AUv3 Plug-ins

Any AUv3 instrument installed on your iPad can be a layer.

  1. Tap a layer's sound name to open the sound browser.
  2. Choose AU Plug-Ins among the banks (a row above the sounds on a narrow screen). Every AUv3 instrument on this iPad is there, and in All, with its app's icon and its maker.
  3. Tap one, then ADD SOUND or SWAP SOUND. Plug-ins are not previewed, and the readout says so. AU PLUG-IN opens the picker in the workspace look, with Search, RESCAN and CANCEL around the installed plug-in list. Missing a plug-in you have installed? opens the discovery details.

The plug-in loads into that layer and the strip shows its icon. Tap the icon to open the plug-in's own interface — its presets, its controls, everything it normally offers. Close it with Done, and whatever you dialled in is saved with the patch, and copied along if you duplicate it.

To go back to a built-in sound, open the layer's ⋯ editor and choose Use Built-in.

If a plug-in you own is not in the list, tap Missing a plug-in you have installed? at the bottom. It reports what the app can actually see and why, including whether any third-party plug-ins are reaching it at all.

What the badge tells you. A layer only reads AUv3 when the plug-in is genuinely the sound you are hearing. Other states are shown plainly:

Badge Meaning
AUv3Loaded and sounding
LOADINGStill starting up
AUv3 SILENTLoaded, and its interface opens, but it is not producing audio
PLUG-IN FAILEDIt could not be started
NOT INSTALLEDThe patch names a plug-in that is not on this iPad

While Vessa Keys is on screen — the Live module or the workspace — it checks its plug-ins every second. One that has stopped producing sound is shown as AUv3 SILENT straight away and Vessa Keys tries to load it again, so a stopped plug-in never keeps a confident badge on the screen you play from.


Vessa Keys on another device

Use one device to play Vessa Keys’ sounds and the main rig to control it:

  1. Put both devices on the same local network. On the main rig, open Live → ••• → Remote Control, name the rig if needed, and turn on Let Others Join.
  2. On the sound device, open Remote Control and choose the main rig under Connection. Use Module Screen as its device job so its own modules, including Vessa Keys, remain accessible. If that job is unavailable, grant the device Volunteer or Leader access under Who’s Connected on the main rig, then choose Module Screen on the sound device.
  3. On the sound device, open Keys → MIDI → Receive. In the Control Vessa Keys section, tap Sound device. Under Allow control of Vessa Keys on this device, enable the main rig.
  4. On the main rig, open the same Sound device screen. Under Sound runs on, select the sound device’s name. If asked, confirm stopping local Vessa Keys before switching.

The main rig then shows the sound device’s actual patches, four intensities, Arranger and readiness. The connection and device-job settings are described further in Using More Than One Device.

Connect the keyboard and audio outputs to the sound device. To set up Arranger’s listening input, press and hold Arranger on that device and choose the keyboard. The main rig sends control commands; this connection does not carry keyboard notes or audio. You can select patches, follow song/region assignments, change intensity, use Shimmer and cancel a waiting patch change. A second controller must explicitly take control.

Outgoing Vessa Keys actions identify the device and destination that should send them. A mixed combination is resolved once, with each message sent by its assigned device. Missing or unconfirmed outputs are reported. A lost connection leaves the remote sound running, shows disconnected state, and never silently starts local Vessa Keys. Reconnect obtains fresh state; missed commands are not replayed.


Vessa Keys Settings

Tap the gear in the bottom bar to open Vessa Keys Settings, in the workspace finish and material. Each section folds away when you are not using it. Open settings use grouped rows with values in readout wells. Beats and Seconds are keys; the selected one rises and lights. Done closes the sheet.

Section What is in it
VelocityA softest/loudest range for how loud a key strike plays. It compensates for a keyboard, not for the sound: the recording that sounds still follows your touch, so raising Softest never takes a sound's quiet layers away. (Applies to Vessa's own sounds; a GM or plug-in sound picks its own layers from the one number it receives.)
Intensity LevelsDefault fade length in beats or seconds; when Effects change; whether recalls Move the mod wheel. Intensities with their own custom transition keep it
KeyboardWhether the on-screen keys light as notes arrive, and whether they can be played by touch
Changing PatchesWait for my hands — whether a patch change waits until you lift your hands. Tap the waiting patch again to bring it in now; after a few seconds it comes anyway

Open MIDI → Connections for device settings. Each input remembers its own settings independently — set your gear up at home, set different gear up at church, and neither disturbs the other.

Setting What it does
Play Vessa KeysThis device's notes sound the instrument
Control Vessa KeysAssigned notes, program changes and CCs drive patches, intensities and faders
ChannelListen to one MIDI channel only, or all of them

One device can do both — a keyboard with knobs and buttons plays and controls at once. A device nobody has configured plays and controls on every channel, so a single keyboard needs no setup.


Keys MIDI — Receive

Tap MIDI in the workspace's bottom bar. In the compact module, open the patch-set menu and choose MIDI Assignments….

Monitor sits directly below Connections. Fold it to keep the latest three messages visible without timestamps; open it for the scrolling history with times, outcomes and the last learned assignment. Clear is always in its header. The card stays the same height as messages arrive. A sustain pedal should show both DOWN and UP. MIDI and Settings share the workspace’s raised cards, neutral text and small colour accents.

Each card names its scope. Global marks settings shared across the app, including connections and Receive assignments that work across Vessa Keys patches. This patch, This patch button, This intensity, and This combination identify settings saved for that specific item. Editors keep the scope and affected name visible.

To recall a particular patch:

  1. Choose the current patch under Recall a patch, or tap All patches to find another.
  2. Tap Learn from controller, then press its button. Or enter Message, Number, Channel, and From yourself.
  3. Tap Save assignment.

Program Change, Control Change, and Note On can recall a patch. Numbers use 0–127; channels use 1–16. Learn captures the controller's actual number, source, and channel without performing the action. The assignment keeps choosing that patch after renaming, reordering, filtering, or switching patch sets.

A message already assigned to another Vessa Keys control requires an explicit replacement. A conflicting song MIDI Index must be changed in that song first. A mapped message is consumed before it reaches song selection or hosted instruments. Deleted patches never redirect their assignments to another patch.

Control Vessa Keys edits the same assignments as the existing Learn overlay. Continuous controls need a CC. For patch, intensity, next/previous, and Panic buttons, a CC fires when it reaches 64 or above, then must return below 64 before firing again. Layer on/off and sustain follow the CC's high/low state; a Note or Program Change toggles them. Sustain, expression, and other performance controllers remain available to play the instrument and cannot be reassigned here.

In Connections, connect the wireless input or enable Allow messages for a wired/app input, then turn on Control Vessa Keys under VESSA KEYS · ALL PATCHES. The device's channel choice still applies. A specific patch's musical input channel does not block recalling another patch.

Recall by button position

Recall patches by patch-button position is off for new setups. Existing rigs retain their previous behavior. Fixed assignments always take priority; adding one does not change this switch.

Choose Recall channel to reserve a channel for button recall. Program number for patch button 1 sets the starting number:

Setting First button Second button
0Program 0Program 1
1Program 1Program 2

Unassigned programs on that channel follow the displayed patch order. Other channels remain available to plug-ins. Any channel applies position recall on all channels.

Instrument presets

Under Instrument presets, tap the specific hosted sound. Turn on Receive Program Changes, choose From, On channel, and Plug-in channel. These settings belong to this sound in this patch, independently of its keyboard input.

For example, assign Program 10 on channel 1 to a Vessa Keys patch. Set the plug-in to receive on channel 2. Program 10 on channel 2 then changes that plug-in's preset; Plug-in channel can translate it to channel 1 if the instrument expects that. A fixed assignment using Any channel would consume both, so use a specific channel for this setup.

New sounds start with preset changes off. Existing sounds retain their old routing until you choose Configure preset changes. Bank Select from the same input and channel is delivered before its accepted Program Change. A message used for Vessa Keys recall is not also forwarded into the newly selected plug-in. Program support depends on the plug-in.

Keys MIDI — Send

Open MIDI → Send. From the Vessa Keys editor, choose a patch, then Add action. From the performance module, you can also choose a patch button or intensity in its patch set and edit their combinations. A patch button is one of the module’s sound-selection buttons; it is separate from the intensity buttons.

Choose a destination and channel for each action. Vessa Rig Out sends to apps listening to that port. Hardware and other apps' MIDI inputs appear as direct destinations. Choose one route to each receiver to avoid duplicate delivery. Connections sits above Receive / Send, as one shared entry for the whole app. Tap Rename beside a device to set its Name in Vessa. That name appears in both input and destination pickers; original port names remain visible in Connections. Offline assignments remain saved; a missed action is not replayed on reconnect.

Global Connections states the shared scope once at the top. Each app or device has one card, with arrows showing the direction (for example, MIDI Designer → Vessa and Vessa → MIDI Designer). Allow messages enables or blocks incoming MIDI from wired devices and apps for the whole app. Wireless inputs instead follow their connection, so they have no second admission switch. Connected / Offline reports availability independently of that switch. Under each wireless input, or an enabled wired/app input, Play Vessa Keys, Control Vessa Keys, and Channel apply to that input across all Vessa Keys patches. Turn on either role or both. Turning Allow messages off keeps those choices saved. Bluetooth and Network buttons at the top open connection setup; recognized wireless connections have a Bluetooth or network glyph beside their device name. Tap a device heading to collapse its whole card, or a port heading to collapse that port. These choices are remembered independently and do not disable MIDI. Rename opens with the name field ready to type. Hardware ports with a shared device identity and unambiguous matching app ports group automatically, including saved offline pairs with incomplete discovery metadata. Pairing changes the display card, not the separate input and output routing identities. If port names do not reveal a clear pair, use Share name with while renaming to pair them yourself. Use separate names undoes pairing; Use original names removes the nickname. Multi-port devices retain the port name beside the nickname so their routes remain distinguishable. Names are saved on this device only: assignments, channels and port identities stay unchanged, and other apps keep seeing the original names. Earlier output nicknames are preserved when those ports are discovered.

When a virtual app returns with a new port ID, Vessa reconnects it to its saved entry when its name and direction identify one unambiguous port. Previous IDs continue to resolve saved assignments, input permissions, and output actions. Old duplicate entries are consolidated on rediscovery, including entries saved by earlier versions. After updating, open the other app once so Vessa can repair its saved ports; no reset or reassignment is needed. Disabled wired/app inputs stay disabled. Wireless inputs use their connection state. Hardware, simultaneously advertised same-name ports, distinct nicknames, and explicitly separated entries are not guessed into one connection. An app with ambiguous ports may still need manual setup. Conflicting old assignments are reported instead of firing multiple controls.

Patch actions follow the sound. Patch button actions belong to that patch-set entry, including when its sound is replaced. Intensity actions belong to the current patch set. From either a button or intensity, open a named combination to change or disable actions for just that pair. Reset combination to defaults removes its overrides.

Selecting either control sends the resulting combination once. Combined result shows the final actions and their owners. Identical actions collapse into one; different channels, destinations and controller numbers stay separate. A button or intensity overrides the same address in the patch defaults. Conflicting button and intensity values must be resolved before saving. Use this value in conflicting combinations saves explicit overrides for those pairs.

For a ramp, enable Change gradually, then enter From, To, and Over. For example: CC 25, 50 → 110, over 3 seconds. Start from last sent value continues from Vessa's last successful value; If unknown supplies a fallback. This is last-sent knowledge, not a reading from the instrument. A new action for the same controller replaces its earlier ramp. Bank selectors, switches and channel-mode controllers cannot ramp.

Programs normally send only when different from the last successful send. Enable Send on every selection if the destination is also changed elsewhere. Test action, Test combination, and Send current combination again send immediately and bypass program suppression. Editing and saving send nothing. Activity shows sent actions, skipped programs and delivery problems; it can stop ramps and release sent notes. Panic also clears outgoing work. Backgrounding stops ramps and releases owned note pulses rather than replaying stale work later.

A patch waiting under Wait for my hands sends only when it actually takes effect. Cancelling it sends nothing. The sounding patch button keeps its existing Shimmer/Stay behavior. Direct recalls use button context only when that patch has one unambiguous entry in the loaded patch set.

Use Send actions for outgoing patch and intensity messages. For held buttons and reusable control groups, use a Control Surface module. Hosted plug-in Send destinations, delayed sequences and combination copying in Vessa Keys Send remain pending. Incoming plug-in Program Change routing is available now.

What a Sound Hears

Open a sound's MIDI panel. MIDI sheets use 18 pt minimum explanatory text and 20 pt primary controls, with larger headings. Text supports larger accessibility sizes; long names wrap instead of shrinking. Pickers use the same readable choice rows.

Keyboard input → Slot settings shares playing inputs and channels with sounds using that slot across patches. Custom for this sound keeps an individual setup; switching to Custom copies the current input settings. New sounds use slot settings. Existing saved sounds keep their custom routing until you change this choice. Slot input settings are local to this device.

Slots are the four visible sound positions. Removing a sound leaves its slot empty; the others keep their positions and MIDI inputs, including after reopening the patch. Replacing a sound keeps its slot.

Section Scope and purpose
PLAY FROMInputs and on-screen keys; follows the Keyboard input choice
PLAY ON CHANNELSPlaying channels; follows the same choice
NOTE RANGEThis sound's keys; tap Low or High, then play a key
TRANSPOSEThis sound's note shift
Controllers and expressionThis sound's allowed controllers, notes, bend and aftertouch
INSTRUMENT PRESETSThis plug-in's separate Program Change source and channels

The device's enabled state and Vessa Keys device role still apply. The patch's musical channel still applies to playing notes. Preset channels are configured separately.

Under Controllers and expression, tap Controllers to see all 128 CCs by number and name. Checkmarks identify allowed controllers; All and None change the list. All Notes Off at the foot of the main panel silences ringing notes.


MIDI Learn

Tap LEARN in the header. The display's part of the header turns into the learn band — MIDI LEARN, how many controls are assigned, a hint, RESET ALL and DONE — while V·KEYS, the pedal and its readout, the MIDI lamp, LEARN and ✕ stay where they are (on a narrow screen the band keeps RESET ALL and DONE; its colour says you are learning). Every control that can be assigned is outlined — dashed when it has no assignment, solid when it has one, a thick ring while it waits for your controller — and shows its current assignment on a badge: CC-80, PC-3, or — if it has none.

  1. Tap a control. It shows LEARN…
  2. Move the knob, fader or button on your controller.
  3. It is assigned, and the control shows its new label. The captured message does not also perform the action. If it conflicts, open MIDI to review the assignment.

Tap DONE to leave, or RESET ALL to clear every assignment. Assignments are kept for the whole instrument, not per patch, so a fader you assign keeps working as you change patches.

You can assign the master level, the room (reverb) level, the mod wheel, each layer's level and on/off, each of the four intensities, Arranger, next and previous patch, panic, and the sustain pedal.

A learned next/previous footswitch walks whatever list you are looking at — the full patch list while the workspace is open, and the Live module's list when it is not (every patch in it, not only the six on the keys). It stops at either end rather than wrapping round. Unlike the Display style's ‹ › keys, it does not step over a saved return point.


11. Settings

Tap Settings at the foot of the Live page's ••• menu. Settings opens as a full-screen cover over the entire app and is closed with the ✕ at its top right — there is no swipe-down.

Settings holds what you set up once: stage-safety guards, the click's timing, routing, MIDI devices, where tracks go. How the app looks is not chosen here any more — the colour theme, the page look and each module's look are all chosen on the Live page, where you can see the change as you make it (see Not in Settings below).

Audio-engine implementation choices are automatic; there are no old/new engine switches to configure. Development builds also include Hardware → Tier Preview for checking the app at each subscription tier. This preview resets when the app relaunches and is absent from App Store builds.

Layout

Element Description
Tab strip (top)Five tabs in one row: General · Hardware · Tracks · Buses · About, centred, with the ✕ beside them. The chosen tab is lit in the colour theme's accent. Icons appear beside the names when there is room; on a narrow window or with very large text the tabs wrap onto two rows. Settings reopens on the tab you last used in that window.
CardsEvery group of settings is a card. Its title is in capitals beside a small accent tick; some titles carry a live status on the right (the Audio Engine card shows the sample rate the hardware actually granted), and a short note under the card says what it is for.
ColumnsOn a wide screen the cards flow into two columns — read down the left, then down the right. On a narrow one they stack.

Settings is always drawn dark; it does not follow the Live page's look.


General Tab

The cards, in order: Stage Safety, Tiles, Compact Mixer, Click & Metronome, Vamp Track, SEGUE Announcements, Marker Cue Offset, Library and Maintenance.

Stage Safety

Everything that prevents a mistake mid-set.

Option Default Description
Require double tap to StartOffPrevents accidental starts.
Require double tap to StopOffPrevents accidental stops mid-set. Also guards the rewind key the transport shows in Play / Pause mode.
Require double tap for AUTOOnGuards the transport's AUTO key, which arms every automatic transition in the set. Both directions are guarded — turning it on can start a song you meant to start by hand.
Scrub the timeline while playingOffOff locks the playhead so a stray finger can't move it mid-song. On, you can drag it while the song plays.
Play / Pause modeOffOn, PLAY pauses and keeps the playhead, so you resume from where you left off, and a rewind key joins CLICK and AUTO on the transport (§5.3). Off, stopping rewinds to the start of the song.

What a guard looks like on the Live page. While PLAY or the rewind key needs a double tap, it wears a thin guard ring around its edge. On any guarded key — PLAY, rewind, AUTO or a bus mute — the first tap turns its edge amber; a second tap within 0.4 seconds does it. If no second tap comes, the key goes back to normal.

Tiles

Option Default Description
Tile styleVividHow the Mixer Tiles module draws its tiles (§5.16). Vivid puts the track's colour along the top edge of each tile; Minimal leaves every tile neutral. Independent of the compact mixer's style.

Compact Mixer

The compact (pillar) mixer only (§9.12).

Option Default Description
StyleVividVivid draws each bus's colour as a thin line along the top of a strip or bus card, and on a channel's bus badge and a bus card's name; Minimal draws no bus colour. No strip is ever filled with colour.

Pro Mixer settings are in the Pro Mixer. Hold faders (shared with the compact mixer) is set with RAMP — a key in SETUP's column on the console, behind the header's OPTIONS key on a narrow window (§9.9). The Pro Mixer follows the page LOOK (§9.10).

Click & Metronome

The card's status line always shows both timing values — for example click 0 ms · visual 320 ms.

Option Default Description
Advanced — Click timing—Folded away behind a warning: Already set right. Guess at these and the click sits off the band, with nothing on screen to say why. Set them by ear, while a song plays. Inside:
↳ Metronome offset0 msShifts the click and count-off against the music, −300 to +300 ms in 5 ms steps. Does not move an imported click stem.
↳ Visual sync (AirPlay)320 msDelays the on-screen flash to match what you hear over AirPlay, 0–600 ms.
↳ Reset click timing to default—Appears only when either value has been changed; puts both back.
1-bar count-in when the metronome is offOnAdds a one-bar count-off before Start on a song whose metronome mode is Silent.

The beat flash's colours are fixed: the first beat of the bar is green, drawn a little thicker, and the other beats are white — a dark grey on the transport in the Daylight look, where white would vanish. Where the beat flashes is each song's Visual Pulse, set in the metronome button's long-press picker (§5.3).

Vamp Track

Option Default Description
Create a vamp track automaticallyOnA tempo-matched vamp track is built the first time a song with a settled tempo loads, so VAMP always has something to hold.
Show the vamp track in the mixerOnIt rides the Loops bus either way — this is whether it also gets its own channel strip. The same switch is in the Vamp Settings sheet.

Songs already carrying a vamp track keep it. Delete one from the editor and it stays gone for that song. See §5.13.

SEGUE Announcements

Speaks the next song and region during a SEGUE (§5.20).

Option Default Description
Spoken announcementsOnTurns the announcements on or off.
Speech rate1.00×0.5× to 1.5×. Unavailable while announcements are off.

Marker Cue Offset

How far ahead of each region boundary a cue marker is placed. The status line shows both values.

Option Default Description
Beat offset2 beatsUsed when the song has a BPM: markers are placed this many beats before each region starts. Range 0–8.
Time offset2.0 sUsed when it doesn't: markers are placed this many seconds before each region starts. Range 0–8, in 0.5 s steps.

Library

Option Default Description
Confirm before removing from a collectionOnAsks first. The song always stays in your library.

Maintenance

Action Effect
Tidy song namesRemoves a trailing program change and key from titles carried in from another app — CREO EN TI-96-D becomes CREO EN TI. Opens Tidy Song Names, which shows you every change first.
Clear waveforms for all songsClears the stored waveform data for every song in the library. They regenerate next time you open each song. Use this if waveforms look wrong across several songs.

To clear the waveform for a single song, use Clear Waveforms in the Maintenance card at the foot of that song's Info tab (§6a Stats & Maintenance).


Hardware Tab

The gear connected to the rig: the audio engine, routing, the sync signal and MIDI devices.

Audio Engine

The card's status shows the sample rate the hardware is actually running at. Both settings are requested at the next engine cold start.

Setting Default Description
Preferred Sample RateAutomaticAutomatic takes whatever the device is running at — almost always the right answer. Or ask for 22.05, 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz; the hardware decides what it grants.
Buffer size512Audio I/O buffer size: 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024 or 2048 frames, each shown with its latency at 44.1 kHz (512 = 11.6 ms). Smaller is lower latency but more CPU.

Routing

Setting Default Description
Send audio to displaysOffOff reserves Apple TV and wired displays for lyrics and video — your interface keeps the sound. On allows display audio; choose the output in iPadOS if needed. Applies the moment you flip it. An orange warning appears under it if the route needs attention.
Live mic channelOffAdds two mic channels to the mixer. Takes effect after you restart the app. Both start muted on a fresh install; after that each comes back the way you left it (If a mic looks dead). Turning it on asks iOS for microphone access.
Microphone access—Shown while the mic channel is on but access is missing: Allow microphone raises the iOS prompt; Open iOS Settings if access was declined.
Mic status—Shown while the mic channel is on: Connected (with how many input channels are arriving and which mics are open), Off, No access, Unavailable, No input, Needs an interface, Waiting or Fault, each with a sentence saying what to do.
Keep audio off the screen—Shown while microphone access is missing. iOS only lets an app hold your interface as its audio route while it also has input access, so without it a connected monitor can still take the sound.

Sync Signal

A signal on Bus 16 for gear that needs to know the rig is alive. Give it a physical output nothing is listening to; it needs a multichannel interface, because on a stereo device every output is one the audience is already on.

Setting Default Description
SignalOffOff — Bus 16 is silent. Failover tone — a steady 1 kHz tone; if the rig freezes or dies the tone stops and a switcher can take over. SMPTE timecode — for lighting desks and video playback, and also a failover signal, since it stops when the rig does. Applies immediately.
Frame rate30SMPTE timecode only: 24, 25, 29.97, 30 or 23.976. Match what the receiving desk expects; changing it mid-set makes every device re-lock.
Drop frameOffAt 29.97 and 23.976 only. Renumbers the count so it tracks the wall clock — no frames are dropped, only their labels. Match the receiving system.
Sync outputOffThe physical output channel carrying the signal — Ch 3 upward. Channels 1 and 2 are never offered, because they carry the main mix. Unavailable with only two outputs.

MIDI

Setting Default Description
Each MIDI device—Wired/app inputs have a global on/off switch. Wireless inputs show connection status; use Bluetooth or Network above to connect or disconnect. See §10.
Send MIDI trigger on launchOffSends the last-played song's MIDI Trigger at startup, to recall a patch on your gear.

Tip: Leave Send MIDI trigger on launch off until you are certain your gear is powered and connected before you open the app. That way you avoid stale MIDI commands going to equipment that isn't ready.


Tracks Tab

Where an imported track lands, by name — the full story is in §9.5a.

Card What it does
Where Should It Go?Type a track name to see the bus it would be given at import, and why. Always send it to makes a rule of your own for that name; when songs in your library already match, Apply to N songs in your library re-routes them too.
My RulesAppears once you have made a rule. Your rules beat every built-in rule; each has a bin to remove it.
Combined Click + Cues FileClick L · Cues R (default) or Cues L · Click R — which side is which in a combined file that was not split on import, so VAMP mutes the cues and keeps your click.
Restore DefaultsRe-route (the loaded song), Re-route All (the whole library) and Delete n (all your rules, restoring the built-in table). Each asks first; none can be undone.
Bus ReferenceEvery track name the built-in rules recognise, in one folding card per destination — each instrument bus and the catch-all, plus Click & Cues and Reference Mix, which are not buses. Expand All / Collapse All opens or folds them together; typing in the search field filters them.

Buses Tab

The sixteen buses, as the whole app names them (§9.5).

Card What it shows
Instrument BusesEach instrument bus with its number and purpose. Imported tracks are routed to these by name. Tap the title to fold it.
In the MixerShow Empty Buses (default off) — draws buses with nothing routed to them. Useful while patching a rig; noise during a show.
Catch-allWhere anything that matches no instrument rule lands.
Utility BusesBuses that are not instrument groups; auto-assignment never places a track here.

About Tab

The app name, and Sound Credits — where every bundled sound comes from, who made it and under what licence.


Not in Settings

These used to live in Settings and are now chosen where you can see them:

Looking for Where it is now
Colour theme — Stage Teal, Rosewood, Golden Era, TitaniumThe Live page's ••• menu, at the top: APPEARANCE → COLOUR THEME. A swatch applies on tap and the menu stays open, so you see the change on the page behind it. A rig that had chosen a theme that has since been retired opens on Titanium.
The page's look — Stage, Dusk, DaylightThe same strip: APPEARANCE → LOOK.
A module's look — finish, style, trimThe module's card: tap it in Layout Design, or use ••• → Module looks, or a two-finger press-and-hold on the module (§5.0a).
Region colours on the Live timeline — Off · Full · LineThe Timeline row on the Regions module's card. It also sets the region colours on the Keys song strip.
Pro Mixer long-press faders (now Hold faders)SETUP's column on the console; the header's OPTIONS key on a narrow window (§9.9).
Beat flash coloursFixed — see Click & Metronome above.

Retired altogether: the Sidebar Style (setlist row style) and Sidebar Background choices, the three themes Nebula, Florida Sunset and Sunny Day, the Regions banner's navigation widget and waveform switches, the beat-colour pickers, the tile Grid Density, and the Pro Mixer's pan-style switch (its PAN row always draws the needle).


11a. Sharing, Backup & Import

Vessa Rig can hand a song or a whole setlist to another device — or make a safety copy of your entire library — through a small family of files. Every one of them opens back into the app; the ones marked with Audio also carry the actual stems, so the copy plays on its own.

Sharing a Song

Open a song's Share sheet (the share action in the library, or from Go Live) and you get:

Option Makes Contains
Lyric SheetA printable PDFLyrics with chords over the words (chords can be turned off; transposed or original key)
ChordProA ChordPro text fileChords + lyrics for OnSong and other chart apps
Song File.vrsoAll the song's data — lyrics, chords, regions, markers, settings — no audio
Song with Audio.vrsaEverything above plus the audio stems — a complete, self-contained copy
Song with Audio (Zip).zipThe same bundle as a standard zip that also opens on any computer

A Song File or Song with Audio also carries the song's pictures — its intro slide, its region backgrounds and its top layers — and its spoken title announcement, if it has one. They arrive in the new song's own folder, so a shared song looks and sounds on the other device the way it does on yours.

Who's it for

Not everyone you share with needs the same things. Under Song with Audio there's a Who's it for row; open it and choose:

What travels
A musicianStructure, chords, lyrics, regions, the click & cue tracks, and the band as one stereo mix — not your stems
ProjectionWords, images and video clips — no audio at all
EverythingA full copy, including every stem

It starts on A musician, and the row underneath always says what the current choice will send, so you can see what is about to leave the iPad without opening anything. That default is deliberate: backing tracks you bought are usually licensed to you, so a band member can have everything they need to rehearse — the arrangement, the regions, the click in their ears — without being handed the multitracks themselves.

The mix a musician gets

Choose A musician and Vessa Rig mixes your band down to one stereo file and sends that instead of the stems. On their device it arrives as a single strip called Backing Track, on the Soundtrack bus, with your click and cue tracks still beside it as their own strips — so they can turn the click down in their ears without touching the band.

What the mix carries, and what it does not:

The mixer as it stands right now is what gets mixed down. Not a saved snapshot — what the faders, mutes and solos are set to at the moment you tap Share. That is deliberate: you can set up a different balance for one player, send it, and never save it. Recall your saved mix first if that is what you want them to have.

In the mix Not in the mix
Track faders where they are right nowYour master fader, glue and limiter
Muted and soloed tracks — a muted track is silent in their filePan — every track is rendered centred
Bus faders, bus mutes and bus solos
Each track's input trim, EQ, fades and silences

Two consequences worth knowing before you send one:

A song that has only one music track is not mixed down at all; the file you already have is sent as it is. Re-rendering a single file would only make it slower and lossier.

Leaving out an instrument

Under Who's it for there is a Leave out row. It lists the instrument families this song actually has, with how many tracks each one holds and their names — so on a song with five guitars you can see exactly what is going before you send it.

Pick one and that family is left out of the mix. Your keyboard player gets the band without the keys and plays their own part over it; your guitarist gets it without the guitars. The file is named so they can tell at a glance — Backing Track (no Keys).

It is off by default, and it is a choice you make per person — nothing is detected or removed on its own. On a song with only one music track the row says so rather than offering a control that cannot work, and an instrument is never offered if removing it would leave nothing behind.

Sharing Several Songs at Once

In the Library, tap Group Edit, tick the songs you want, and tap Export. You get the same two choices as a single song — Songs File (.vrgo, no audio) and Songs with Audio (.vrga) — with the same Who's it for row.

The songs travel in the order you were looking at when you picked them, and they arrive on the other device as songs added to the library — not as a setlist. If you want them to arrive as a set, make a setlist first and share that instead.

Sharing a Setlist

A setlist's Share sheet adds a Song List (a plain-text running order — titles, keys, BPM, who's singing what) and otherwise mirrors the song options: Lyric Sheet (the whole set as one PDF), Setlist File (.vrsl, data only), Setlist with Audio (.vrla), and Setlist with Audio (Zip).

Data-only vs. With Audio

If there isn't enough room to build the file, the export says so before it starts, and tells you how much space it needs and how much you have.

Temporary storage: songs, song groups, setlists and backups need working space while being prepared and shared. After sharing finishes or is cancelled, Vessa Rig removes its temporary export copy. Files you saved to Files, iCloud Drive or another device remain yours. If the app is interrupted, abandoned temporary exports older than a day are cleared on a later launch.

Importing

Two ways to bring a file in:

  1. Open a received file. AirDrop it (or save it to Files) on the receiving device, then tap the file — Vessa Rig opens and imports it.
  2. Import from the menu. In Go Live, the ••• menu has a single Import… — pick any importable file from Files. The first few times, a short card reminds you it accepts songs, lyrics, a setlist, or a whole library; after that it opens the file picker directly.

Imports are non-destructive — they never overwrite what you already have. Usually they add a new song or setlist, and a with-audio import copies the stems into their own fresh folder so it can never disturb an existing song's audio.

Moving in from another app

If your songs live in another app, you don't have to rebuild them. Import… reads several formats other apps export, and routes each one automatically — there is nothing extra to find or turn on.

Coming from File What comes across
Stage Traxx 4.st4sOne song, with its stems, mixer levels, EQ and regions
Stage Traxx 4.st4bA whole library — songs, setlists and folders
OnSong and other chart apps.onsong, .chopro, .cho, .chordproLyrics, chords and section labels
OnSong (Export ChordPro).zipAll of those charts in one go

Bringing a whole library across

A full Stage Traxx backup can be tens of gigabytes, so Vessa Rig does not simply swallow it. Choose the .st4b in Import… and it reads just the small index inside — a moment, not an hour — then shows you what the backup holds so you can decide before anything is copied:

Then it imports what you ticked, one song at a time, with a Stop you can press at any point.

What comes across: every stem with its fader, pan, bus, mute and 4-band EQ; the song's tempo, key, trim and fades; all of its regions; your setlists in their original order, inside their folders; keywords as Topics; and each song's MIDI patch-change, if it had one.

If your click and cues were one stereo file, they arrive as two faders. Some libraries are built that way — the metronome on one side of a single track, the spoken cues on the other. Where that's how a song is put together, Vessa Rig hears it as each song comes in and gives you a separate Click and Cues track, so you can ride them independently in your ears. It happens song by song during the import, with nothing to turn on and nothing to do afterwards.

Songs built any other way are untouched: a click and a cues track that were already separate stay as they are, a mono click stays a mono click, and a file the app can't read with certainty comes across whole. A stereo click or guide carrying the same signal on both sides becomes a single mono track, since there is nothing on the second side to keep.

Stopping is safe, and so is running it twice. Each imported song remembers where it came from, so if you stop halfway — or run out of space, or the app closes — you simply import the same file again and it picks up the songs it hasn't done yet. Nothing is duplicated.

Not yet carried across: Stage Traxx can send MIDI at points inside a song — a patch change when the chorus arrives, for instance. Vessa Rig doesn't do that yet, so those cues are left behind rather than imported into something that can't play them. The patch change a song sends when it loads does come across.

Stage Traxx and OnSong are trademarks of their respective owners. Vessa Rig is not affiliated with, endorsed by, or sponsored by them; their names appear here only to identify the file formats it can read.

Combining lyrics and audio

A song often arrives in two halves — the words from a chart app and the audio from a backing-track app — and Vessa Rig can join them into one song. When you import a file whose title matches something you already have, a "Same song?" sheet appears:

If lyrics would land on a song that already has lyrics, that button reads Replace (in orange) so it's never a surprise. Adding audio is always additive and never touches existing words.

Full Backup & Restore

Separate from sharing one song, this protects your whole library:

Backup File Contains
Full Backup.vrfbThe entire library including all audio — a complete snapshot
Database Backup.vrdbThe entire library's data without audio — small, for structure & settings

Older files

Files made by earlier versions use an mp prefix (.mpso, .mpsl, .mpfb, .mpdb). They still import and restore — the app reads both the old mp names and the new vr ones.


11b. iCloud Sync

Separate from backups and from sharing single files, iCloud Sync keeps your library on every device signed into the same Apple Account. Turn it on in Go Live → ••• → iCloud Sync.

The Vessa Rig folder, and why your songs are not in it

There is a Vessa Rig folder in iCloud Drive, and it holds your files:

iCloud Drive/
└── Vessa Rig/
    ├── Backups/        full (.vrfb) and database (.vrdb) backups
    ├── Shared Songs/   songs and setlists you exported
    └── Import/         drop files here from a computer, then ••• → Import…

The Import folder is the easy way to move a library in from a Mac: drop the files there, then on the iPad use ••• → Import… and pick them out of the folder — instead of AirDropping them one at a time. Each folder has a short About this folder note in it explaining what belongs there.

Your synced library is not in that folder, and that is deliberate. Sync keeps the library in Vessa Rig's private iCloud storage — the same mechanism Photos, Notes and Messages use. A live library sitting in a browsable folder is a library that can be dragged, renamed or half-deleted by accident, and finding that out mid-set is not acceptable. So the folder holds files you manage, and sync holds the library nothing can reach.

Nothing needs switching on in Settings for any of this. The device only has to be signed into iCloud. (Vessa Rig does appear under Settings → [your name] → iCloud with the size of its synced data — that entry is the sync store, not the folder.)

To confirm sync is working, look at the top of the Sync panel: it reads Synced <time> once a sync has finished. If a song could not be uploaded, it says so and tells you how many.

It is not a backup

Today sync only uploads. Nothing downloads it back yet, so the iCloud copy cannot rebuild a library — if a device were lost, that copy could not restore it. Your backup is a Full Backup (.vrfb), and that has not changed.

What syncs today

Song data. Songs, setlists, lyrics, chords, regions, markers, tempo and beat grid, mixer settings, cues and pads. This is small — kilobytes per song — so it stays current without eating your iCloud storage. Waveform drawings are not sent; each device redraws them from its own audio.

Audio does not sync yet. The Audio in iCloud and Audio on this device panels are shown so you can set your preference now, and both say Not active yet — your choice is remembered and will take effect when audio transfer arrives. Until then, stems stay on the device that holds them, and a Full Backup (.vrfb) or a with Audio share is still how you move audio between devices.

How a sync happens

A sync runs when you open the iCloud Sync panel, and whenever you tap Sync Now. It is not yet automatic in the background. Only songs whose contents actually changed are sent.

Turning it off, and deleting the cloud copy


11c. Using More Than One Device

One device runs the show. Everything else in the building — a spare iPad on a screen, a phone in somebody's hand, a laptop feeding a video switcher — can follow its lyrics and projection cues.

Give each device a job in Go Live → ••• → Remote Control. Just Lyrics is the one for a screen: big words, where we are, nothing to press.

Lyrics on any screen

A device that is following the rig shows the verse the room is actually singing — not its own idea of where the song is. Two devices cut between on a switcher land on the same verse and the same half of it.

Keep both devices on the current version. Join the rig's session on the display device, allow it to receive lyrics, and connect that device to the external monitor. Its display and video preferences still apply.

While following, the audience display uses the rig's current words, language and projection appearance, even if it has a different local edition of the song.

Content What the display device needs
Lyrics, theme and coloursA connection to the rig; a local song copy is not required when Show songs I don't have is on.
Cover and other still imagesThe rig can send compact display copies with the projection.
Background video and video top layersThe same original clip already imported on the display device, either in its shared media library or with a song. Local song names and filenames may differ.

For a display-only device, share the song using Who's it for → Projection (§11a) to transfer words, images and clips without the audio stems. Video plays from the receiving device's own files; it is not streamed from the rig or frame-synchronised between devices. A renamed original clip matches; a re-encoded copy may not.

If a clip is missing, the received lyrics remain available. Import the original clip or the song's projection package on that device; the media lookup refreshes without reconnecting. Show songs I don't have is on by default; turn it off to restrict that screen to songs it already has.

When the rig stops answering

The page holds. It does not blink, blank, or jump to a different verse. The congregation sees nothing happen at all — which is the point.

It stops advancing, because nothing on that device knows where the song went. It comes down on its own about a minute and a half after the song would have finished, so a verse is never left up into the sermon. A Wi-Fi hiccup of a few seconds changes nothing on screen.

If the rig never said how long the song is, nothing takes the page down automatically — the readout says so, in those words.

When a backup rig takes over

The spare becomes the one everything follows, and the other devices move across on their own. You do not have to walk round the room re-pointing screens.

If the original rig comes back — a freeze rather than a crash — devices stay with the spare that is actually running the room, and any device still looking at the old one stops taking instruction from it and says so.

Knowing what every screen is doing

A held page and a working page look identical. That is deliberate for the congregation and useless for you, so both of these tell you the truth:

It says What it means What to do
Following the rig — Verse 2Working.Nothing.
Borrowing the rig's words — Chorus (2nd time)Working, from a song this device doesn't have.Nothing.
Holding … — the rig has stopped answering for 40sRight words, frozen.Cut when the band moves on.
Not following: this device doesn't have the rig's songIt can't show this one.Cut to another feed.
Not following: this device is on [another song]Somebody opened a different song here — this is also what a segue looks like.Nothing. Don't cut.
Not following: the rig has been taken over by a spareIt's pointed at a machine that is no longer in charge.Point it at the spare.

Nothing from this list ever reaches the audience screen.

Edits, keys and words


12. Beat-Grid & Metronome

The beat grid is the internal timing backbone used by the Regions Editor, the per-song metronome, Groove Track generation, and AI Section Detection.

How the Beat Grid Is Built

  1. Tempo detection — the vDSP Tempo Detector analyzes audio stems and derives a consensus BPM using spectral flux and autocorrelation.
  2. Downbeat tracking — the engine locates bar 1 of each measure and records its sample position (the beat grid offset).
  3. Persistence — the downbeat phase offset is saved per song so the grid survives app restarts without re-analysis.

Bar Alignment

All AI-detected region boundaries and metronome beats are snapped to the mathematical beat grid anchored at sample 0, using the saved BPM and time signature. This guarantees that every region always starts on beat 1 of a bar — never mid-beat or at beat 2. If a song's downbeat is offset, use Beat Align in the Regions Editor to nudge the grid into place. This describes a constant-tempo song; a variable-tempo song is drawn from its beat map instead — see Variable (Adaptive) Tempo.

Hearing the Beat Live

The metronome is the timing reference — there is no separate generated click stem. On a variable-tempo song it follows the song's beat map so the click tracks the changing tempo (see Variable (Adaptive) Tempo).

  1. Turn the metronome on with the CLICK key on the Transport module (long-press for the full picker: mode, Visual Pulse, time signature, subdivision, tick level, and this song's offset — plus a Style (Editor) row when you open the picker from the song editor's metronome button). The beat also shows on screen as a visual pulse — on the transport panel border, or on the playing region's chip while the song plays — as the song's Visual Pulse sets it; the first beat flashes green, the others white (see §5.3).
  2. The metronome click is routed to the Click & Cues (C&C) in-ear bus, so the band hears the beat while the audience does not — set its level with the C&C fader in the Mixer.
  3. Prefer your own click? Import it as a regular audio track (name it with "click" or "metronome") — it is detected automatically and routed to the same C&C bus.

Variable (Adaptive) Tempo

Songs come in two kinds: constant-tempo (one steady BPM throughout) and variable-tempo (they speed up, slow down, or drift — including rubato and hand-played live takes). For a variable song the app stores a beat map: the exact position of every beat in the audio, plus which beats are bar-1 downbeats. Because the on-screen grid and the audible click both read those same positions, the grid you see and the click you hear can never drift apart from each other or from the music.

Variable tempo is decided per song by detection, and you always opt in — a song stays on its proven constant grid until you accept:

During performance, both the grid and the click follow the song. Bar lines in the waveform and ruler are drawn at the map's downbeat positions, so bars visibly bunch up when the song speeds up and spread out when it slows. The metronome schedules each click from those same beat positions rather than from a fixed beats-per-minute formula, so the click tracks the drift beat-by-beat — including past the last analyzed beat, which it extrapolates from the local end tempo. Constant songs are completely unaffected: they use the same steady grid and click as before.

Two tempo values. The Info BPM is the song's single headline tempo (it sizes bars and regions and appears on the Info page); the beat grid is drawn at its own exact spacing so grid lines stay put even when the headline BPM was rounded. For a variable song neither single BPM draws the grid — the grid comes straight from the beat map.


13. Keyboard & Accessibility

VoiceOver Support

All interactive elements in the Song Details / Info tab include:

Dynamic Type

All text in the Song Details views uses SwiftUI's .rounded design and scales with Dynamic Type settings on iPad.

Keyboard Shortcuts (macOS / hardware keyboard on iPad)

The keyboard shortcuts belong to the song editor. They are listed in one place, §4.10 Keyboard Shortcuts (iPad Editor).


14. Appendix — File Formats & Glossary

Supported Audio Import Formats

Extension Format
.m4aAAC / ALAC
.mp3MP3
.wavPCM WAV
.aiff / .aifAIFF
.cafCore Audio Format
.flacFLAC (via AVFoundation)

File Sharing & Backup Formats

Files Vessa Rig creates for sharing songs/setlists and backing up your library (see §11a). All open back into the app; the (Zip) variant also opens on any computer. Files from earlier versions use the mp prefix and still import/restore.

Extension What it is Audio?
.vrsoVessa Rig Song — one song's data (lyrics, chords, regions, markers, settings)No
.vrslVessa Rig Setlist — a setlist plus all its songs' dataNo
.vrsaVessa Rig Song + Audio — a song and its stemsYes
.vrlaVessa Rig Setlist + Audio — a setlist and every song's stemsYes
.vrgoVessa Rig Songs — several songs' data, no setlistNo
.vrgaVessa Rig Songs + Audio — several songs and their stems, no setlistYes
.vrfbVessa Rig Full Backup — the entire library including all audioYes
.vrdbVessa Rig Database Backup — the entire library's data onlyNo
.zipA + Audio bundle as a standard zip that opens on any computerYes
.mpso / .mpsl / .mpfb / .mpdbLegacy equivalents from earlier versions — still import/restore—

Glossary

Term Meaning
SessionA song in the app — one Session contains all tracks, regions, lyrics, and metadata for one song
Track / StemOne audio file within a Session (e.g. drums stem, guitars stem, vocals stem)
RegionA named time span within a song's waveform (e.g. Verse, Chorus)
BPMBeats Per Minute — tempo
PPQNPulses Per Quarter Note — MIDI timing resolution
LRCLyric file format with timestamps ([mm:ss.xx]Text)
Shazam MatchOn-device audio fingerprint match against Apple's song catalog
Chromagram12-bin frequency representation mapping audio to pitch classes (C, C♯, D…)
TC OffsetTimecode Offset — a time shift applied to the song start
SetlistAn ordered list of songs for a specific show or rehearsal
Beat GridThe internal timing framework built from BPM + downbeat analysis; used to snap regions and click ticks to bar 1
Spectral FluxRate of change in the frequency spectrum between frames — a measure of rhythmic activity and transitions
Onset DensityNumber of transient events (note attacks, drum hits) per second — higher in choruses and bridges
Stereo WidthDegree of L/R decorrelation — wide = spatially spread, narrow = mono-like; choruses typically track wider
Cue TrackAn audio stem containing spoken section announcements or burst signals used as boundary hints by the AI
Vocal StemAn audio stem containing only vocal parts (lead vocal, BGVs, harmonies) used for energy-blending in AI analysis
Push NeighborA drag-boundary mode where moving an edge shifts the adjacent region rather than stopping at it
Repetition ScoreA per-segment measure of how many times that harmonic/timbral profile recurs throughout the song — high = likely Chorus
Follow PlayheadA viewport mode where the waveform automatically scrolls to keep the live playhead centered during playback
Follow Playhead BypassA temporary suspension of Follow Playhead mode, triggered automatically by a pan, pinch, or double-tap zoom while audio is playing. The button turns orange. Bypass clears automatically once the playhead re-enters the center of the visible viewport
Double-Tap ZoomA gesture for instantly zooming in to a region (~70% of screen width) or back out to the full-song view
AssembleLegacy name for the song-preparation tools. There is no separate Assemble tab — its tools are the Song Editor, opened with the Editor puck.
Go LiveThe one workspace — the modular cockpit where all performing and light editing happens. The floating pucks (Editor, •••, Library) and panels navigate within it.
Editor ModeThe Song Editor opened with the Editor puck. On iPad it opens in place (return with ‹ Live) as a single Regions editor (audio tools in the ••• menu, Info a header tab, Lyrics in the Regions bottom panel); on iPhone it is full-screen with Info / Lyrics / Tracks / Editor tabs.
Mixer DockThe compact (pillar) mixer in the iPad editor's bottom panel — beside the lyrics as a half panel whenever you are not editing lyrics text, and across the whole panel with the Mixer button. See §4.9.

Voice Cue Section Labels — Full Reference

This section lists every section name recognized by the voice-cue system. Type any of these as a region Section Tag and the app will play the matching spoken announcement during a vamp re-entry or when the Cues Track is generated.

How Matching Works

  1. Case-insensitive. "Chorus", "chorus", and "CHORUS" all work.
  2. Spaces and hyphens become underscores. "Pre Chorus", "Pre-Chorus", and "pre_chorus" all match.
  3. Trailing numbers are stripped first. "Verse 3" tries verse_3, then falls back to verse.
  4. Abbreviations expand automatically. See the abbreviation table below.
  5. Label aliases. "Worship Leader" automatically uses the Exhortation audio cue.
  6. Numbered variant fallback. "Instrumental 1" or "Instrumental 2" falls back to Instrumental when no numbered recording exists for the selected language.
  7. Language fallback. If the selected voice pack doesn't have a file for a section, the English (Female) file is used. If no English file exists, text-to-speech is used as a last resort.

English (Female) — Default Voice · 55 cues

This is the base set. All other voice packs fall back to these files when they lack a localized recording.

Section Label Numbered Variants
Acapella, Ad Lib, All In, Bass, Big Ending—
Break, Breakdown—
BridgeBridge 1 – 4
Build—
ChorusChorus 1 – 4
Drums, Drums In—
Ending, Exhortation—
Hits, Hold—
Instrumental, Interlude, Intro—
Key Change Down, Key Change Up, Keys—
Last Time—
Outro, Post Chorus—
Pre ChorusPre Chorus 1 – 4
Rap, Refrain—
Slowly Build, Softly, Solo, Swell—
Tag, Turnaround—
Vamp—
VerseVerse 1 – 6
Worship Freely—
Worship Leader(alias → plays Exhortation cue)

Numbered variant fallback: If a voice pack only has a generic recording (e.g. instrumental.caf) but no numbered variant (e.g. instrumental_1.caf), the system automatically falls back to the generic file. This means "Instrumental 1" and "Instrumental 2" will both play the Instrumental cue when no numbered recording exists.

English (Male) — 27 mapped sections + extras

Sections are spoken in a male voice. The following standard section names are supported (mapped from the same tags you'd use with English Female):

Acapella · All In · Bass · Break · Breakdown · Bridge · Build · Chorus (1–2) · Drums · Ending · Hold · Instrumental · Interlude · Intro · Key Change Up · Keys · Last Time · Outro · Post Chorus · Pre Chorus · Refrain · Softly · Solo · Swell · Tag · Turnaround · Vamp · Verse (1–2)

Additional cues unique to this voice: Acoustic · Band · Click · Click Accent · Double Time · Down Bridge · Down Chorus · Full Band · Guitar · Half Time · Kick It In · Repeat · Trash Can · Worship Leader

English (Gospel) — 15 mapped sections + extras

A gospel worship-leader voice with call-style cues:

Break · Breakdown · Bridge · Chorus (1–2) · Intro · Outro · Pre Chorus · Solo · Tag · Turnaround · Vamp · Verse (1–3)

Additional gospel-specific cues: Back to the Top · Change · Chop It · Drive · Drive It · Go to Church · Modulate · Modulate Half Step · Modulate Whole Step · Praise Break 1 · Praise Break 2 · Stab · Stab the 1 · Take It Out

Spanish (es) — 28 mapped sections + extras

Standard section names are spoken in Spanish:

English Tag Spanish Announcement
AcapellaAcappella
All InTodos Juntos
BassBajo
BreakCorte
BreakdownBajando
BridgePuente
ChorusCoro (also: Coro Dos, Coro 3, Coro 4)
DrumsBatería
EndingFin
HoldCoro Suave
InstrumentalInstrumental (also: Instrumental 2)
InterludeInterludio
IntroIntro
Key Change UpSube de Tono
KeysTeclado
Last TimeÚltima Vez
OutroSalida
Pre ChorusPre Coro
SoftlyPuente Suave
SoloSolo
SwellCrescendo
TagTag
TurnaroundVuelta
VampVamp
VerseVerso (also: Verso Dos, Verso 3)
Worship FreelyDirector de Alabanza

Additional cues unique to Spanish: Banda · Banda Entera · Entra · Guitarra · Guitarra Acústica · Modulación · Repite · Tiempo Doble · Tiempo Medio

French (fr) — 16 mapped sections

Break · Bridge · Chorus (1–2) · Ending · Hold · Instrumental · Interlude · Intro · Outro · Post Chorus · Pre Chorus · Solo · Tag · Turnaround · Verse (1–2)

German (de) — 16 mapped sections

Breakdown · Bridge · Chorus (1–2) · Ending · Hold · Instrumental · Interlude · Intro · Outro · Post Chorus · Pre Chorus · Solo · Tag · Turnaround · Verse (1–2)

Section Tag Abbreviations

You can use these short forms as section tags — they automatically expand to the full name:

Abbreviation Expands To
v, vs, verVerse
v1, vs1, ver1 … v6Verse 1 … Verse 6
c, ch, cho, chrChorus
c1, ch1 … c4Chorus 1 … Chorus 4
b, br, bri, bdg, brdgBridge
br1 … br4Bridge 1 … Bridge 4
p, pre, prech, prch, pch, pcPre Chorus
p1, pc1, pre1 … p3Pre Chorus 1 … Pre Chorus 3
i, in, int, intrIntro
o, out, outrOutro
e, en, endEnding
s, so, solSolo
t, tgTag
interInterlude
ins, inst, instrInstrumental
brk, bre, bkdnBreakdown
trn, turnTurnaround

15. How to Maintain This Manual

Why update it incrementally?

Writing documentation at the end of a project means you forget details, context, and the "why" behind decisions. Incremental updates take 5–10 minutes per feature and keep the manual accurate during development.

When to update this file

Update MANUAL.md every time you:

Event What to update
Add a new featureAdd it to the relevant section, or create a new section if it's a major area
Change how an existing feature worksFind the relevant section and revise it
Rename a tab, button, or fieldGrep the manual for the old name and replace it
Change what a region tap doesUpdate §5.5 (Live chips), §6b (Live Region Navigation) and §9.0 (the console's timeline) together — every surface uses the one rule
Deprecate or remove a featureRemove or add a "deprecated" note to that section
Add a new file format or MIDI message typeUpdate the Appendix
Finish a phase of developmentUpdate the version number at the top of the file

Version control convention

At the top of the file, keep:

> **Version:** X.Y (Month Year)

Document structure rules

Documentation updates and remaining coverage

Recent documentation updates:

Earlier documentation updates and remaining coverage:


This manual was started during the Song Details feature (Phases 1–4) and expanded through v4.9. Coverage includes: the Mixer, AI Section Detection v3 (21-dim feature vectors, multi-track analysis, repetition scoring, energy gap detection, cue/vocal track hints, multilingual speech recognition), the Detected Sections review sheet, the Language (🌐) cue picker, Click Track generation via AI menu with sound picker, Beat-Grid alignment, Regions toolbar, Push mode, Region Loop Coordinator live navigation rules, the 60 fps smooth playhead, the scope-corrected pinch-to-zoom gesture, the fully interactive mini waveform transport bar, long-press + button for Auto-Marker Settings, the adaptive Play/Pause/Rewind split button, long-press region actions (duplicate / copy / paste), the fully inline lyrics editor (tap-to-edit, Return creates new line), section label inline editing, the Lyrics Appearance sheet (typography, chord colors, section highlight styles), Worship Leader orange color, and MIDI / Mark toolbar activation on section label focus. v2.1 adds the Assemble tab redesign. v2.2 adds: always-edit mode (Preview/Edit toggle removed), stable header layout with no sidebar-toggle shift, sidebar pill color scheme (deep sapphire active + warm gold badge), tab-aware mini waveform positioning (top for Info/Audio, hidden for Lyrics, bottom for Regions), live ExternalLyricsView mirror preview in the Lyrics tab eye panel with swipe-to-navigate-sections gesture, and tap-section-to-select in Live View (mirrors chip-tap behavior). v2.3 adds: smooth section highlight glide (spring animation — the colored background bar slides between sections without flashing), spring-animated scroll in Live View lyrics list and region chip row, and spring-animated section scroll on the Stage Monitor — all critically damped (no bounce). v2.4 adds: Look & Feel sub-page in Settings (Color Theme + Sidebar Style in one place, custom back button), Sidebar Row Style setting (3 options — Active Stripe, Inactive Stripe, Outlined — with mini previews and full persistence), updated theme palette (Golden Era warm umber/rust/gold, Florida Sunset violet→coral, Sunny Day sky blue + sunshine yellow), and darker row gradients across all themes. v4.25 adds: Vocal Effects — the MIC panel (§9.4c) — a floating, pinnable, resizable panel holding the whole vocal chain, opened from the microphone button in the Controls cluster or ••• → Microphones (and from the FX button on either mic strip); the microphone button fills and turns blue while any mic is in TALK, so the state is visible with the panel closed. TALK is per microphone — talking on MIC 1 leaves a guest on MIC 2 untouched, tail included — and clears when a song STARTS rather than when one is selected. MOMENTARY NUDGE — one knob that takes everything up or down, rides on top of the song's and section's choices, survives every section boundary and clears with the next song; also on the strip's FX button via swipe up/down, double-tap to clear. SEND TO EFFECTS as one knob per mic. Sounds (MY SOUND / TIGHT / CRISP / WIDE / fourth vocal sound preset) — a character for the chain that carries no timings, with tail length and pre-delay worked out from the song's tempo; THIS SONG picks one for a whole song and SECTIONS lets any region differ, with changes gliding rather than jumping and scrubbing arriving at the same sound as playing. Let it choose reads how busy the band is (not section labels), proposes a sound per section with a plain-English reason, and declines rather than guessing on songs with nothing to read. INTO REVERB — the delay's throw into the reverb tail, independent of the delay's own level. Plus the tempo-locked, voice-ducking delay, de-essed sends, and a tail whose low end dies first. The mic's physical input is chosen from the orange chip at the head of its strip; the Settings ▸ Routing input pickers were retired — §9.4c, 9.4b. v4.26 adds: MIC panel refinements (§9.4c) — the panel opens with the chain and the section list FOLDED (both remember how you leave them), and is ordered by what you reach for mid-song: TALK · NUDGE EFFECTS (renamed from Momentary Nudge) · ALL EFFECTS, whose header knob now folds REVERB / CHORUS / DELAY / What TALK leaves behind inside it · SEND TO EFFECTS · THIS SONG · SECTIONS. Sends and ALL EFFECTS are knobs; each card carries a whisper of its own control's colour. Double-tap or press-and-hold TALK mutes that mic completely (TALK alone only ducks the effects as far as What TALK leaves behind allows), with a haptic and a one-tap way back. A muted mic can no longer look broken — the Controls-cluster button shows a slashed mic in red while every mic is muted, the strip shows a MUTED badge that is itself the un-mute, and the panel's big button reads MUTED · TAP FOR EFFECTS; muting a mic strip removes your effects, never your voice, since no dry signal passes through the app. The microphone button appears only when the mic channels exist, and a first-run tip points at Settings ▸ Hardware ▸ Live mic channel for anyone who has not switched them on — dismiss it and it stays dismissed (··· › Show Tips brings it back). The ••• menu lists Mixer / Microphones / Projection only when the Controls module is hidden, since those buttons already live in it — §9.4c, 5.0a. Keep it growing — your future self on stage will thank you. v2.8 adds: Dual-Column Lyrics Layout in Live View — the ⊞ split-rectangle header button (turns orange when active) pairs consecutive sections side by side in song chronological order; the active-section highlight is a tight rounded rectangle scoped to the active column; the same toggle is also in Lyrics Appearance → Performance tab → Layout → Dual-Column View. v2.9 adds: Setlist editing — swipe-left pencil on any setlist row opens an Edit Setlist sheet (name, autoplay toggle, 12-color name palette); long-press any setlist row to rename it inline in the sidebar; name color is displayed in both the Assemble and Go Live sidebars. Sidebar Background preference — 8 near-black preset swatches (Onyx, Void, Abyss, Cyber, Navy, Teal, Violet, Carbon) in Look & Feel; the chosen color applies to all sidebars across the app and persists across launches. v3.0 adds: Folder inline rename — long-press any library folder or setlist folder row to rename it in place (Return or tap-away confirms). Tappable + badge — the pulsing plus badge on the Library/Setlists pills can now be tapped directly to open the Add sheet without holding; the badge is also slightly larger. These gesture conventions apply throughout the app: long-press = hold still ~0.5 s, no movement; press-and-drag = hold then move (used for row reordering). v3.1 adds: Stage Manager window resize support — header bar, bottom waveform bar, sidebar, and tab navigation bar all remain fully visible at any Stage Manager window size; the editor content area compresses first to fill available height; minimum window size is 320 × 200 pt. v3.6 adds: Nav pills reduced to Info / Lyrics / Regions (three fixed pills, active tab highlighted, Audio tab removed from the strip); Audio Editor button in Mixer dock header (far right of the dock bar, flush to screen edge, turns orange when the Audio editor is active); Collapsible Audio Tracks section (tappable header with track-count badge and animated chevron, collapses/expands the track list); iPad landscape side-by-side layout in the Audio tab (Pitch & Speed and Song Trimming displayed in two columns on regular-width devices, stacked on compact-width). v3.7 adds: Regions editor no-audio placeholder (waveform.badge.minus icon + bold heading when zero audio files are imported); Start button hidden for no-audio songs in Go Live; Section marker chip bar in Go Live replacing region chips when no regions are defined (dashed-border outlined chips, CUE text prominent on top, numeric suffix for multiple same-label markers, seek + scroll on tap); No-audio bottom bar in pencil editors (marker chip row + dB-style horizontal grid area instead of waveform, Start button hidden); CUE text propagation — editing cue text on any marker automatically updates all markers sharing the same section label, across all views; Marker flag visual redesign — taller squared rounded rectangles (46 pt), two-line when CUE set (CUE truncated to 7 chars on top, label below), single-line when no CUE. v3.9 adds: Snap-to-Grid (toggle + resolution pill — Bar / ½ Bar / Beat); CUE Offset Toggle & Picker (auto-marker creation with configurable beat offset); Region Recording Mode (arm, tap boundaries live, per-region undo, re-arm on stop, automatic markers); Markers Drive Section Detection (lyric markers checked before regions for a visual lead-in); Multi-Paragraph Spacing (blank lines preserved as visual spacers everywhere); Playhead-Drag Lyrics Sync (scrubbing previews the lyrics tied to any point in the song); Toast Overlay Feedback (48 pt centered green toast); Mixer / Bottom Panel Mutual Exclusivity (expanding mixer hides bottom lyrics panel); Persistent Auto-Projection (singleton service survives tab switches); Projection Paragraph Cycling (external display shows one paragraph at a time); Unified Toolbar Controls (+ / bar-size / snap pill connected group); Region Placement at Playhead (inside existing region → right edge); No-Space Toast Feedback (red-bordered centered toast); Toolbar / Bottom Panel Separator (gradient divider with fade-from-edges); Auto-Scroll to Hidden Section (bottom panel and Live View scroll to active section). v4.0 adds: Toolbar reorganization — Pin moved to inspector center (next to LCD/region info), Lock·Push joined chain, AI pill standalone (not joined), Delete button moved to header bar next to undo/redo; Floating waveform overlays — Playback Mode pill (44×44) and Waveform Source pill (44×44) float over the top-right of the waveform; AI Menu consolidation — Click Track and Cues Track controls moved into the AI menu as sections (Generate, More Sounds sub-menu, Delete); Click Track inline row controls — mute, sound picker, eye (hide), and delete pills (28×18 each) appear directly on the Click waveform row; CUE Offset via + long-press — Auto-Marker Settings popover accessed by long-pressing the + button; Record button red tint — record button shows subtle red tint when not armed for immediate visual recognition; Red outline scoped to lyrics panel — recording border only outlines the lyrics preview panel, not the entire bottom bar; Undo fix for manual region add — undo/redo availability updates immediately after adding a region or filling a gap; Long-press + button tap guard — long-press on + no longer also triggers a tap action; Push button renamed — formerly "Push Boundaries", now just "Push"; Per-Paragraph Highlighting — Live View highlights one paragraph at a time in multi-paragraph sections using time-based switching (even split of region duration) or marker-based switching for precision; Auto-Generated Paragraph Markers — AI Detect Sections auto-drops slim paragraph-break markers for regions with multi-paragraph lyrics; markers auto-sync when lyrics are edited; Paragraph Marker Slim Visual — paragraph-break markers render as a small diamond icon + thin stem (no text) in the section color. v4.3 adds: Key abbreviation parsing (Fm/Fmin/F min → F minor, Gmaj → G major in Quick Edit, Info tab, and Live view); Live sidebar key abbreviation (compact display: E♯m not E♯ minor); Artist truncation priority (key+BPM never truncate, artist does); Autoplay improvements — swipe hidden for no-audio setlists, button color reflects state, badge refreshes on data changes, setlist syncs on tab switch; Hide Mixer / Show Mixer button in Go Live (toggles bottom dock); Dual-arrow playhead (red stick spanning ruler+waveform with arrows at both ends, shortens when keyboard is up). v4.4 adds: Share Setlist (three export formats — plain text, .mpsetlist package, .zip with audio — via share button in Go Live header); Group Edit in both Go Live (Copy/Color/Export/Remove) and Assemble (Setlist/Color/Export/Delete) sidebars with batch selection, Select All, and inline color palette; Font Design Picker (Clean/Serif/Mono/Round in Lyrics Appearance, Editor Style, and Projection settings — Clean = Avenir Next geometric sans-serif); Lyrics Gradient Fade (top/bottom feathered edges on editor and Live lyrics scroll). v4.6 adds: Settings restructured as full-screen cover — removed from the tab bar, opens as a .fullScreenCover with a sidebar + detail layout (4 tabs: General, MIDI, Audio, About); sidebar highlights active tab with theme accent color; 22 pt bold section titles with accent vertical bar; ✕ to dismiss. Settings General tab — consolidated Look & Feel (sheet), Projection, Marker Cue Offset, Regions Editor, and Maintenance. Settings Audio tab — card-style Audio Engine section (sample rate, buffer size, track prep time, multi-route, pause in background) and Failover Signal section (660 Hz tone via AVAudioSourceNode with live KVO toggle, output bus picker), plus Mixer and Pan Controls. Audio Engine wiring — session preferences applied on start; background pause via UIKit observers; per-track prep time in MultitrackPlayer. v4.7 adds: Groove Track generation — tempo-adaptive drum pattern (kick/hi-hat/cabasa) via AI menu, created muted; Groove Fade action button — fades instruments out while bringing the groove in; Inline Snapshot Capsules — colored capsule buttons in Mixer header and Assemble dock replacing the old popover panel, tap to recall ("Reset" when active), long-press for Overwrite/Rename/Delete; Save Mix — sdcard icon button saves current fader positions as the baseline with flash + green toast, long-press to Reset All Faders to 0 dB; Snapshot cap at 5 — "+" hides when full; Mixer Toast Confirmations — green toasts for all snapshot/save/reset actions. v4.8 adds: Multi-language cue voice packs — six bundled voice packs (English Female, English Male, English Gospel, Spanish, French, German) with 198+ pre-recorded section announcements and a per-song Voice picker in the AI menu and Go Live settings; Bundled-audio-first cues pipeline — pre-recorded .caf files are the primary audio source for both live announcements and generated cues tracks, with TTS as automatic fallback; Dual-node cue audio architecture — CueAudioPlayer uses separate announcement and count-off AVAudioPlayerNode instances so count-off beats queue seamlessly without interrupting the section announcement; One-more-loop vamp guarantee — tapping a region chip during vamp finishes the current loop, plays one full additional pass with announcement and count-off, then jumps; Real-time beat-by-beat count-off — beats fire from the polling timer as the playhead crosses each boundary for tighter timing; Seek hesitation reduction — 2 ms start delay in the seamless seek path; 6/8 count-off variants — English Male and Spanish packs include dedicated 6/8 spoken-number files. v4.9 adds: Performance Grid (§5.16) — touch-optimized tile grid replacing the live channel-strip mixer with auto-sizing tiles, gesture-driven controls (tap = mute/unmute/unlock, double-tap = solo, long-press = lock, swipe = ±3 dB), tile groups with collapse/expand/ungroup, tile reorder (independent from other mixers), locked tiles showing "MUTED 🔒", theme iconColor-based track color palette (7 swatches + custom), grid density setting (Comfortable/Compact/Dense), bus rail, and default Titanium theme; Track Color Picker updated — palette now derives from app theme icon colors at runtime instead of generic swatches. v4.10 adds: Mixer Style toggle (Vivid/Minimal for the dock mixer); Theme Accent swatch (first option in Track Color Picker and Title Color Picker — dynamically follows iconColor); Custom ColorPicker removed; GroupGlyph group identity (geometric glyphs per group index, same accent color); Group tile layout aligned with TrackTile (name → meter → GRP badge/count); Clear All Solos repositioned (left of Save Mix button); Lyric Section Marker Banner visibility (hidden in Lyrics Tab unless Mark Mode active, removed from Mixer tab); Tile Style setting (Vivid/Minimal per-tile toggle in Settings → Tiles, independent of Mixer Style). v4.11 adds: Audio Tab view mode picker (Tracks/Settings/All capsule pill in inline Audio editor); Bus Rail always-vivid colors (bus accent colors always show regardless of Tile/Mixer Style); Bus Rail collapsed redesign (each bus letter is a 32 pt rounded-rect mute+meter button); Bus Rail expanded header redesign (full-width chevron + stacked Edit button); Group tile blue dot (all groups use circle.fill; dot and stripe turn theme-blue when expanded; 6 pt badge on full-size members, 5 pt on half-size); Group membership banner (transparent top-18% strip on expanded member tiles with ‹‹‹ arrows on rightmost member only, hairline divider below); Unified grid background (theme iconColor at 7% opacity backdrop behind entire tile grid); Live lyrics blue-tinted background (theme iconColor at 15% opacity behind the Go Live lyrics scroll); Lyrics editor blue-tinted background (same 15% backdrop in the Lyrics Tab editor); Live View section marker strip hidden (guarded by false && — remove to restore). v4.12 adds: Clip Launcher (§5.18) — strip of tappable one-shot / loop clip tiles in the Go Live dock with single-tap launch, double-tap edit, long-press context menu, per-clip mode + volume + launch quantize, drag-reorder with per-row drop indicator; Global Clips — clips can be promoted to global so they appear in every song, stored in a shared location that survives song deletion; Per-Song Clip Layout — each song remembers its own arrangement including where global clips sit, and globals can be Hidden from this Song without being deleted (a new eye-with-slash menu next to the + button restores them per-song); Tonic Pad (§5.19) — drone/pad instrument with three presets (Tonic / Major / Minor) across all twelve keys, a shimmer layer, a Fade control, interval-aware key crossfades, per-song memory, and LOCK. v4.13 adds: Bus Rail fader-is-meter (§5.16) — each expanded bus fader's fill now shows its live meter level with a held peak cap, instead of a static position fill; the fader doubles as the meter since the tight live rail has no room for a separate strip (the thin meter strip remains the Pro/compact-mixer pattern); Metronome on-screen visual → Visual Pulse (§5.3) — the beat flashes the transport panel border, or the playing region's chip while the song plays, as each song's Visual Pulse (Off · Transport · Current Region) sets it, with the first beat of the bar in green (a little thicker) and the other beats in white; the old per-location metronome "visual style" picker, the beat-color pickers and the region-chip switch were retired; the flash is render-server-driven (stays smooth through segue/vamp stalls) and burst-coalesced so it never strobes; Metronome button as mixer control — swipe up/down for ±2 dB with a brief dB readout, double-tap to mute the click audio (double-tap while bypassed lifts the bypass and mutes, so the muted-but-running state is visible instead of a silent surprise), tap to engage/bypass, long-press for the picker. v4.17 adds: Stage Controls redesign — the fixed Settings/Book/Mic nav cluster and the old sidebar are retired; the cockpit's chrome is now draggable pucks (Editor · ••• overflow → Arrange Layout / Settings / dimmed roadmap placeholders · a conditional Library puck). The Song Editor opens with the Editor puck and closes with ‹ Live (iPad, next to Pro Mixer) or Cancel (iPhone). New editor transport cluster (grip · ⏮ Rewind · ▶/⏸ Play·Pause-from-position · Metronome · Language) and a floating editor Library window (own remembered position; tap-outside dismisses when unpinned). Icons: projection settings → sparkles.tv, external-display badge → play.tv, the Language system → character.bubble (was lips), Library openers → building.columns. Live transport now keeps VAMP and Language in place, grayed when a song can't use them instead of hiding them — a press-and-hold on a grayed VAMP opens Vamp Settings; Language turns orange while armed — Sections 2, 5, 5.0a, 5.11, 6, 7. v4.18 adds: Editor metronome Editor / Live Style — in the song editor the metronome is silent while the song is stopped and clicks only while playing by default (Editor Style); a Live Style toggle in the metronome long-press picker (the Style row, Editor / Live — a separate setting from the lyrics "Editor Style" typography tab in §6c) makes it click exactly like Go Live, including while stopped for When Stopped / Always; single-tap = standby (click fully off), double-tap = mute the metronome channel, long-press = Style / Mode / Output / Offset. Editor metronome beat dot — a small dot in the top-right corner of the editor metronome button blinks on each click, mirroring the audible click independent of Output: it pulses while playing and on Live-Style stopped clicks (Always / When Stopped), staying dark for Editor-Style-stopped, Mode Off, or standby (replacing the old expanding-ring pulse). iPhone editor Timeline Tools relocated — on the iPhone landscape Editor tab the ••• tools button moves to the top of the far-left rail (mirroring the tips lightbulb at the bottom) and opens a Timeline Tools action sheet (Zoom In/Out, Beat Align, Trim & Fade, variable-tempo detection/correction); iPad keeps the inline ••• dropdown — Sections 5.3, 6. v4.19 adds: Projection output targets — the editor and Live projection panels lead with an Audience chip (carrying Song | Global sub-views) plus a separate Stage chip; the choice drives the external output and survives navigation. Projection panel restructure — the Editor-panel pill reads Projection | Editor; the photo.on.rectangle.angled images button beside it swaps the settings for the Region Images picker inline (iPad: left pane beside the live preview; iPhone portrait: on top with the preview below); ✕ collapses whichever is open. Region media naming — background slot = BG Layer (video or still image), foreground slot = Top Layer; the panel's ••• menu carries a Global section (BG Layers / Top Layers master switches — BG Layers off hides region background videos AND images) and a This Song section (Remove BG Layers / Remove Top Layers); on-demand images live in On-Demand Top Layers. Live panel = Projection | Device — the second tab shows this device's own display settings behind an ipad/iphone icon matching the hardware, with one-tap color swatches opening palette popovers; a Region media photo button sits beside the pill. Floating panel chrome — the Live Projection and Mixer panels are draggable from either side edge, corner-resizable, pinnable (slim header: title + pin + ✕). Floating Mixer panel in Go Live (§5.17) — channel strips, the 2×2 bus band, Save Mix and snapshot capsules in a movable card (slider.horizontal.3 button in the controls cluster). iPhone projection toolbar lift — with the projection panel open, the editor toolbar shows ✕ · Projection|Editor pill · images button · Mixer button. Two-hue themes — panel controls follow the app theme's secondary accent (option pills, media buttons, overlay chips), so themes like Sunny Day read as two colors. iPad Split View — in a narrow window the Editor puck opens the full-screen editor (same as iPhone). Keyboard transport rail (iPhone) — while typing lyrics, the docked rail above the keyboard adds a compact Start/Stop and full-row scrubbing. Delete menus — the lyrics-panel ▾ menu reads Delete Cues… / Delete Regions…, hiding Delete Cues when every cue belongs to a region; deleting a region cascades to its linked cues — Sections 4.6, 5.4, 5.9, 5.10, 5.17, 6, 6c, 7. v4.20 adds: Active Section Highlight refresh — the three styles read BG Stripe / Region / Custom, with a Background stripe toggle for the two color styles, plus two focus aids that work with any style: Brighten active (the current section's lyrics stand out brighter, heavier and crisply outlined) and Fade others (every other section dims but stays readable); both engage only when the selected section has lyrics. Floating panels on iPhone — the Projection and Mixer panels are the same movable, resizable, pinnable cards as on iPad, and the floating pucks step aside while one is open. Floating panel access — the ••• overflow adds Mixer and Projection rows as a backup way to open those panels, and the Projection card closes with the ✕ in its slim header — Sections 5.0a, 5.17, 6c. v4.21 adds: Cueing & recording on the iPhone — the Lyrics tab carries the full tap-to-place workflow: arm the 👆 hand to cue lyrics or draw regions by tapping, with cues shown on the mini waveform as ringed pin heads (paragraph breaks as slim ticks) and a live playhead. The tool pill reads Edit · Import · ↩ ↪ · 👆▾; opening the Mixer hides the undo/redo pair and the hand, and a song with no lyrics hides the hand but keeps the ▾ so the Cues and Regions lists stay reachable. Keyboard rail — while typing, the rail docks against the top of the keyboard with a compact Start/Stop at its left and full-height drag-to-scrub on the region strip. Paragraph-break capture — tapping a later paragraph of the section you are already recording adds a paragraph marker inside that region instead of starting a new one. Landscape either way — the Editor tab follows whichever way you turn the phone (camera-left when opened upright), and orientation changes fade through black instead of swinging — Sections 6, 6b. v4.22 adds: Editor clock is minutes:seconds (no fractional seconds — the waveform and ruler carry finer detail); "Title Announcement When:" card reorder — the renamed header reads into the three Played / Loaded / Segue trigger checkboxes, which now sit first, with the Mode picker (AI synthesis / Record / Use a file + voice) beneath them; Region Length picker restyled as a popover that also shows each length's duration at the current tempo; Snap resolution moved onto the snap control — tap toggles snap on/off, hold opens a menu with two groups, Snap Resolution (Bar / ½ Bar / Beat) and Ruler (Bars / Time); Time/Bars button retired — the snap control now sits beside the playhead clock in the header (its former spot), and ruler units live in its hold-menu; editor tips relocated — the header lightbulb button is gone, and tip banners are re-armed from ••• › Show Tips (no Settings toggle); transport-aware toolbar — on phone-width layouts (iPhone + narrow iPad cover) the AI pill (shown while stopped) and the Follow Playhead button (shown while playing) share one slot, and the narrow iPad cover hides the lyrics Import button + ↩ ↪ undo/redo until you edit lyrics; the wide iPad inline editor keeps everything — Sections 2, 4.1, 4.2, 6, and the Regions Editor toolbar / Snap-to-Grid / Button Tip Banners. v4.23 adds: iPhone editor ••• in the header — on the iPhone landscape Editor tab the ••• Timeline Tools button now sits in the header beside the AI pill, and the red ✕ Discard joins the green ✓ Keep & Close at the top of the right rail (side by side, spaced well apart so a reach for Save can't be mistaken for Discard); the former far-left rail is retired and the timeline reclaims that width — Section 6. v4.24 adds: Quantized Playhead Jump — dragging the playhead while a song plays holds it at the bar-snapped drop, then jumps to that spot on the next downbeat (rides the heartbeat grid, so no audible click is required); tapping a region chip, arming a Segue or Vamp, or pressing Stop cancels a pending jump. Playhead lyrics follow the music, not the finger — while you scrub, the Live and projected lyrics hold and settle on release (stopped → the drop point's section and paragraph, with the editor lyrics pane scrolling that paragraph fully into view; playing → the lyrics ride the quantized jump), so the audience never sees lyrics scrubbing back and forth. Regions without lyrics — when the playhead is in a region whose tag matches no lyric section (an instrumental / worship-leader part, or a name mismatch), the audience projection blanks to the song background instead of holding stale lyrics, the performer's Go Live lyrics show a dim region label (e.g. WORSHIP LEADER), and the lyrics editor keeps the document but clears the highlight and shows a neutral "no matching section" hint — Sections 5.3, 5.9.*

Back to contents

Generated from the complete project manual. Historical product names use their current names.